JP2022121609A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of stabilizing transmission of driving force.

SOLUTION: A direction of energization given from an energization spring 366 to a second rack 364 is configured to be non-parallel relative to a linear motion direction of the second rack 364. Therefore, the energization force of the energization spring 366 can be caused to act as a force in a direction pressing the second rack 364 to a guide mechanism. As the result, the second rack 364 is made difficult to be chattered to suppress a generation of irregular change in a posture thereof. Accordingly, an engagement between the second rack 364 and a second pinion 365b can be stabilized to stably transmit the driving force thereof.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting the driving force of a drive means through a rack and a pinion (Patent Document 1). In this case, for example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it. Therefore, it is also possible to provide an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack, and to assist the driving force of the driving means with the urging force of the urging means.

JP 2014-28226 A (for example, FIG. 20)

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the transmission of driving force tends to be unstable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the transmission of driving force.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means. a rack and pinion for transmitting force to the displacement member; Non-parallel to the direction.

A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the biasing means is formed of an elastic body.

A gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and arranged in a bent posture.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to stabilize the transmission of driving force.

According to the game machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 1, it is possible to stably energize the rack.

According to the game machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine of claim 2, it is possible to easily secure the space necessary for arranging the elastic body.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit when the vertical slide unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit viewed from the back; (a) is a front view of a displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b); be. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled displacement member as viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled displacement member viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit when the vertical slide unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit viewed from the back; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the rear base, middle base and front base; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the rear base, intermediate base and front base; (a) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state, and (b) is a back perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state. (a) is a front perspective view of a crank gear and a second rack in an exploded state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and a second rack in an exploded state. (a) is a front view of the vertical slide unit with the displacement member arranged at the raised position; (b) is a front view of the vertical slide unit with the displacement member arranged between the raised position and the lowered position; It is a front view, and (c) is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in the state where the displacement member was arrange|positioned at the lowered position. 16 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; FIG. 23 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22; FIG. 24 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 23; (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of a second rack and a second pinion. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other-side member in which the other-side member is viewed from the rear; It is a front view of an annulus formation unit. It is a rear view of an annulus forming unit. It is a front view of the other side annular unit. It is a rear view of the other side annular unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the decomposed other-side annular unit viewed from the front. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked at the decomposed other side annular unit from the back. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the rear base; (a) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state in which a posture is formed for arranging the annular segment at the retracted position, and (b) is a posture for arranging the annular segment at the annular forming position. FIG. 10 is a front view of the drive mechanism in a folded state; It is a front perspective view of a posture regulation member. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring segment along line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38(a), and (d) is a portion of the ring segment along line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId of FIG. 38(b). It is an expanded sectional view. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state where the ring segment is arranged at the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are the ring segment with the retracted position. FIG. 10 is a front view and a rear view of the torus forming unit in a state arranged between the position and the torus forming position, (a) and (b) showing the state in which the torus segment is arranged at the torus forming position; 2 is a front view and a rear view of an annulus forming unit in FIG. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state in which the ring segment is arranged between the retracted position and the ring forming position. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state in which the ring segment is arranged at the ring forming position. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the displacement member in the second embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partial enlarged views of the displacement member in a state where relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism. It is a sectional view. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of a displacement member in a third embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member in a state in which the rubber-like elastic body is elastically deformed. It is a diagram. (a) is a rear view of a displacement member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of (a). (a) is a rear view of a displacement member in a fifth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 45(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLVc-XLVc of 45(a); FIG. (a) And (b) is a front view of the displacement member in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front view of a vertical slide unit according to the seventh embodiment; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. FIG. 22 is a front view of a vertical slide unit in an eighth embodiment; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. FIG. 20 is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base in a ninth embodiment; 4 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base; FIG. FIG. 22 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member in the tenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the twelfth embodiment; It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. (a) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear schematic diagrams of the other side member schematically illustrating the mode of change in posture of the biasing spring. It is a diagram. (a) is a rear view of a vertical slide unit in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. FIG. 20 is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base in the sixteenth embodiment; 4 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided ring body in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided ring body in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a drawing 63(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the segmented ring along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc, and (d) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the segmented ring along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(b). FIG. 20 is a front view of a vertical slide unit and an annular ring forming unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit and the annular ring forming unit; FIG. 20 is a front view of a vertical slide unit and an annular ring forming unit in a nineteenth embodiment;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the later-described protruding motion unit 400 and compound motion unit 500 are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrude into the opening of the center frame 86 and are visible through the opening. It is said that For example, when the protruding motion unit 400 is placed in the rotational position by the first motion (see FIG. 14(a)), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 becomes visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When placed in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 has a box-shaped back case 210, and the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are stacked in order in the inner space of the back case 210. As shown in FIGS. A decorative cover 500 is provided on the foremost surface of the container.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310, one side member 320L and the other side member 320R which are arranged at a predetermined interval and support one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction so as to be able to guide each other. and an interposing member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposing member 370 are connected to the rear case 210. They are arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 respectively. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposition member 370 .

The ring forming unit 400 is composed of a one side ring unit 410L and the other side ring unit 410R. They are arranged on the front (front) side of the side member 320R. A pair of upper and lower annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 are displaceably arranged in each of the annular units 410L and 410R. The divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape into four parts in the circumferential direction. to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

The decorative cover 500 is attached to the standing end surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 and arranged on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400 . That is, the decorative cover 500 partially covers only the portion along the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, shields the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 from the player, and opens the opening 211a (that is, the second The 3-symbol display device 81) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The detailed configurations of the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 of the operation unit 200 configured as described above will be described below. First, the detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 28. FIG.

7 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the vertical slide unit 300 has first racks 315 arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of a displacement member 310 in parallel to each other. The rack 315 is meshed with each first pinion 351 respectively arranged on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Further, the displacement member 310 is slidably connected to the guide rod P at one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side thereof. It is arranged (fixed) on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R in a posture aligned in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, in the vertical slide unit 300, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation, the displacement member 310 is guided by the linear movement. While being guided by the rod P, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 21). Here, the detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG.

11(a) is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 11(b) is a rear view of the displacement member 310. FIG. 12(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 310 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 12(b) is a cross-sectional view of displacement member 310 along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the displacement member 310 includes a main body portion 311 formed in an elongated shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a cylinder protruding toward the front from the center of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. a rotating base 312, a rotating body 313 circular in front view rotatably and concentrically supported by the rotating base 312, and end sides connected displaceably to one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311, respectively. It mainly comprises a portion 314 and a first rack 315 fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the end side portion 314 .

A pair of upper and lower protruding pins 311a protrude from the rear surface of the body portion 311 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The protruding pin 311 a is a part for displaceably connecting the end side portion 314 to the body portion 311 , is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted into the elongated hole 314 a of the end side portion 314 .

The pair of upper and lower protruding pins 311a are arranged along a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (vertical direction in FIG. 11(b)). The projecting pin 311a on the other side is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (horizontal direction in FIG. 11(b)).

Further, the body portion 311 is formed with stopper surfaces 311b on the end surfaces (the left side and the right side in FIG. 11(a)) on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The stopper surface 311b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. As shown in FIG.

A drive motor and a gear mechanism (both not shown) are disposed inside the rotation base 312, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotating body 313 by the gear mechanism, thereby rotating the rotating body 313. It is rotated relative to the base 312 (body portion 311). Note that the rotation base 312 is fixed to the body portion 311 . Therefore, as will be described later, by holding the rotation base 312 by another member, displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted (see FIG. 65, for example).

The end side portion 314 is formed with an elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c. The elongated holes 314a are a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the protruding pins 311a of the main body 311, and are oval holes in a front view. The elongated hole 314a has an oval long diameter direction that is orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 and the one side member 320L). and the other side member 320R (horizontal direction in FIG. 11B).

In this case, between the protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 and the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314, there is provided a cylindrical cylindrical portion and a flange projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. A collar C is interposed. The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion of the collar C is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311, and the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion is equal to or slightly larger than the short diameter of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314. The dimension is set to be slightly smaller, and the outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be greater than the length of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12).

As a result, as will be described later, the protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 moves through the collar C in the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a (horizontal direction in FIG. 12(a)). can be displaced along That is, the body portion 311 can be relatively displaced with respect to the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 27). By interposing the collar C in this way, the collar C rolls between the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a, so that relative displacement can be performed smoothly and wear can be suppressed. and durability can be improved.

The stopper surface 314b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface, and the stopper surface 314b is formed in an assembled state (main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314). 314 are connected), it is formed at a position facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are formed when each protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is positioned at the center of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the longitudinal direction (that is, 11(a), when the body portion 311 is not tilted and is parallel to the left and right end side portions 314), they face each other in a parallel posture.

In addition, while maintaining this parallel posture, each protruding pin 311a (collar C) is positioned at the end of the long hole 314a on one side in the major axis direction (left side in FIG. 11(a)) or on the other side in the major axis direction (in FIG. 11(a)). ) on the right side), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval on both the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). gap is formed).

The first rack 315 is formed with a rack portion 315a and a slider holding portion 315c. The rack portion 315a is formed as a rack having a toothed side surface of a plate-like member, and is a portion that meshes with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 9) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In the assembled state, the tooth surface is arranged in parallel with the axis of the guide rod P.

The slider holding portion 315 c is a portion for holding the slider S between itself and the slider holding portion 314 c of the end side portion 314 . The slider holding portion 314c of the end side portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are each formed in a shape in which a cylinder is vertically divided into two, and are assembled (the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end side portion 314). ), the slider S is held between them (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinder).

The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted onto the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P, and has an outer diameter that corresponds to the inner diameter of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls protrude inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. It abuts to prevent the slider S from slipping off in the axial direction.

In this way, by adopting a structure in which the slider S is interposed between the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 and the guide rod P, the slider S can be slidably and slidably moved relative to the guide rod P made of brass. The material of the end side 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the brass guide rod P, while being able to be made of a material with excellent wear resistance. That is, since the end side portion 314 is a member that restricts the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective to be able to select a material that can ensure the rigidity during the restriction. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member that is meshed with the first pinion 351 and linearly moved by receiving the rotational driving force thereof, it is effective to be able to select a material that can secure rigidity for maintaining the meshing state. becomes.

Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, description will be made. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinions 351 arranged on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Each of the first racks 315 provided is linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is slid vertically while being guided along the guide rods P fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. be done. Here, detailed configurations of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG.

15 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. be.

Although the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R have a slight difference in shape, the parts that exhibit their technical functions are bilaterally symmetrical (plane symmetrical with respect to an imaginary plane located in the center between the opposing sides). ), and the configuration thereof is substantially the same, the other side member 320R will be described below as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the other side member 320R includes a rear base 331, an intermediate base 332 covering the front (front) side of the rear base 331, and a front (front) side of the intermediate base 332. a drive motor 341 attached to the intermediate base 332; a first pinion 351 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 334; and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the Here, detailed configurations of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332 and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the rear base 331, intermediate base 332 and front base 333, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the rear base 331, intermediate base 332 and front base 333. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the rear base 331 has a substantially L-shape in a front view from a main body portion formed in a vertically elongated shape and a protruding portion laterally protruding from the lower end of the main body portion. A transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 341 to the first pinion is accommodated between the intermediate base member 332 and the intermediate base member 332 .

The rear base 331 has a pinion shaft 331a and a rack shaft 331b protruding from the front of the main body (the surface facing the intermediate base 332), and has a first opening 331c and a second opening 331c in the main body and the projecting portion. 331d are formed with openings.

The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 19), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 (see FIG. 19). It is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted through the second rack 364 to regulate the posture of the second rack 364 . A screw is fastened to the end surface of the pinion shaft 331 a , and the head of the screw serves as a retainer for the first pinion 351 . Also, the diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 can rotate around the rack shaft 331b.

The rack shaft 331b is arranged at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 when the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are assembled. Specifically, the rack shaft 331b is arranged so that the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364. . As a result, as will be described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a supported by the gear shaft 332i ( See Figure 26).

The first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are openings extending linearly, respectively, and are areas corresponding to the biasing springs 366 (see FIG. 22) arranged in a bent posture (biasing springs 331c and 331d when viewed from the front). (region overlapping spring 366). Therefore, when mounting the biasing spring 366, after the biasing spring 366 is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the biasing spring 366 is inserted through the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the end portion can be engaged with the mating member, it is possible to prevent the biasing spring 366 from being repelled (jumping due to its own elastic recovery force) and mounting in a bent posture. The mounting operation of the biasing spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 28).

The biasing spring 366 is a coil spring, and the outer peripheral surface thereof is curved in an arc shape. is preferred. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in rigidity of the rear base 331 while enabling locking of the ends and suppression of sliding resistance.

The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear base 331 . That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front by a vertically elongated main body portion and a protruding portion laterally protruding from the lower end of the main body portion. By being covered on the front (front) side, the transmission mechanism is housed in the space formed between the opposing sides.

A first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b are formed in the main body of the intermediate base 332, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i extend from the rear surface of the main body (the surface facing the rear base 331). And a roller shaft 332r is protruded. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported on the pinion shaft 331a of the rear base 331 to the front (front) side of the intermediate base 332. 351 can be engaged with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 21).

The motor shaft insertion window 332b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other. It is an opening for Further, the plurality of gear shafts 332c-332i are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a-362e, the crank gear 363 and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism, respectively. Screws are fastened to the end surfaces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the heads of the screws are used to prevent the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism from coming off.

The roller shaft 332r is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the opposing surfaces of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the opposing surfaces are retained).

In addition, the intermediate base 332 has a pair of left and right regulation walls 332t projecting from the rear surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the rear base 331), and the front surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the front base 333). A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m projects from the front surface of the projecting portion (the surface facing the front base 333).

The regulating walls 332t are parts for regulating the posture of the second rack 364, and are formed in a pair at a predetermined interval. The space between the pair of restricting walls 332t facing each other is made larger than the width dimension of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap with the side surface of the second rack 364. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated around the rack shaft 331b by the gap (see FIG. 26).

The holding recesses 332j and 332k are parts for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are spaced apart in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 17) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. It is positioned and formed as a recess that is open on the side of the front base 333 . The depth and width of the recess are set to dimensions equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, by fitting the guide rods P into the holding recesses 332j and 332k and covering (fastening and fixing) the front base 333 to the intermediate base 332, the guide rods are arranged between the back surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. P can be sandwiched and the guide rod P can be held firmly.

As a result, the other side member 320R is assembled without the front base 333, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k. By attaching (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other-side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the work of assembling the vertical slide unit 300 can be made efficient.

The connecting shaft 332m is a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section that serves as a connecting portion with the interposing member 370, and is rotatably inserted into a connecting hole in the connecting plate 371 of the interposing member 370, thereby connecting the other side member 320R. Interposed member 370 is connected. That is, the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370 are connected in a state in which the relative position can be adjusted. Accordingly, as will be described later, when attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210, the attachment work can be performed while adjusting the attachment position, so that workability can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the transmission mechanism and first pinion 351 will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state, and FIG. 19(b) is a back perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b), the transmission mechanism includes a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341, and a top gear (gear 362a) meshing with the gear 361. Gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, a crank gear 363 meshed with the rear gear 362e of the gear train, a second rack 364 driven by the crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and the second rack 364 , a biasing spring 366 for applying a biasing force to the second rack 364, and a roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366. .

Here, detailed configurations of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . 20(a) is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 20(b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the crank gear 363 has an eccentric pin 363a protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and the eccentric pin 363a protrudes from the crank gear 363. A detected portion 363b is projected from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted through the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected portion 363b is a portion that is detected by a sensor device (not shown), and the sensor device determines the rotational position (phase ). Based on this detection result, main controller 110 can recognize that displacement member 310 has been placed in the raised position (see FIG. 21(a)) or the lowered position (see FIG. 21(c)).

The second rack 364 is formed with a guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 17) of the rear base 331 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (vertical direction in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b)). It is extended in a shape.

The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The width of the rack groove 364b is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a, so that the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b as the crank gear 363 rotates. .

The rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364). 363a acting on the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 can be suppressed from occurring in a component other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364, and the resistance when linearly moving the second rack 364 can be suppressed accordingly. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 19(a) and FIG. 19(b), description will be made. The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a that meshes with the rack of the second rack 364, and a speed increasing portion 365b that meshes with the first pinion 351. These second pinion 365a and speed increasing portion 365b It is integrally formed in a concentric state.

The biasing spring 366 is a metal coil spring, one end of which is locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end of which is locked to the end of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 . The biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed in tension when the second rack 364 is positioned at the lower end of the movable range, and applies the elastic recovery force to the second rack 364 as a biasing force. When the second rack 364 is displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, it is further tensile-deformed along with the displacement, thereby gradually increasing the biasing force applied to the second rack, and the second rack 364 is movable. When it reaches the upper end of the range, it is in the most tensile deformation state and exerts the maximum biasing force on the second rack 364 .

As will be described later, the biasing spring 366 applies a biasing force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) non-parallel to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 22 to 25). ), by forming the biasing spring 366 from a coil spring, it is possible to simplify the structure in which the direction of applying the biasing force is not parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 . Further, since the biasing force corresponding to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be stably biased.

The roller 367 has a cylindrical portion 367a that is rotatably supported by the roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 18) of the intermediate base 332, and a flange that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. A flange portion 367b is provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366 so that the biasing spring 366 is bent.

Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, description will be made. The interposing member 370 is formed in a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R as described above. Specifically, a pair of flat plate-like connecting plates 671 are suspended from the lower surface (lower side in FIG. 7) of the interposed member 370, and each connecting plate 671 has a circular connecting hole when viewed from the front. By inserting the connecting shaft 332m which is formed to penetrate and protrude from the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671, the interposing member 370 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. is set.

A screw is fastened to the end surface of the connecting shaft 332m, and the head of the screw serves as a retainer for the connecting plate 671. As shown in FIG. In this case, the inner diameter of the connecting hole in the connecting plate 671 is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 332m, and the thickness of the connecting plate 671 is slightly smaller than the height of the connecting shaft 332m. is set to Therefore, in the connecting portions between the interposing member 370 and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the connecting plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 332m.

As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is formed such that the displacement member 310 can be displaced along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 7) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed so that one longitudinal side (left side in FIG. 7) and the other side (right side in FIG. 7) can be guided by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, and the driving force of the driving motor 341 is By being applied, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction.

Conventionally, such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is installed between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) has low rigidity as a whole and is easily damaged. That is, since the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, when viewed from the front, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, which should be parallel to each other, are "half"). or in a side view, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, which should be parallel to each other, are deformed in a "V" shape). , the load concentrates on the connecting portion between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310, which is likely to be damaged. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process of transporting such a unit or the mounting process of attaching the unit to the mating member, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are arranged in a "V" shape with respect to the displacement member 310. It was necessary to handle it so that it would not be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 of the present embodiment, since the interposed member 320 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the entire unit is frame-shaped and its rigidity is increased. can be improved. That is, it is possible to prevent the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a “V” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310 . Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and workability in the transportation process and the mounting process can be improved.

A brass guide rod P is fixed to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. 314c) is connected, the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the guide rod P, thereby connecting the displacement member 310 to the one side member 320L and the other side member. A closed connecting loop between 320R and the interposer 370 can be formed.

That is, in the conventional product (that is, in a form without the guide rod P in this embodiment), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinions 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R The connecting loop is cut, and the displacement member 310 is disconnected from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R can be connected via the guide rod P (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole can be increased. Further, since the guide rod P is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the rigidity of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

In the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. (that is, the linear motion progress of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the first pinion 351 of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R) Even if there is a deviation from the progress of the linear motion of the first rack 315, the deviation is absorbed by the above relative displacement, and the displacement member 310 is formed to be stably displaced (see FIG. 27). ).

In this case, according to this embodiment, the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form that surrounds the guide rod P), and the guide rod P Since the displacement is restricted in any of the directions perpendicular to the axis (radial direction), the postures of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be stabilized when the displacement member 310 is slid. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guidance by the other-side member 320R, relative displacement occurs between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315. can be easily generated, and the function of absorbing deviation due to such relative displacement can be reliably exhibited.

Here, as described above, the interposing member 370 is inserted into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 371 in such a manner that the connecting shaft 332m is rotatable, so that the interposed member 370 is attached to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. They are connected so as to be displaceable (relatively rotatable). Therefore, since the relative positions of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370 can be adjusted, the workability of attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210 can be improved. For example, even if the other side member 320R is displaced from the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 after the one side member 320L is attached to the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted with respect to a predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311, the end side portion 314, and the first rack 315 are formed to be relatively displaceable, and the relative displacement is in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310) as the longitudinal direction. Since the configuration utilizes the elongated hole 314a, the configuration in which the interposing member 370 and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are relatively rotatable ensures the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole. , it is particularly effective in ensuring compatibility with the function of making it possible to adjust the mounting position.

Next, operations of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. As described above, the other side member 320R will be described below as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 with the displacement member 310 placed at the raised position, and FIG. 21(b) shows the displacement member 310 placed between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 21(c) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position. 21(a) to 21(c) illustrate a state in which the front base 333 is removed so that the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 can be visually recognized.

22 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 23 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 24 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base 331 in a state in which the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and intermediate base 332 in a state in which the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. be.

22 and 23 correspond to the state in which the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 21(a) is arranged at the raised position, and FIGS. Corresponds to the state placed in position. 22 and 24, illustration of the first pinion 351 is omitted. Also, a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated) is illustrated. However, the hatching of the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a), 22 and 23, when the displacement member 310 is positioned at the lowered position, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is at the lowest position (FIGS. 22 and 23) in the movable range. 23), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most contracted state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (right) in FIG. 22) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is rotated by the gear train (gears 362a to 362e) to the crank gear 363. , and the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (right) in FIG.

22, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is slid along the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is It is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 22), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (rightward) in FIG. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 rotates forward (clockwise (right) in FIG. 23).

The clockwise (right) rotation of the first pinion 351 in FIG. 23 is the counterclockwise (left) rotation of the other side member 320R in FIG. a) The counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation displaces (lowers) the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 downward (downward in FIG. 21(a)). As a result, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 21(b), after which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21(c).

When the displacement member 310 is placed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21(c), the transmission mechanism moves the second rack 364 to the uppermost position (FIGS. 24 and 25) of the movable range, as shown in FIGS. 25), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most extended state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 24) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 causes the above-described action through the transmission mechanism. is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the opposite action, and the first pinion 351 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 23)). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 21(b), and then placed at the raised position shown in FIG. 21(a).

Here, in this embodiment, after the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 and converted into rotary motion, the rotary motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. The stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is ensured by adopting a two-stage rack structure in which the movement is converted into linear motion. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a third pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 is adopted as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, the second rack 364 has a tooth surface for the second pinion 365b. It is necessary to secure each of the tooth flanks for the third pinion, which causes an increase in the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 (vertical direction in FIG. 22).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364 is formed not by the third pinion but by the crank mechanism (the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364). Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to provide the second rack 364 with a tooth surface for the third pinion, and the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, since the rack groove 364b extends linearly in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, the direction perpendicular to the direction of linear movement of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 22), When the crank gear 363 is rotated and the eccentric pin 363a slides in the rack groove 364b, a force component acting on the rack groove 364b from the eccentric pin 363a includes a component other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364. can be suppressed, and the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, energy consumption required for linear motion of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

21(a) or the lowered position shown in FIG. It is done by In this case, for example, sensor devices are provided at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, respectively, and the displacement member 310 is placed at the raised position or the lowered position according to the detection results of each sensor device. In the structure for detecting the movement of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, it is necessary to dispose sensor devices at separated positions such as the start and end of the linear motion of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, which lengthens the wiring accordingly. If the wiring becomes long, not only does the material cost increase, but it is necessary to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members. This increases the risk of disconnection. In particular, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to arrange wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the crank gear 363 is provided with the detected portion 363b, and the rotation position (phase) of the detected portion 363 is detected by a sensor device, whereby the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position. Each sensor device can be arranged close to each other because of the structure that detects the fact that it has been done. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, it is possible not only to reduce the material cost, but also to improve the degree of freedom in design and to suppress the occurrence of disconnection.

Here, in the structure for raising and lowering the displacement member 310, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is raised than when it is lowered. In this case, in this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the raised position, the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to raise the displacement member 310 (that is, to displace the second rack 364 downward (downward in FIGS. 24 and 25). It can be used as a force for That is, the driving force of the driving motor 341 can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 .

However, in such a structure in which the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364, the transmission of driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to become unstable. That is, the guide mechanism that guides the linear motion of the second rack 364 is provided with a predetermined tolerance. The rack 364 has wobble. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced in a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 fluctuates by the tolerance (gap). rattling in the direction of rotation) occurs. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure in which the biasing spring 366 applies the biasing force to the second rack 364, if the direction of the biasing force coincides with the direction of the rectilinear motion of the second rack 364, the biasing spring 366 is The biasing force acts as a force that encourages the second rack 364 to move wildly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is Being non-parallel (inclined), the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction of pushing the second rack 364 toward one side of the guide mechanism that guides the second rack 364 . can work. As a result, the second rack 364 is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of erratic posture.

Furthermore, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 Even if the posture of the second rack 364 temporarily fluctuates, the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction to converge the posture of the rack 364 . Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement (tooth engagement) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and to stabilize the transmission of the driving force.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied is inclined in the direction of biasing the lower end side of the second rack 364 toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side in FIG. 22). . That is, since the direction in which the biasing force is applied is the direction in which the force component that brings the tooth flanks of the second rack 364 closer to the tooth flanks of the second pinion 365a is generated, the gap between these two tooth flanks can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag in transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth flanks, thereby improving the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress accelerated wear of the tooth flanks and breakage of the tooth flanks due to collision between the tooth flanks immediately after the driving force is transmitted from the stopped state (in the initial stage of meshing). Furthermore, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

Here, as described above, in the structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the biasing spring 366. FIG. Therefore, it has been difficult to set the length dimension of the biasing spring 366 to a length dimension that enables exertion of a desired biasing force. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the biasing spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture, so that the length dimension can be secured while avoiding interference with other members. be able to.

That is, in this embodiment, as described above, the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view from the main body portion and the overhanging portion projecting from the main body portion. as a space for urging the urging spring 366, not only is it possible to arrange the urging spring 366 in a bent posture, but also the rigidity of the structure consisting of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is increased. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the projecting portion projects inward from the lower ends of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the interposing member 370 is effective as a space for arranging the projecting portion. available for In addition, by forming the connecting shaft 332m on the front surface of the projecting portion (intermediate base 332), it is possible to facilitate the connection work with the interposing member 370, thereby improving the workability of the interposing member. The effect of improving the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole by interposing the 370 can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the state of meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described.

26(a) to 26(c) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, corresponding to FIG. 26(b) shows the state in which the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise about the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state shown in FIG. 26(a). ) in which the second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise around the rack shaft 331b. Also, FIG. 26 illustrates a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the hatching of the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As described above, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced in a straight line. A rattle in the direction of approaching and separating from the 2-pinion 365a (horizontal direction in FIG. 26(a)) occurs. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the rear base 331 is arranged to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b is rotatable and slidable in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. is inserted into the Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, as shown in FIGS. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

That is, when the posture of the second rack 364 fluctuates, the fluctuation is not caused by rattling in the direction of approaching or separating from the second pinion 365a (horizontal direction in FIG. 26(a)), (rotation around the rack axis 331b). As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a constant meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

In this case, the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364, and the rack shaft 331b is formed in the region of the rear base 331 facing the second rack 364. 331b can be arranged on the trajectory of the second rack 364 in linear motion. That is, there is no need to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for displacing the second rack 364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364. Since it can be arranged in a dead space, which is a space for movement of the second rack 364 and in which other members cannot be arranged, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

Next, referring to FIG. 27, the operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311) will be described.

27(a) to 27(c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 27(a), the left and right end side portions 314 are at the same progress of slide displacement, but in FIG. FIG. 27(c) shows the state in which the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b perform the stopper function when the difference in the progress of the slide displacement exceeds a predetermined amount.

As described above, in the other side member 320R, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 22 to 25). The first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on the other longitudinal direction side (the right side in FIG. 21) of the displacement member 310 is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the other side member 320R. Accompanied by linear motion (up or down). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the one side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the one-side member 320L, and the first rack 315 linearly moves (rises) as the first pinion 351 rotates. or lowered). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) (see FIG. 21).

However, in such a structure in which one longitudinal side of the displacement member 310 is guided and driven by the one side member 320L and the other longitudinal side thereof is separately guided and driven by the other side member 320R, guidance and driving by the one side member 320 and driving are performed separately. , guide and drive by the other side member 320R. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310 . If there is a large deviation between the guidance and drive by the one side member 320 and the guidance and drive by the other side member 320R, not only will the load on each drive motor 341 become excessive, but there is a possibility that the displacement member 310 will stop. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by inserting the protruding pin 311a of the body portion 311 into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12), the end side portion 314 and the second end portion 314 of the body portion 311 are inserted. One rack 315 is formed to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, if the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the one-side and the other-side 27(b), even if there is a difference in sliding resistance between the two sliders S, or if there is variation in driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), the one-side member 320L The linear motion of the first rack 315 (left side in FIG. 27(b)) guided and driven precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 (right side in FIG. 27(b)) guided and driven by the other side member 320R. (located on the upper side in FIG. 27(b)).

That is, when there is a deviation between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R, the deviation is caused by the displacement member 310 as shown in FIG. 27(b). It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311). As a result, the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a that constitutes the movable mechanism extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). 27(a), which is the direction connecting the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L differs from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (when there is a deviation), the main body portion 311 is affected by the difference. Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 of the protruding pin 311a is likely to occur, thereby causing one end side portion 314 to move more along the guide rod P than the other end side portion 314. It is possible to ensure the transition to the form shown in FIG.

Two long holes 314a are formed in parallel in each end side portion 314, and two protruding pins 311a are protruded from one side and the other side of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. By ensuring the strength of the connection between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slid and displaced in the vertical direction.

Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively. 27(b), when the displacement at one end side portion 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side portion 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount, as shown in FIG. 27(c). ), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be brought into contact with each other to regulate. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress breakage of the projecting pin 311a.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided for each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are driven (double-sided drive). In comparison with the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (single-sided drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and the size of the displacement member 310 can be increased or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased accordingly. can be planned.

On the other hand, in such a double-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the driving on the side of the one side member 320L and the driving on the side of the other side member 320R, and deviation is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311) is provided on one side and the other side of the body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in two places. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the driving on the side of the one-side member 320L and the driving on the side of the other-side member 320R, the movable mechanism positioned on the side of the one-side member 320L of the two movable mechanisms formed at two locations is used. The mechanism is deformed in different forms (protruding pin 311a can be displaced within slot 314a.

Therefore, deviations on the one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by interlocking the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 310 can be suppressed.

Next, a method of assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in which the other side member 320L is viewed from the rear. 28, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 28, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 by attaching the drive motor 341 to the front of the intermediate base 332 and mounting the gear shafts 332c to 332g on the rear of the intermediate base 332. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 18 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is inserted into the rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted through 364b, and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is meshed with the eccentric pin 363a.

Next, after the roller 367 is placed on the rear surface of the intermediate base 322 in such a direction that the flange portion 367a is brought into contact with it, the urging spring 366 is placed. The biasing spring 366 is placed in a bent posture while engaging the other end with an engaging portion formed at the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 . At this stage, one end of the biasing spring 366 is not locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and is held between the roller 367 and part of the gear train (gears 362a, 362b). be.

In this case, the biasing spring 366 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so that it can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, a part of the gear train (gears 362a and 362b) is also used as a part for holding the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture, so a wall portion for holding the biasing spring 366 is not provided. It is possible to dispense with the need to provide them, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 28) in this way, the front of the rear base 331 is faced to the rear of the intermediate base 332, and both are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c of the rear base 331 . This completes the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and intermediate base 332 .

The operation of locking one end of the biasing spring 366 to the locking portion of the second rack 364 uses, for example, a jig having a claw-shaped tip. Specifically, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of a jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the rear base 331, and the urging spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended) while the second rack is moved. 364 is locked.

Here, when the biasing spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure the installation space while maintaining the bent posture of the biasing spring 366. This is difficult, and a phenomenon occurs in which the urging spring 366 is repelled (jumped by its own elastic recovery force) during the assembly process. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 28 (that is, before the rear base 331 is covered on the rear side of the intermediate base 332), when one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, hold down the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 with one hand so that the biasing spring 366 remains bent and the second rack 364 does not fall off, while holding the rear base 331 in the middle with the other hand. It is necessary to cover the base 332, which is complicated.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first opening 331 c is formed in a portion of the rear base 331 (the region including one end of the biasing spring 366 ), so that the rear base 331 is positioned on the rear surface of the intermediate base 332 . After covering, one end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. That is, by covering the back base 331 first, the back base 331 is arranged to face the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the back base 331 is arranged to face the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364). 364 can be held down), and it is possible to suppress the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

In addition, by forming the first opening 331c in the rear base 331 in this way, not only can the workability of the assembly work (the work of attaching the biasing spring 366) be improved, but also the biasing spring 366 can reduce the sliding resistance when elastically deforming (stretching). That is, as described above, the first opening 331c is formed in a region overlapping the biasing spring 366 when the rear base 331 is viewed from the rear, thereby suppressing the sliding between the biasing spring 366 and the rear base 331. can reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing spring 366 from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the second rack 364 . Further, even when the biasing spring 366 is formed as a metal coil spring and the rear base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed so that the biasing spring 366 Abrasion of the back base 331 due to sliding can be suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to suppress dust generated due to abrasion from entering mechanical moving parts and electronic devices such as sensor devices and giving adverse effects.

Further, in the rear base 331, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end side of the biasing spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end side of the biasing spring 366 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance and suppress wear as described above.

In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in the area corresponding to the linear portion of the urging spring 366). Therefore, it is possible to leave the plate surface (opposing member facing the biasing spring 366 ) at the bent portion of the biasing spring 366 . Therefore, while maximizing the formation area of the opening, while maximally securing the effect of reducing sliding resistance and suppressing wear, the opposing member is provided at a location necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing spring 366 . can be placed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 41, the detailed configuration of the ring forming unit 400 will be described.

29 is a front view of the ring forming unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the ring forming unit 400. FIG. 29 and 30 illustrate a state in which the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the ring forming unit 400 is composed of one side ring unit 410L and the other side ring unit 410R, which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A pair of upper and lower annular segments 440L1, 440L2, 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged in the units 410L and 410R, respectively. The ring forming unit 400 operates the ring units 410L and 410R to move the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. forming position), and forms a ring shape at the ring forming position (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

Here, the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the parts exhibiting technical functions are bilaterally symmetrical (center symmetrical with respect to an imaginary plane located at ), and the configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, the other side ring unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one side ring unit 410L will be described. are omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG.

31 is a front view of the other ring unit 410R, and FIG. 32 is a rear view of the other ring unit 410R. Note that FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate the state in which the split ring members 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the ring forming position.

33 is an exploded front perspective view of the other side annular unit 410R viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the other side annular unit 410R viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the annular unit 410R; Note that FIGS. 33 and 34 correspond to the state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the other annular unit 410R includes a rear base 420, a drive mechanism 430 provided on the rear base 420, and an annular segment 440R1 driven by the drive mechanism 430. , 440R2, an attitude defining member 450 that defines the attitudes of the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2, a suspension mechanism 460 that suspends and supports the upper part of the attitude defining member 450 from the rear base 420, and the attitude defining member 450. It mainly includes a lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end and a cover body 480 that covers the rear base 420 . Now, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear base 420 will be described.

35 is a front perspective view of the rear base 420. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the rear base 420 includes a body portion that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front, an upper projecting portion that projects sideways from the upper end of the body portion, and a portion extending from the upper projecting portion. It is formed in a generally inverted F shape when viewed from the front, with a lower protruding portion that protrudes sideways from the main body portion at a position that is also downward.

The rear base 420 has a motor shaft insertion window 421 formed in its main body. are projected respectively. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the rear surface of the rear base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front side of the rear base 420 .

The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are respectively inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d (see FIG. 36) of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism to guide the linear motion of the third rack 433. is a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set equal to or slightly smaller than the groove widths of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

The gear shaft 423 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting a transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 36) of the drive mechanism. It is a cylindrical body with an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 36) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436, respectively.

On the front surface of the rear base 420, a cover body 480 is provided (fixed by fastening) in areas corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425, 426. The upper end side of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 (rotational bases 435a, 436a) are housed between them (see FIG. 31).

A suspension mechanism 460 is arranged (fixed by fastening) on the upper protruding portion of the rear base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is arranged on the lower end and the lower protruding portion of the main body portion of the rear base 420 ( fastening and fixing) (see FIGS. 31 to 33 for all). As will be described later, the posture regulating member 450 is suspended from the front (front) side of the rear base 420 via a suspension mechanism 460 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The lower end guide mechanism 470 restricts the rattling (rocking) in the front-rear direction when sliding to the right. The lower end side of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the rear base 420 (see FIG. 31).

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism that displaces the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the rear surface of the rear base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. a gear 432 driven by the gear 432, a third rack 433 linearly moved by the gear 432, a transmission gear 434 rotationally driven by the linear movement of the third rack 433, and a transmission gear 434 driven by the transmission gear 434 to rotate An upper arm body 435 and a lower arm body 436 are formed. Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the detailed configuration and operation of drive mechanism 430 will be described.

FIG. 36(a) is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state in which a position for arranging the . It should be noted that illustration of the drive motor 431 is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape when viewed from the front. 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by tooth cutting the side surfaces of the upper end side and the lower end side of the flat plate-like body (the left side surface in FIG. 36(a)). A transmission gear 434 is meshed with the rack portion 433b on the upper end side, and a gear 432 is meshed with the rack portion 433a on the lower end side.

The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 35) of the rear base 420 are respectively inserted, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. 36(a), and extends linearly in the vertical direction (that is, the longitudinal direction of the plate-like body (third rack 433), the vertical direction in FIG. 36(a)) in parallel with the tooth flanks.

The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as elongated flat bodies, with rotary bases 435a and 436a on the proximal end side of the elongated bodies, and rotary connecting parts 435b and 436b on the distal end side of the elongated bodies. are respectively formed.

The rotary bases 435a and 436a are provided with circular shaft holes in a front view for being rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, respectively. A gear is engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435a and 436a are formed as gears rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420. As shown in FIG. The gear on the rotation base 435a of the upper arm 435 meshes with the gear on the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436, and the gear on the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436 meshes with the transmission gear 434.

The rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions that are connected to the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as will be described later, are connected to the divided annular bodies via the arm connection grooves 451 (see FIG. 37) of the posture regulating member 450. 440R1 and 440R2 are rotatably connected to rotary connecting portions 441 (see FIG. 34) projecting from the rear surfaces of the 440R1 and 440R2.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the drive mechanism 430 is in a state in which the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions, the third rack 433 is at the lowest position (see FIG. 36A) in the movable range. 36), and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are positioned so that their longitudinal directions are along the vertical direction (that is, on the extension line of the imaginary line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). ) in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the rear base 420 are positioned.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm 435 can be erected until it assumes a vertical posture in a state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions. As will be described later, the split ring body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

From the state shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (left) in FIG. 36 ) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 , the rotation of the gear 432 causes the third rack 433 to rotate. is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 36(a)), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (leftward) in FIG. 36(a).

When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (left) in FIG. 36(a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (right) in FIG. 36(a). At the same time, the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436 causes the rotation base 435a of the upper arm 435 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the tip side of the upper arm body 435 (rotational connection portion 435b) is lowered, while the tip side of the lower arm body 436 (rotational connection portion 436b) is raised, as shown in FIG. 36(b). A posture is formed in which the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming position.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), in a state in which the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular ring forming position, the third rack 433 is positioned at the lowest position in the movable range (lower side in FIG. 36). ). When the gear 432 is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise (right) in FIG. 36) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from this state, the rotation of the gear 432 is transmitted via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434, The force is transmitted to the rotation base portion 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base portion 435a of the upper arm body 435 by an action opposite to the action described above. As a result, the tip side (rotational connection portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the tip side (rotational connection portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions.

According to this embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with rotation bases 435a and 436a on their base end sides, and the gears of the rotation bases 435a and 436a are meshed with each other. Since it is rotatably supported by the rear base 420 in this state, the rotation of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be synchronized. As a result, as will be described later, the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2 disposed on the distal end sides of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the ring forming position (FIG. 31). and FIG. 32). Further, when the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is rotationally driven, the upper arm body 435 can also be driven and rotated via the engagement of the rotation bases 435a and 436a. Therefore, two arms (upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and there is no need to provide a drive source for each arm, thereby reducing part costs and space efficiency. can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. The posture regulating member 450 is a member for regulating the postures of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the annular segments R1 and 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the annular ring forming position, the annular segments R1 and 440R2 are slid in the left-right direction along with the displacement of the annular segments R1 and 440R2. The posture of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is maintained in a non-rotating state (that is, displaced between the retracted position and the annulus forming position while maintaining the parallel posture). Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the detailed configuration of the posture regulating member 450 will be described.

37 is a front perspective view of the posture regulating member 450. FIG. Note that FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the upper end of the posture determining member 450 is suspended by the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end of the posture determining member 450 is guided by the lower end guide mechanism 470 .

As shown in FIG. 37, the posture regulating member 450 is a front face interposed between the distal end sides (rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2. It is a vertically elongated plate-like member (see FIGS. 31 and 32), and two sets of three grooves, namely, an arm connecting groove 451 and a pair of posture regulating grooves 452 located across the arm connecting groove 451, are vertically arranged. A set is formed.

The arm connection groove 451 is for connecting the rotation connection portions 435a and 436 (see FIG. 36) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the rotation connection portions 441 (see FIG. 34) of the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2. , which extends linearly along the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the posture regulating member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 37). The posture regulating groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 34) of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted through the collar C, and extends linearly in the vertical direction parallel to the arm connecting shaft 451. will be extended to

The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotary connecting portions 435a and 436 of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 and the rotary connecting portion 441 of the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 can rotate within the groove and along the groove. The groove width of the attitude regulating groove 452 is set to a dimension that allows the sliding shaft 442 (collar C) of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 to slide along the groove. .

That is, the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connecting shaft 451, while the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 slide into the attitude regulation groove 452. By inserting the driving shaft 442 , the position determining member 450 is held in a state in which it is made non-rotatable but allowed to slide in the vertical direction. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arms 435 and 436 are rotated, the posture regulating member 450 is slid in the left-right direction, and the divided annular members 440R1 and 440R2 maintain their postures in a parallel state. 39 to 41).

The suspension mechanism 460 includes a base portion 461 which is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate in a front view and which is arranged (fixed by fastening) on the overhanging portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35) of the rear base 420, and the base portion 461 is arranged on the base portion 461. and a brass guide rod 462 formed as a rod-shaped body with a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is arranged in a posture along the left-right direction with the base portion 461 arranged on the rear base 420 . A cylindrical slider portion 453 is provided at the upper end of the posture regulating member 450 , and a guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453 . As a result, the posture regulating member 450 is suspended from the rear base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member that is arranged (fixed by fastening) at the lower end of the body portion of the rear base 420 and the lower protruding portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35). A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion where it is provided. The guide groove 471 displaces the lower end of the posture determining member 450 in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the lower end of the posture determining member 450 is displaced when the posture determining member 450 is rotated about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460). It is a part for regulating within a predetermined range, and is formed as a recessed groove with a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open at the top (upper side in FIG. 37) and extends along the direction parallel to the guide rod 462 .

The width of the guide groove 471 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the lower end of the posture determining member 450, and the guide groove 471 is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the lower end of the posture determining member 450 suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460. On the other hand, the inner side surfaces of the guide grooves 471 facing each other are arranged at positions facing each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. That is, the lower end of the posture regulating member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471, and the lower end of the posture regulating member 450 does not come into contact with the inner surface of the guide groove 471 when the posture regulating member 450 is in a stable state. be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the posture regulating member 450 is suspended and supported by the rear base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 at its upper end, and loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470 at its lower end. Therefore, the resistance when the posture regulating member 450 is slid laterally with respect to the rear base 420 is suppressed, and the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 displaces the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 (Fig. 39 to 41) can be performed smoothly.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on the rear base 420 and the pair of guide shafts guide the upper and lower ends of the posture regulating member 450, there are two sliding portions, which increases the frictional resistance. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since only one sliding portion can be provided, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the attitude determining member 450 is slidably displaced. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture determining member 450 rotates about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460 so that the lower end side of the posture determining member 450 is aligned with the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Even if it abuts, since it is suspended and supported, the posture regulating member 450 can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture regulating member 450 can be returned to a state in which its lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470 . Therefore, from this point as well, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the posture determining member 450 is slidably displaced.

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. A rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 are projected from the rear surface of the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2. As described above, the rotary connecting portion 441 is connected to the rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 via the arm connecting shaft 441 of the posture determining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is connected to the collar. It is inserted through the posture regulating groove 452 of the posture regulating member 450 via C.

As a result, the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced vertically relative to the attitude determining member 450 as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate, and slide horizontally together with the attitude determining member 450. As a result, while maintaining the parallel posture, the circular segments 440L1 and 440L2 and the circular segment are displaced along an arc-shaped locus between the retracted position and the ring formation position. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 abut each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each of the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2, thereby properly contacting the ones displaced along the arc-shaped trajectory and preventing backlash after contact. It can suppress sticking and wobbling. Now, with reference to FIG. 38, the positioning mechanism formed on the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 will be described.

The positioning mechanisms are formed on the contact surfaces of the divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a representative example, and the explanation of the positioning mechanisms formed on other contact surfaces will be omitted.

38(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring 440L1 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, and FIG. 38(b) is a portion of the segmented ring 440R1 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the split ring body 440L1 taken along line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38(a), and FIG. 38(d) is an enlarged side view of FIG. 38(b). FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an annular segment 440R1 taken along line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId;

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d), the positioning mechanism includes positioning projections 491 protruding from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular segment 440R1 and receiving the positioning projections 491. Possible recesses include a positioning recess 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440L1, an engaging protrusion 492a projecting from the recessed bottom surface of the positioning recess 492, and an engaging protrusion 492a. An engaging concave portion 491a is provided in the projecting end surface of the positioning convex portion 491 as a concave portion that can receive the portion 492a.

As shown in FIGS. 38(b) and 38(d), the positioning projections 491 are formed on the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. surface) and front and rear side surfaces (the right and left surfaces in FIG. 38(b)) are formed as tapered surfaces that are inclined in the direction of narrowing the facing distance toward the projecting tip. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the positioning recess 492 has a direction in which the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 38(a)) narrows toward the bottom surface of the recess. is formed as a tapered surface that inclines to As a result, even if there is a positional deviation between the divided annular body 440L1 and the divided annular body 440R1, the positioning protrusion 491 is aligned with the positioning recess 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. Make it easier to accept.

The length of extension of the positioning recess 492 (vertical length in FIG. 38(a)) is longer than the length of extension of the positioning protrusion 491 (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 38(b)). (d)), the direction in which they extend is the direction corresponding to the arc-shaped trajectory of the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, the direction along the movement trajectory when the contact surface is viewed from the front). . As a result, when the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 approach each other along an arc-shaped trajectory and their contact surfaces contact each other, one of the annular segmented bodies 440L1 and 440R1 precedes the other. Even if there is a positional deviation between them, the positioning protrusion 491 can be easily received in the positioning recess 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other.

The engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby performing final positioning. The protrusion height of the engaging protrusion 492a is set smaller than the recess depth of the positioning recess 492, and the recess depth of the engaging recess 491a is the same as that of the positioning protrusion 491. It is set to a dimension smaller than the projection height.

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively rough positioning accuracy (relatively wide permissible range of positional deviation) can be performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, the projecting tip of the positioning projection 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of , by engaging the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a with each other, the positioning accuracy is improved, the annular shape is properly formed, and rattling after the annular shape is formed is reduced. It is possible to perform two-stage positioning that can reliably suppress wobble.

The operation of the annular ring forming unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG.

39(a) and 39(b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 40(a) and FIG. 40(b) is a front view and rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in which the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged between the retracted position and the ring forming position, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 with the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 arranged at the ring forming positions.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), at the retracted position, the split ring members 440L1 to 440R2 are most distant from each other. That is, by maximizing the facing distance between the posture determining members 450 of the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R (that is, each posture determining member 450 is arranged at the most retracted position in the left-right direction). ), the distance between the annular segments 440L1, 440L2 and the annular segments 440R1, 440R2 facing each other in the horizontal direction is maximized. In addition, by arranging the divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2 at the upper end or the lower end of each posture regulating member 450, the distance between the divided annular bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the divided annular bodies 440L2 and 440R2 in the vertical direction can be increased. is maximized.

From this state, when the drive mechanism 430 is operated to rotate the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (see FIG. 36), each posture regulating member 450 moves left and right along with the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436. By moving forward, the divided annular bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the direction of narrowing the distance between them facing each other in the left-right direction. The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are lowered or raised, respectively, and the gaps between the divided annular bodies 440L1, 440R1 and the divided annular bodies 440L2, 440R2 in the vertical direction are narrowed, and the state shown in FIG. 40 is formed.

When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 is further advanced from the state shown in FIG. 40, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the horizontal direction along with the rotation of the upper and lower arms 435 and 436. The divided annular bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the divided annular bodies 440R1, 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to a position where the contact surfaces of the divided annular bodies 440L1, 440R1 and 440L2, 440R2 are vertically displaced (raised or lowered) to a position where their contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 41, the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions to form a ring shape.

As described above, according to the ring forming unit 400, the posture determining member 450 can be slid in the horizontal direction by the suspension mechanism 460, and the ring divisions 440L1 to 440L1 through the grooves 451, 452 of the posture determining member 450 Due to the sliding displacement of 440R2 in the vertical direction, the postures of the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are maintained constant (parallel) and displaced along arc-shaped trajectories to form an annular shape at the annular forming position.

Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2, a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism comprising a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and of equal length) can also be used. It is possible to form a toric shape at the forming location. For example, focusing on the split ring body R1, the base ends of the first and second arms are rotatably connected to the rear base 420, and the tip sides of the first and second arms are connected to the split ring body 440R1. By rotatably connecting and rotating these first and second arms, it is possible to displace the split ring body 440R1 while maintaining it in a fixed posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2, the ring can be formed at the ring forming position.

However, in such a structure using a parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm interfere with each other, so that it is not possible to secure a sufficient range of motion for the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2. For example, focusing on the split ring body 440R1, in this embodiment, the upper arm body 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring formation position (see FIGS. 36(b) and 41), and the upper arm body is tilted at the retracted position. Similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted horizontally at the ring formation position, and the first arm and the second arm are tilted at the retracted position. to stand up vertically. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when raising and lowering the first arm and the second arm in the retracted position, one arm interferes with the base end side of the other arm, so it is not possible to stand up in a vertical posture. . As a result, the annular segment 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted rearward.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture determining member 450 is arranged so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the rear base 420, and the rotation of the split ring member 440R1 with respect to the posture determining member 450 is restricted. The base end side of the upper arm body 435 is connected to the rear base 420 and the tip end side is rotatably connected to the annular split body 440R1. The ring segment 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a fixed posture. That is, unlike the parallel link mechanism, two arms are not required, and only one arm (upper arm body 435) can be used. As a result, the arms do not interfere with each other, so that the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it assumes a vertical posture (see FIG. 36(a)), and the annular divided body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward. can be done.

Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, since the first arm and the second arm are inclined at the retracted position, the weight of the annular segment 440R1 moves the first arm and the second arm in the inclination direction (that is, direction to form an annulus forming position). Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 431 needs to support the weight of the split ring R1, which increases energy consumption.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 can be vertically erected at the retracted position, so that the upper arm body 435 can support the weight of the divided annular body 440R1. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 431 required to support the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 (hold it at the retracted position) can be reduced or eliminated, and energy consumption can be reduced.

When the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions shown in FIG. 41, positioning is performed by the positioning mechanism as described above (see FIG. 38).

Specifically, a positioning projection 491 protrudes from the contact surface of the divided annular body 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is formed from the contact surface of the divided annular body 440L1. 492 (vertical dimension in FIG. 38(a)) is set to be larger than the extended length of the positioning projection 491 (vertical dimension in FIG. 38(b)). When 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the annulus forming position and the contact surfaces come closer to each other, the positioning convex portion 491 is received (engaged) in the positioning concave portion 492 for positioning. can.

That is, since the abutment surfaces of the ring divisions 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other along an arc-shaped (circular motion) trajectory, a concave shape and a convex shape of the same size are combined with a convex shape. cannot be combined. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning recess 492 extends as an elongated hole longer than the positioning protrusion 491 along its trajectory. 491 can be received (engaged).

On the other hand, positioning only by the engagement of the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 does not allow the positioning to be performed in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492 (left and right direction in FIG. 38(a), FIG. 41(a) vertical direction). That is, even when the annular divisions 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other due to the arc-shaped restriction, the positioning recess 492 can receive the positioning protrusion 491, so that the positioning recess 492 is longer than the extension length of the positioning protrusion 491. Since the extending length of the positioning recess 492 is increased, the positioning protrusion 491 cannot be engaged in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492 . Therefore, it is not possible to position the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492, which causes rattling and wobble.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is formed with the engaging concave portion 491a, and the positioning concave portion 492 is formed with the engaging convex portion 492a. When arranged in the position, the engagement recess 491a and the engagement projection 492a can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 can be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492 as well. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling and wobbling.

It is also possible to omit the positioning protrusion 491 and the positioning recess 492 and position the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 only by the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a. However, in this case, it is difficult to receive (engage) the engaging protrusion 492a with the engaging recess 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435 and the dimensional tolerance of the sliding and rotating parts. becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first stage of positioning, and then the engaging concave portion 491a is covered as the second stage of positioning. Since the engaging projections 492a are engaged, the positioning of the second stage (engagement of the engaging projections 492a with the engaging recesses 491a) can be reliably performed, and the above-described annular divisions 440L1 and 440R1 can be engaged. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of backlash and wobble.

That is, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning (first stage positioning), the protruding tip of the positioning protrusion 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of contacting, by engaging the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a (positioning of the second stage), the positioning accuracy is improved and the annular shape is properly formed. It is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobbling after forming the ring shape.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a second embodiment will be described. 42(a) and 42(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment. 42(c) and 42(d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism.

42(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 42(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b). Also, FIGS. 42(c) and 42(d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the projecting pin 311a of the body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 to connect the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the second embodiment are connected by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42( a ) to 42 ( d ), in the displacement member 2310 according to the second embodiment, between the rear surface of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 2314 . are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610 . The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting spheres (ball portions) at both ends with a rod-shaped body, and by bringing the spheres at both ends into spherical contact with socket portions formed in the main body portion 2311 and the end side portions 2314 respectively, the main body The portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable in any direction.

The socket portions of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portions 2314 are covers in which hemispherical spherical surfaces are recessed in the portions where the hemispherical spherical surfaces are recessed in the back surface of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portions 2314. By covering bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. Also, the cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are tapered to avoid interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610. As shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected via the ball joint mechanism, so that they can be smoothly displaced relative to each other in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on the one side and the other side). If there is a difference in the sliding resistance in the case where there is a difference in the sliding resistance, or if there is a variation in the driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if there is a gap between the two, the gap is corrected by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement of the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 (see FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 2310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 2310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the displacement member 2310 according to the present embodiment, biasing springs 2620 are interposed between the back surfaces of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 2314 . The biasing spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring and is interposed between the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in an elastically compressed and deformed state. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force to keep the facing distance between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 constant.

In this way, with the urging spring 2620 interposed, when the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the deviation described above, the main body portions 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the biasing spring 2620 .

The urging spring 2620 is arranged with the ball joint 2620 (rod-shaped body) inserted through its inner circumference. As a result, the ball joint 2610 can also serve as a mechanism for holding the urging spring 2620 so that it does not fall off, eliminating the need to provide a separate holding mechanism, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts. and can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a third embodiment will be described. 43(a) and 43(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment. 43(c) and 43(d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state in which the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

43(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 43(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b). Moreover, FIG.43(c) and FIG.43(d) correspond to the enlarged part of FIG.43(a) and FIG.43(b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the projecting pin 311a of the body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 to connect the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 43( a ) and 43 ( b ), in the displacement member 3310 according to the third embodiment, between the rear surface of the main body portion 3311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 . are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 . The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed in a columnar shape from an elastomer, and elastically deforms itself to connect the main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 in a state in which relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction. In addition, the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is arranged in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is perpendicular to the rear surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, so that they can be relatively displaced smoothly in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on the one side and the other side). If there is a difference in sliding resistance between the two drive motors 341, or if there is a difference in the driving force between the drive motors 341 on the one side and the other side), even if there is a deviation between them, the deviation is corrected by the rubber-like elastic body The elastic deformation of the 3630 itself displaces the body portion 3311 and the end portion 3314 relative to each other, thereby absorbing the deformation (see FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 3310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 3310 can be suppressed.

In addition, when the main body portion 3311 and the end side portions 3314 are relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the deviation described above, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portions 3314 are elastically deformed. The elastic recovery force of the body 3630 allows it to return to its initial position.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of elastomer, the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be converged at an early stage by utilizing the viscosity characteristics (damping effect) of the elastomer. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference between the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L and the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R due to the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314. As a result, the above-described It is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a fourth embodiment will be described. 44(a) is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 44(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of FIG. 44(a).

In the first embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided for each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are driven (double-sided drive). However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided only for the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one longitudinal side of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (single-sided drive). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In addition, the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment has a movable mechanism on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) (the end side portion 314, the 4314 to be relatively displaceable) and the configuration of the first rack 4315, and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment is a projection projecting from the rear surface of the main body portion 4311 on the other longitudinal direction side (left side in FIG. 44(a)). The number of protrusions of the setting pin 311a is one. The arrangement position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 44(a)) of the projecting pin 311a on the other longitudinal side is the pair of upper and lower pins arranged on the one longitudinal side (right side in FIG. 44(a)). It is the intermediate position of the projecting pin 311a.

On the other hand, an end side portion 4314 connected to the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) of the body portion 4311 is provided with a shaft support hole 4314a only at one location. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole in a front view for receiving the protruding pin 311a on the other longitudinal side of the body portion 4311, and its inner diameter is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion of the collar C. set. Therefore, the projecting pin 311a is rotatably inserted through the collar C into the shaft support hole 4314a.

That is, on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 44(a)), as described above, the body portion 311 is displaced (slid) relative to the end side portion 314 along the left-right direction (the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a). On the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44(a)), only rotation about the protruding pin 311a is allowed as a relative displacement of the main body portion 4311 with respect to the end side portion 4314. be.

In the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, so that the first rack 4315 arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44A) becomes the slider holding portion 315 (ie, the rack portion 315a is omitted). As a result, one longitudinal side (the right side in FIG. 44(a)) of the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P and driven by the one side member 320L (driving motor 431). The other side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) is only guided along the guide rod P and is not driven by the other side member 320R (driving motor 431).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the displacement member 4310 is formed as a one-side drive that drives only one side in the longitudinal direction, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. A transmission mechanism for this can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since it is a one-side drive, the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R are different from the guidance on the driving side and the guidance on the driven side. , and their states are different from each other. Therefore, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows relative displacement of the end side portions 314 and 4314 with respect to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down as described above. The deviation cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form different forms of relative displacement (different forms of allowable relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44(a)), which is the driven side, is allowed only to rotate relative to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311. The movable mechanism on one side (the right side in FIG. 44(a)) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (sliding displacement) with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311 .

As a result, both movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively. can be effectively absorbed by the displacement member 4310 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 4310 even with one-sided driving, and it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member 4310 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a fifth embodiment will be described. 45(a) is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 45(a), FIG. 45(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 along line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 45(a).

In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-side drive is adopted, and a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). structure) are different from each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In addition, the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment has a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). structure) and the configuration of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 45(a)), and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 45(a) to 45(b), in the displacement member 5310 according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 5311 (the right side in FIG. 45(a)) are separated from each other. A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 are provided between the front surface and the upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 to provide a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic members 3630 between the rear surface of the main body portion 5311 (left side in FIG. 45A) and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 . They are connected to each other by bodies 5630 . That is, it is the same as the case of the third embodiment. However, although the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, the rubber hardness is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (difficult to transform).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted, so that the drive motor 341 is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45(a)). A first rack 4315 is formed having only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the driving motor 341 for the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, since the displacement member 5310 is driven on one side, the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 3314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 5311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The movable mechanism cannot properly absorb the above-described deviation when the is moved up and down.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form different forms of relative displacement (different forms of allowable relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

Specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 constituting the movable mechanism on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 45(a)), which is the driven side, is higher than the rubber hardness on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. ) right side) is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 that constitutes the movable mechanism, so that the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is made more difficult to deform than the drive side (a constant It is possible to reduce the allowable amount of deformation when an external force is applied.

As a result, both movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively. can be effectively absorbed by the displacement member 5310 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 5310 even in one-sided driving, and to suppress excessive load on the drive motor 341 and stoppage of the displacement member 5310 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a sixth embodiment will be described. 46(a) and 46(b) are front views of the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment. 46(a) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven upward, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven downward. In addition, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using black circles.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has its center of gravity position at the center of rotation was described. It is formed so that the position of the center of gravity can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Note that the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment has a rack portion 315a extending from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b)) to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. The only differences are that they are omitted and that the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric, and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 46(a) to 46(b), in the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment, the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is set at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 6313. . Therefore, by changing the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body 6313, the center-of-gravity position G is eccentric to the left side in front view, for example, as shown in FIG. , it can be decentered to the right in front view. Accordingly, in the displacement member 6310, the position of the center of gravity of the main body portion 311 as a whole can be adjusted (shifted) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The rotating body 6313 is circular when viewed from the front and is rotationally symmetrical with its center of rotation as a point of symmetry. Position G is formed eccentrically from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotating body 6313 , the player can visually recognize that the position of the center of gravity G is positioned at the center of rotation of the rotating body 6313 .

Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted, and along with this, it is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 46(a)). A first rack (not shown) is formed having only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the driving motor 341 for the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, since it is a one-sided drive, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 6310 The movable mechanism cannot properly absorb the deviation described above when the robot is moved up and down.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotor 6313 and adjusting the center-of-gravity position G in the left-right direction, the center-of-gravity position of the displacement member 311 as a whole is shifted from the center of the displacement member 311 in the longitudinal direction. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other (ie drive side or driven side).

Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the rotation body 6313 is rotated to perform an effect, and when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), the rotation body 6313 is moved to a predetermined rotation position (phase). By disposing the displacement member 311 so that the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole is eccentric, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction can be adjusted, and the deviation described above can be absorbed. A comfortable state can be created.

Here, when the displacement direction (upward or downward) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the effect of gravity is changed, so the required state of each movable mechanism is changed. That is, for example, focusing on the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P changes between when moving up when displaced against gravity and when moving down when displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, for example, when the displacement member 6310 is raised, the drive side (longitudinal direction one side, FIG. 46A left side) The center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism of , and when the displacement member 6310 is lowered, the center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46(b)). As a result, it is possible to adjust the weight acting on the drive-side movable mechanism and the driven-side movable mechanism according to the displacement direction (upward or downward) of the displacement member 6310, thereby making it easier to absorb the deviation described above. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even if the movable mechanism has the same configuration on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and the driving motor It is possible to prevent the load on 341 from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member 6310 .

The center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 need not be maintained at a fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), and the center of gravity position G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when starting to drive the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431 and for a predetermined period from the start, the position of the center of gravity G approaches (or separates from) the drive side (one end in the longitudinal direction, left side in FIG. 46(a)). On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the position of the center of gravity G is moved toward (or away from) the driven side (the other end in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46(a)). ) morphology is exemplified.

Further, the position of the center of gravity G to be adjusted by rotating the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the positions (left or right in front view) shown in FIGS. ) can be set.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 and 48 are front views of a vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment. 47 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 48 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position.

1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the movable mechanism (the structure which can relatively displace the end side part 314 with respect to the main-body part 311) was always effective, but in 7th Embodiment, a movable mechanism can be fixed. (relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the body portion 311 can be regulated). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are arranged in front of the front bases 333 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position, and the main body It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are arranged on one side and the other in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, Restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are provided on one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side of displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position.

Note that the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD arranged at these four locations have substantially the same configuration, except that they are arranged in symmetrical postures. The regulation mechanism 7640LU disposed above is explained as a representative example, and explanations of the other regulation mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, and 7640RD are omitted.

The regulation mechanism 7640LU includes an arm body 7641 rotatably disposed on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7642 that imparts a biasing force for rotating the arm body 7641, and a biasing force that is imparted from the torsion spring 7642. and a holding body (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 by and holding it in the initial position.

A roller 7641 a is rotatably supported at the tip of the arm body 7641 . The torsion spring 7642 urges the arm body 7641 in a rotational direction (clockwise (rightward) in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIGS. 47 and 48) in which the tip (roller 7641a) of the arm body 7641 separates from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310. . The holding body regulates the rotation of the arm body 7641 by the biasing force of the torsion spring 7542, and moves the arm body 7641 to the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm body 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641a is set to the front base 333 48) is maintained along the longitudinal direction of the regulating mechanism 7640LU.

The main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is formed with decorative portions along its upper and lower side edges, and roller receiving portions 7311e are formed at the longitudinal ends of the decorative portions. is formed to protrude toward the front side of the front base 311 in .

The roller receiving portion 7311e extends in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 47 and 48) to a position overlapping the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641, and the side surface facing the arm body 7641 approaches the regulation mechanism 7640. It is formed to be slanted upward (in the regulation mechanism 7640LU of FIG. 47, it is slanted upward from its proximal end to its distal end). A curved surface is formed at the proximal end of the side surface facing the arm body 7641 so as to be able to come into contact with the outer circumference of the roller 7641a, and the curved surface holds the roller 7641a.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47 and approaches the lowered position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (lower side surface in FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the body portion 311, thereby gradually tilting the arm body 7641 from the initial position and displacing it. When the member 310 is placed at the lowered position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the curved surface at the proximal end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311, as shown in FIG.

As a result, the body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched between the left and right arms 7641 of the left and right restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, thereby fixing the movable mechanism and moving the body portion 311 in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portions 314 of the body portion 311 . relative displacement (that is, sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 48 and approaches the raised position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (upper side surface in FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further raised by being brought into contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311, thereby gradually tilting the arm body 7641 from the initial position. 47, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the curved surface at the proximal end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311. When the displacement member 310 is placed at the raised position, as shown in FIG.

As a result, as in the case described above, the body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched between the left and right arms 7641 of the left and right regulation mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, thereby fixing the movable mechanism and Relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted. , the rotor 313 can be rotated.

That is, while the rotating body 313 is held by the main body part 311, the main body part 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by the movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the main body portion 311 rattles or wobbles, which not only hinders the rotation of the rotor 313, but also causes the movable parts to wear or break due to the rattles or wobbles.

On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 can be displaced in a stable state while suppressing rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear and damage of the movable parts. In particular, the configuration of this embodiment is effective when the center of gravity position G of the rotor 6313 is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation (see FIG. 46) as in the sixth embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD act on the arm body 4671 when the displacement member 310 is displaced to its displacement end (the raised position or the lowered position), and the movable mechanism is fixed. to form That is, the displacement (upward and downward) of the displacement member 310 is used to fix the movable mechanism (the arm body 7641 is tilted). The driving motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47, the arms 7641 of the upper regulation mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are automatically returned to their initial positions by the biasing force of the torsion springs 7642 ( 48), similarly, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the lowered position shown in FIG. is automatically returned to (see FIG. 47). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333, and made invisible to the player.

In addition, since the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), the arm body 7641 is tilted. It is possible to make the mechanism part for the game inconspicuous to the player.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 and 50 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 in the eighth embodiment. 49 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 50 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position. 49 and 50 illustrate a state in which the front base 333 is removed from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

In the seventh embodiment, the arm bodies 7641 of the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD sandwich the main body 311 from the left and right, thereby fixing the movable mechanism (regulating the displacement of the main body 311 relative to the end side portion 314). However, in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, thereby fixing the movable mechanism ( restricts the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are arranged in front of the intermediate bases 332 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position, and the main body It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and regulating mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are arranged on one side and the other in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, Restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are provided on one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side of displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position.

Although the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD arranged at these four locations are different in shape, they are substantially the same in structure and action for being inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b. Therefore, the regulating mechanism 8640LU disposed above the one side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and explanations of the other regulating mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, and 8640RD will be omitted.

The regulation mechanism 8640LU has a base portion 8641 projecting from the front of the intermediate base 332, and a projecting tip of the base portion 8641 projecting toward the displacement member 310 (in the regulation mechanism 8640LU, downward in FIG. 49). and an insertion portion 8642 . That is, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 to a height position facing between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and is positioned between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 49 and 50). placed in a position overlapping the The plate thickness of the insertion portion 8642 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the interval between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 49 and then approaches the lowered position, below between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, the insertion of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD becomes possible. When the portions 8642 face each other and the displacement member 310 is further lowered to the lowered position, the insertion portions 8642 are inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (clearance for relative displacement) is filled by the insertion portions 8642 of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. , the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the body portion 311 in the lateral direction with respect to the end side portion 314 (that is, the sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated. be.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. When the portions 8642 face each other and the displacement member 310 is further raised and placed at the raised position, the insertion portions 8642 are inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

As a result, as in the case described above, the displacement member 310 has a gap between the opposing stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (a gap for relative displacement) between the restricting mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU. By being filled with the insertion portion 8642, the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 in the left-right direction (that is, the projecting pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) slide displacement) is regulated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted. , the rotor 313 can be rotated.

That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body part 311, and the main body part 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by the movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the main body portion 311 rattles or wobbles, which not only hinders the rotation of the rotor 313, but also causes the movable parts to wear or break due to the rattles or wobbles.

On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 can be displaced in a stable state while suppressing rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear and damage of the movable parts. In particular, the configuration of this embodiment is effective when the center of gravity position G of the rotor 6313 is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation (see FIG. 46) as in the sixth embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD allow the insertion portion 8642 to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacing the displacement member 310 to its displacement end (the raised position or the lowered position). to form a state in which the movable mechanism is fixed. That is, the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 is used to fix the movable mechanism (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). is not necessary, and the driving motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 and 52 are front views of the transmission mechanism and rear base 9331 in the ninth embodiment, with FIG. 51 corresponding to the state of FIG. 22 and FIG. 52 corresponding to the state of FIG. 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack However, the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment is subject to the magnetic forces of the magnets 9652a to 9652e acting in a direction non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of its linear motion. , and the wildness of the posture is suppressed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the rear base 9331 includes a vertically elongated main body portion and an overhang projecting laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, as in the first embodiment. A metal rod 9651 is arranged on the side of the main body (on the projecting direction side of the projecting portion). The metal rod 9651 is a rod-shaped body made of metal, and is arranged with its longitudinal direction aligned with the linear motion direction of the second rack 364 .

A plurality of magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged on the side of the second rack 364 facing the metal rod 9651 arranged on the rear base 9331, and the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged. They are formed so as to attract each other by magnetic force. That is, a magnetic force is applied (acted) to the second rack 364 in a direction to urge the lower end side thereof toward the opposite side (left side in FIG. 51) of the second pinion 365a.

Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the tooth flanks of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth flanks of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between the two tooth flanks can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag in transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth flanks, thereby improving the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress accelerated wear of the tooth flanks and breakage of the tooth flanks due to collision between the tooth flanks immediately after the driving force is transmitted from the stopped state (in the initial stage of meshing). Furthermore, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

Note that in the first embodiment in which the biasing spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, deterioration (settling) occurs as the second rack 364 is repeatedly operated, and the biasing force changes. For example, since the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 uses the magnetic force of the magnet, a stable biasing force can be applied to the second rack 364 over a long period of time.

Here, in this embodiment, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651 when the second rack 364 is positioned at the lowest movable range as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the second rack 364 is positioned at the top of its movable range as shown in FIG.

Therefore, the period during which the second rack 364 rises from the lowest position of the movable range shown in FIG. 1 period”), since all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651, a constant magnetic force can be applied to the second rack 364. FIG.

The period during which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (the position where the rear magnet 9652e and the metal rod 9651 stop facing each other) (hereinafter referred to as the “second period”) is Since the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9652e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually decreased along with the displacement (lifting), the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually decreased.

All the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651 during the period when the second rack 364 rises from the second position to the uppermost position of the movable range shown in FIG. Therefore, a state in which almost no magnetic force is applied to the second rack 364 can be created.

That is, according to this embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while being adjusted to a magnitude suitable for the state of the second rack 364 . Specifically, in the first period in which the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a, a larger magnetic force (magnetic force exceeding the reference value) is applied to the second rack 364, thereby causing the second rack 364 to move. While making it difficult to rattle to suppress the occurrence of erratic posture (stabilize the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a. In the third period after entering the stable state, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 is reduced (below the reference value) or is not applied, so that the magnetic force drives the second rack 364. , the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be prevented from abruptly changing (decreasing) and gradually Since it can be decreased, the transition from the first period to the third period can be smoothly performed, and the posture of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

It should be noted that the arrangement objects (back base 331, second rack 364) of the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be reversed. Also, instead of the metal rod 9651, a magnet may be provided. When arranging magnets, the magnetic force in the attracting direction may be used, or the magnetic force in the repelling direction may be used. These also provide the same effects as in the case of the present embodiment.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates an exploded state. 54(a) and 54(b) are rear perspective views of the other-side member 320L, and illustrate the assembled state. 53 and 54, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted. FIG. 54(a) shows the state before the roller 10367 is attached.

In the first embodiment, the engagement between one end of the biasing spring 366 and the engagement portion of the second rack 364 is performed after the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332. However, the tenth embodiment is described. One end of the urging spring 366 in the form is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 before covering the rear base 331 with the intermediate base 332 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the tenth embodiment, the back base 10331 has a substantially J-shaped slit portion 10331e extending from the portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d intersect each other. is set. The slit portion 10331e starts from the portion opened at the side edge of the rear base 10331, and folds back into a U shape at the end of the portion (first guide portion) extending linearly as a groove of constant width, It is formed as a slit terminating at the end of the linearly extending portion (second guide portion).

In the intermediate base 10332, on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the protruding portion intersect), the height of the side wall is made lower than in the case of the first embodiment, and attachment during the assembly process is reduced. Interference with the force spring 366 is suppressed.

The roller 10367 is formed in a disk shape and includes a first flange portion 10367a, a second flange portion 10367b, and a third flange portion 10367c, which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, and a first flange portion 10367a and a second flange portion 10367a. A columnar shaft portion 10367d connecting between the portions 10367b and a columnar contact portion 10367e connecting between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c are provided, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric. It is formed integrally in a different posture.

The shaft portion 10367d is a portion that is inserted through the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 and is rotatably held (supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e. Or set to slightly smaller dimensions. The abutting portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the urging spring 366 by bringing its outer peripheral surface into contact between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366 .

The facing distance between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the back base 10331, and the facing distance between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c is biased. It is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10367 is inserted through the slit portion 10331e, the rear base 10331 is sandwiched between the facing first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b, and the roller 10367 moves in the axial direction. movement is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 53, assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment is performed by mounting the drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 and , After mounting the gears 362a to 362e on the gear shafts 332c to 332g, the crank gear 363 on the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 on the gear shaft 332i on the rear surface of the intermediate base 332 (for the gear shafts 332c to 332i 18), the second rack 364 is arranged with the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 inserted into the rack groove 364b thereof and meshing with the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365.

Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the engaging portion of the second rack 364 and the other end is engaged with the engaging portion formed at the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332. lock it. In this case, in this embodiment, the biasing spring 366 is set to be in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so both ends of the biasing spring 366 are locked. can also stably maintain such a state.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 53) in this way, the front of the rear base 10331 is faced to the rear surface of the intermediate base 10332 and both are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 53). 54(a)), and finally, by attaching the roller 10367 to the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 (see FIG. 54(b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54( a ), when the rear base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332 , the intermediate base 10332 is bridged between the bent portions (between the main body portion and the projecting portion). Since the biasing spring 366 is extended, the biasing spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10367d of the roller 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331 of the rear base 10331. , and the roller 10367 is pushed into the folded portion of the slit portion 10331 . As a result, the urging spring 366 is extended and bent, so that the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 presses and holds the roller 10367 against the end of the slit portion 10331e as shown in FIG. 54(b). can do.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the roller 10367 is displaced while being brought into contact between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366, thereby disposing the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture. , and the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 can be facilitated. That is, in a state in which the rear base 10331 is covered with the intermediate base 10332 (that is, in a state in which the rear base 10331 presses the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364), the biasing spring 366 is bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 in the bent posture can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366 can be used not only for biasing the second rack 364 but also as a holding force for holding the roller 10367 . There is no need to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw), and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the roller 10367 is rotatably held by pressing its shaft portion 10367d against the terminal end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 . Therefore, it is not necessary to protrude from the rear base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332 a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the roller 10367 . Therefore, it is not necessary to cover the rear base 10331 with the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-like body through the roller 10367 (see FIG. 28), and from this point as well, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved. .

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are biased by separate biasing springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are biased by one biasing spring 11366 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has one end locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. A biasing spring 11366 is provided. The biasing spring 11366 is disposed in a symmetrical posture by a roller 11661 abutting on the central position between one end and the other end thereof.

The projecting ends of the overhanging portions of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R are recessed, and the biasing spring 11366 is installed on the interposing member 11370 via the recessed portions. . In addition, the roller 1161 is rotatably disposed on the interposing member 11370, and the interposing member 11370 is positioned so that the lower portion where the urging spring 11366 is installed is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 55). The biasing spring 11366 can be arranged along one plane (parallel to the plane of FIG. 55) from one end to the other end.

Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are biased by separate biasing springs 366 (see FIG. 15). The magnitude of the biasing force applied to each second rack 364 varies due to individual differences (variations in characteristics caused by dimensions, materials, etc.) of the biasing springs 366 . This causes variation in the posture of each second rack 364 and affects the transmission of driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism. This causes a difference (deviation) between the guidance and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 320R. Such a deviation makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310 as described above, and not only increases the load on each drive motor 341 but also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since it is biased by one biasing spring 11366, the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R can be made uniform. . As a result, variations in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. , the other-side member 11320R can guide and drive the displacement member 310 uniformly, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the transmission mechanism is attached to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 by connecting one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 to the engaging portion of the second rack 364, as in the first embodiment. 28), the rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. By interposing the interposition member 11370 and then locking one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 to the locking portions of the second racks 364 via the first openings 331c of the rear bases 331, , can be implemented. That is, in this embodiment as well, it is possible to easily dispose the biasing spring 11366 in a bent posture while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. Work efficiency can be improved.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 and 57 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment. 56 shows the state before the interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and FIG. are inserted, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the intervening member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the connecting plate 371 with screws has been described. It is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by the biasing force of the biasing spring 12366 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56, in a vertical slide unit 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment, engaged portions 12331f are recessed on the opposing surfaces of one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and each of these engaged portions 12331f is recessed. Engagement portions 12372 that can be engaged with the portions 12331f project from both ends of the interposition member 12370 . The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed by bending into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear.

A locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the biasing spring 366 is formed on the rear surface of the interposed member 12370, and the projecting ends of the projecting portions of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are , and the other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370 through the cut portion.

The interposition member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which a region from the engaging portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 56), thereby allowing the biasing spring 366 to The whole up to the other end can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 56).

Assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the engaging portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is in the unlocked state, and the transmission mechanism is attached. The rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the folded state (see FIG. 28).

As a result, the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. While engaging with the portion 12331f, the interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. are engaged with the engaging portions 12373 of the interposed member 12370 respectively. This completes the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 as shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are arranged between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331). In this state, the other end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370, thereby suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. At the same time, the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, each biasing spring 366 is disposed in a posture inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) toward the engaged portion 12373 of the interposed member 2370, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the force component in the direction to pull the interposed member 12370 toward the left and right (the side of the one side member 320L and the side of the other side member 320R) and the direction in which the interposed member 12370 is pushed upward (toward the displacement member 310). A force component can be applied to such an interposition member 12370 .

As a result, the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 is pressed against the engaged portions 12331f of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, so that the one side member 320L and the other side member The state in which the interposing member 12370 is interposed between 320R can be maintained. As a result, the intervening member 12370 is held by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (that is, at least until the intervening member 12370 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210. fixed). Therefore, it is possible to facilitate handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the rear case 210, and to improve workability in the transportation process and the attachment process.

Further, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R and the interposing member 12370 are formed by the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are coupled by the engagement of 12331f, it is possible to prevent the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R from deforming into a "V" shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to facilitate handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the rear case 210, and it is possible to improve workability in the transportation process and the attachment process.

In addition, the biasing force of the biasing spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364, but is also used as a fixing force for fixing the intermediate member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. , members (for example, the connecting shaft 332m, the connecting plate 371, and screws for fastening them) for fixing the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R to the interposing member 12370 can be eliminated, and the number of parts and the assembly can be reduced accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

It should be noted that the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged with a predetermined backlash due to the dimensional tolerance. In other words, the amount of backlash allows relative displacement of the interposition member 12370 with respect to the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. , the mounting positions of the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposing member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and workability can be improved during mounting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a rear perspective view of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. It is a back schematic diagram of the other side member 13320R to illustrate.

In the first embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366 is fixed at a predetermined position. is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

The configuration of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the other side member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except for the addition of a telescopic actuator 13671. As shown in FIG. Therefore, description of the same configuration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 includes a main body portion 13671a, a rod portion 13671b held by the main body portion 13671a, and a driving mechanism (not shown) for advancing or retreating (extending or shortening) the rod portion 13671b with respect to the main body portion 13671a. ), the body portion 13671a is fixed to the rear surface of the rear base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

In this case, the expansion/contraction actuator 13671 is disposed in a posture in which the expansion/contraction direction (the axial direction of the rod portion 13671b) is along the straight portion from the folded portion to the end of the slit portion 10331e. Therefore, by driving the expansion/contraction actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 10367 is moved between the terminal end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. can be displaced between

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the roller 10367 for contacting the biasing spring 366 and forming the bending posture of the biasing spring 366 is set to the extension/contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the extension/contraction actuator 13671. It can be changed by action. As a result, the bending state of the biasing spring 366 can be adjusted, so that the state of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude and direction of the biasing force) can be adjusted by, for example, , can be adjusted according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its attitude, displacement speed, or displacement position).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the biasing spring 366 is preloaded (the pressure applied to the biasing spring 366 in the assembled state). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be increased by increasing the load). can be reduced to reduce the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 .

Thus, for example, to stop the displacement member 310 in the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased to increase the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 in the raised position. While assisted by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (either raised or lowered) (i.e., when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is reduced so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the urging force from acting as resistance when displacing the displacement member 310 (second rack 364).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the direction of the second rack 364 While the angle (tilt angle) formed by the direction of the linear motion can be reduced (brought closer to parallel), as shown in FIG. Therefore, the angle (tilt angle) between the direction of the biasing force applied to the second rack and the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced. The tilt angle is increased (that is, the state of FIG. 58(b) is approached) to suppress the occurrence of fluctuations in the attitude of the second rack 364, while the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant steady state. Since the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized at a certain stage, the inclination angle of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced (brought closer to parallel) to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required to drive the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. 59(a) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 59(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 59(b) shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended.

In the eleventh embodiment, the posture of the biasing spring 11366 is maintained constant, but the posture of the biasing spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

The vertical slide unit 14300 of the fourteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 11300 of the eleventh embodiment in that a telescopic actuator 13671 and a left and right roller 14662 are added, and the roller 11661 is the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671. The other configurations are the same except that it is arranged at the tip of the . Therefore, description of the same configuration is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662 are arranged in the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment.

The telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed at the center of the biasing spring 11366 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 59(a)) in the rear view shown in FIG. ) along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 59(a)) (that is, the posture along the line of symmetry of the biasing spring 11366).

Further, in the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably arranged at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably arranged at the rear surface of the interposing member 11370.

Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671 to extend and retract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 11661 is positioned horizontally side by side with the left and right rollers 14662 as shown in FIG. 59(c), and a position below the left and right rollers 14662 (lower side in FIG. 59(a)).

59A, in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the biasing spring 11366 extends from the left and right bending portions (roller 367, see FIG. 19) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. are formed linearly.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 11661 that contacts the biasing spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion and contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the telescopic actuator 13671, and the biasing spring 11366 Depending on the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position), the state of the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 from can be adjusted.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b), by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the preload of the urging spring 11366 (the load applied to the urging spring 11366 in the assembled state) is increased. can be increased to increase the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. , the apparent spring constant of the urging spring 11366 can be reduced.

Thus, for example, to stop the displacement member 310 in the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased to increase the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 in the raised position. While assisted by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (either raised or lowered) (i.e., when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is reduced so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the urging force from acting as resistance when displacing the displacement member 310 (second rack 364).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the preload of one biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted. can be equalized with the second rack 364 of . As a result, variations in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. , the other-side member 11320R can guide and drive the displacement member 310 uniformly, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (tilt angle) formed by the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 11366 to each second rack 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 does not change. Only the preload of the biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). As a result, when adjusting the preload of the biasing spring 11366, the inclination angle (the direction in which the biasing force is applied) is changed along with the adjustment, and the change in the inclination angle causes the posture of the second rack 364 to change. can be avoided.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base 15331 in the fifteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG.

In the first embodiment, by inserting the gear shaft 331b arranged to face the second pinion 365a into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, the second rack 364 is placed on the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In the fifteenth embodiment, the first restricting portion 15331g arranged to face the second pinion 365a is brought into contact with the side surface of the second rack 15364. , the second rack 15364 is made displaceable along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment has a side surface on which the rack is formed (the side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and a side surface opposite to the side surface (the left side in FIG. 60). ) are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth flanks of the rack. Specifically, the side surfaces on both sides of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other at least within the range where a first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of second restricting portions 15331h described later abut.

A first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of left and right second restricting portions 15331h are projected from the front surface of the rear base 15331 . The first restricting portion 15331g is a portion that abuts against the side surface of the second rack 15364 (the left side surface in FIG. 60) to regulate its posture, and faces the shaft of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 interposed therebetween. (the position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the rear base 15331 and the intermediate base 332), and is formed as a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. Specifically, the position of the first restricting portion 15331g is such that the direction connecting the axis of the first restricting portion 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 15364. is set to

The second restricting portion 15331h is a part for restricting the displacement in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 60) of the second rack 15364. A pair of the second restricting portions 15331h are formed at a predetermined interval and each has a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Formed as a body. The space between the pair of second restricting portions 15331h facing each other (horizontal direction in FIG. 60) is larger than the width dimension of the second rack 15364, and is formed so as to have a gap with the side surface of the second rack 15364. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 60) allowed by the second restricting portion 15331h is allowed between the first restricting portion 15331g and the second pinion 365a. is larger than the amount of displacement in the left-right direction (width direction) of the second rack 15364 . It should be noted that the allowable difference in displacement amount is preferably set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

With the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a and moved in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see Figure 26). As a result, even when the posture of the second rack 15364 is unstable, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to form the rack groove 364b (see FIG. 22) in the second rack 15364 as in the case of the first embodiment. Rigidity can be ensured and durability can be improved. In addition, since the rack groove 364b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is ensured, deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. Also from this point of view, it is possible to easily maintain constant engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 and 62 are front views of the transmission mechanism and rear base 15331 in the sixteenth embodiment, corresponding to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction, but the guide groove 634a of the second rack 16364 in the sixteenth embodiment By forming the recess 16681, the width of the groove is expanded in a part of the longitudinal direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism in the sixteenth embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62). recessed. The recessed portion 16681 is a portion for restricting the linear motion of the second rack 16364, and is formed as a recessed portion curved in an arc shape that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. . The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

The central angle of the arc of the concave portion 16681 is preferably set within the range of 30° or more and 120° or less, and more preferably set within the range of 45° or more and 90° or less. This is to achieve the conflicting functions of maintaining the engagement state between the recessed portion 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and facilitating the release of the engagement.

For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 21(a)), it is necessary to resist the gravitational force acting on the displacement member 310. power increases. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. , the rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 to restrict the linear motion of the second rack 16364. As shown in FIG. As a result, the drive force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or its drive stopped). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when holding the displacement member 310 at the raised position can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 62, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the uppermost part of the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 The linear motion of the second rack 16364 can be restricted by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the concave portion 16681 at the upper end of the . As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position from rattling due to the influence of disturbance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the recess 16681 is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the side of the second pinion 365a (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62) and is applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second pinion 16364. 61, the direction of the biasing force applied to the second rack 16364 is inclined (not parallel) to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 16364. 62 to engage the recess 16681 with the rack shaft 331b. It can be done with linear motion.

That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the top or bottom of the movable range, the concave portion 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The rack shaft 331 b can be engaged (inserted) into the recess 16681 , and the engagement between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331 b can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 . On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is driven to rotate from this state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in the direction in which the rack shaft 331b is pulled out of the recess 16681 while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. Thereby, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear motion restricting means) for restricting the linear motion of the second rack 16364 includes a guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and a rack inserted into the guide groove 364a. Since it is constructed using the shaft 331b, there is no need to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the portion for rotatably guiding the second pinion 365a, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a portion (a portion that engages with the concave portion 16681) that constitutes the linear movement restricting means. By reducing the number of points, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided annular body 17440L1 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 63(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided annular body 17440R1 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 63(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the split ring body 17440L1 along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc in FIG. 63(a), and FIG. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a ring segment 17440R1; 63(a) and 63(b) correspond to FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b).

In the first embodiment, a two-step positioning mechanism is configured by providing the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a on the tip of the positioning protrusion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning recess 492. A ball plunger mechanism 17495 is provided on the tip of the positioning protrusion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning recess 492 in the seventeenth embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d), the positioning mechanism in the seventeenth embodiment projects from the contact surface (side surface) of the split ring member 17440R1 as in the first embodiment. and a positioning recess 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a recess capable of receiving the positioning protrusion 491. A recessed portion 17493a is provided in the bottom surface 17493, and a ball 17495a of a ball plunger mechanism 17495 projects from the projecting tip surface of the positioning projection 491. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 17493a is formed as a spherical concave portion, and is formed so that the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be engaged. That is, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. A bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recess 17493a.

These recessed portions 17493a and balls 17495a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) in the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular segments 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby performing final positioning. It is a part. The dimension by which the ball 17495a protrudes from the protruding end surface of the positioning projection 491 is set smaller than the recess depth of the positioning recess 492 .

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively rough positioning accuracy (relatively wide permissible range of positional deviation) can be performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, the projecting tip of the positioning projection 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of , by engaging the ball 17495a with the recessed portion 17493a, the positioning accuracy is increased, the annular shape is properly formed, and rattling and wobble after the annular shape is formed are reliably suppressed. Two stages of positioning are possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism is a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the recessed portion 17493a provided in the recessed bottom surface 17493. In the second stage of positioning when the bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring forming position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the recessed bottom surface 17493, and as a result, the positioning protrusion 491 is formed in the positioning recess 492. The ball 17495a can be smoothly moved from being received until the ball 17495a engages with the recessed portion 17493, and the engagement between the ball 17495a and the recessed portion 17493 can be released by releasing the annular segment 17440L1 and the recessed portion 17493. This can be done smoothly with the movement of the 17440R1 to the retracted position.

In this case, since the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the recessed portion 1793a along the recessed bottom surface 17493. , the balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the recesses 17493a.

Furthermore, even if the protruding tip of the positioning protrusion 491 collides with the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 when the annular segments 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the annular ring forming position, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 does not move. The ball 17495a is brought into contact with the recessed bottom surface 17493, and as the ball 17495a retreats, the spring is elastically deformed to absorb the impact.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400. FIG.

64 and 65 correspond to the front view and rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, the assembled state of the operation unit 200). 64 shows the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annular ring forming unit 18400 partially cut by a virtual plane passing through the center of the posture regulating member 18450 in the annular ring forming unit 18400 in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 65). Corresponds to the cross-sectional view.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the portion where they are attached to the rear case 210 has been described. Partial contact with the ring forming unit 18400 is enabled. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 of the eighteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the vertical slide unit 300 of the first embodiment except that the diameter of the rotation base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the annular ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment differs from the annular ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the shape of the side edge of the posture regulating member 18450 facing the rotation base 18312 (rotation base 18312). Other configurations are the same except that a holding portion 18453 is formed on the outer circumference of the 18312 so as to be able to abut thereon. Descriptions of these same configurations will be omitted below. Note that the holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in a rear view.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), after the vertical slide unit 18300 places the displacement member 310 between the raised position and the lowered position, the ring forming unit 18400 moves the ring segment 440L1. 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions, a ring shape is formed by the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2, and a rotating body 313 which is circular in front view is spaced at a predetermined interval on the inner circumference side of the ring shape. arranged concentrically. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by an annular shape.

In this case, the displacement member 310 is provided with a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portions 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311). It is supported in a floatable state. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, rattling or wobble occurs with respect to the end side portion 314 of the body portion 311 along with the rotation. 440L1-440R2), causing damage. Incidentally, when the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric from the center of rotation as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the problem of damage due to collision becomes particularly conspicuous.

On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 to such an extent that they do not collide with each other, the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the ring shape cannot be obtained. cannot perform sufficiently. Further, even if the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (annular segmented bodies 440L1 to 440R2), the rotation of the rotating body 313 causes rattling and wobble with respect to the end side portion 314 of the body portion 311. If continued, the movable parts (for example, the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) will wear out.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 of the annulus forming unit 18400 are placed at the annulus forming position. , and a pair of ring forming units 18400 slidably displaced in the left-right direction (the direction of approaching each other) by the hanging mechanism 450. The posture regulating member 18450 has its holding portion 18453 in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the vertical slide unit 18300, and as shown in FIG.

As a result, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be restricted (the movable mechanism can be fixed). . As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the body portion 311 from wobbling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, thereby forming the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 in an annular shape (circular shape). Collision with the inner peripheral surfaces of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2), and wear and damage to movable parts (for example, projecting pins 311a and elongated holes 314a) can be suppressed.

In particular, according to this embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 in the displacement member 310 is a projection along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65) of the long hole 314a in the end side portion 314. When the setting pin 311a slides, the pair of posture determining members 18450 are slid in the horizontal direction as described above, and the holding portions 18453 of the pair of posture determining members 18450 are held by the vertical slide unit 18300. As shown in FIG. 65, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is held (relative displacement with the end side portion 314 is restricted) by sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the lateral direction.

Therefore, it is possible to efficiently prevent the projecting pin 311a from being displaced along the elongated hole 314a, that is, the cause of rattling or shaking with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311. FIG. As a result, the force required to hold the main body portion 311 (restriction of relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be reduced, and the rattling and wobbling can be reliably suppressed.

Further, in this case, since the posture regulating member 18450 sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right direction is supported by the upper and lower arms 435 and 436 extending along the left and right direction as shown in FIG. The holding force in the direction (horizontal direction) in which the body portion 311 is displaced relative to the end side portion 314 can be increased. Become.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an annulus forming unit 18400 is provided to form an annulus shape by arranging the annulus segments 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the annulus forming position, and the annulus forming unit 18400 is provided. Using the operation of the 18400 to form an annular shape, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted (the movable mechanism is fixed). That is, it is possible to regulate the relative displacement in addition to the action for presentation, and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for regulating the relative displacement. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment.

66 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 66 shows a vertical slide unit 19300 and an annular ring forming unit 19400 which are partially moved by a virtual plane passing through the centers of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the plate thickness direction (perpendicular direction to the paper surface of FIG. 66). It corresponds to a cross-sectional view cut into .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 are brought into direct contact to regulate the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324. However, the nineteenth embodiment is described. Then, while keeping the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular ring forming unit 19400 out of contact, the relative displacement of the main body part 311 with respect to the end side part 324 is restricted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment except that a plurality of magnets 1991 are arranged (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotor 313. , other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the annular ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in that it is located on the inner peripheral side of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313). The other configurations are the same except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are arranged (added) to. Descriptions of these same configurations will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) magnets 1991 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313 are positioned equidistant from the center of rotation of the rotating body 313. are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the other hand, the plurality of (four in this embodiment) metal plates 1992 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 313) are made of a metal material, It is formed as a plate-like body curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape formed by the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms an annular shape concentrically with the rotor 313 when viewed from the front.

As a result, according to this embodiment, the magnetic force acting between the magnet 1991 provided on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 provided on each of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 causes the rotating body 313 to rotate. can be restricted in any direction from being displaced in the radial direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 (at the center on the inner peripheral side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (annular segments 440L1 to 440R2). In addition, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, the body portion 311 can be prevented from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, so that the movable portion (for example, the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) can be prevented from moving. Abrasion and damage can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the metal plate 1992 is continuous over almost the entire circumference, and the magnets 1991 are arranged at intervals of 90° in the circumferential direction. arrangement), whereby the rotating body 313 can be constrained from all sides. Therefore, not only can its displacement (rattling and wobble) be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotation body 313 If the relative positions of the rotators 313 and 313 are misaligned, centering can be performed to position the rotor 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape.

In addition, as in the case of the 18th embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape by utilizing the action performed by the annular ring forming unit 19400 for the purpose of forming the annular shape. (regulating the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314), and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (regulating the relative displacement). Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

For example, assuming that the engagement structure of the engaged portions 12331f of the one side members 12320R and 12320L and the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 in the twelfth embodiment and the biasing spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment are one. You may comprise a game machine combining the structure which carries out.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the biasing spring 366 has a substantially "<"-shaped posture when viewed from the front has been described, but the posture is not necessarily limited to this. It may be in an approximately "S" shape, an approximately "J" shape in front view, or a combination thereof. That is, the bent posture of the biasing spring 366 may be any shape as long as it is a shape formed by bending or curving a coil spring at one or more points.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the elongated hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in an oval shape in front view in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line. may be in the shape of That is, as long as the protruding pin 311a is displaceable, it may be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front, or may be bent in a "<" shape when viewed from the front. These may be formed in combination.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the vertical slide unit 300 is disposed in a posture in which the displacement member 310 is displaced along the direction of gravity (vertical direction). (direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity), or displaced in a direction in which the displacement member 310 is inclined with respect to the direction of gravity (vertical direction). can be Even with these postures, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 and 17440L1 to 17440R2 are in contact with each other in a locus of circular motion while maintaining a posture parallel to each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may come close to each other while changing the degree of parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the other party, and finally come into contact with each other in a parallel posture, or While maintaining a mutually parallel posture with respect to the contact surface of the other party, they approach each other by linear movement in a direction non-perpendicular to the contact surface, and finally abut in a parallel posture. Also good.

In the first embodiment, the amount of relative displacement between the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the protruding pin 311a may be brought into contact with the terminal end of the elongated hole 314a to limit the amount of relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a predetermined range. .

In the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, but this is not necessarily the case. The other end of the urging spring 366 may be engaged with the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one side member 320L. , 5310 may be driven. That is, the side of the movable mechanism where sliding displacement is permitted or the rubber hardness is low (soft) is defined as the driving side, but the movable mechanism side where only rotation is permitted or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is defined as the driving side. It is good as

In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 due to the telescopic motion of the telescopic actuator 13671 are the same. Although the angle (tilt angle) formed by these two directions is increased or decreased, the tilt direction may be reversed. For example, when the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the tilt direction is rightward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 58(b)). A state in which there is no inclination (that is, a state in which the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack coincides with the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c). state), and the direction of the inclination is leftward. As a result, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface of the second rack 15364 (left side surface in FIG. 60) is formed as a flat surface, and the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first restricting portion 15331g are not engaged with each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a concave portion that can be engaged with the first restricting portion 15331g (for example, corresponding to the concave portion 16681 in the sixteenth embodiment) may be formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. As a result, as in the sixteenth embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 15364 can be restricted, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a as an example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A game machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, wherein the movable mechanism comprises one end side of the displacement member and the other side of the displacement member. A game machine A1 characterized in that it is interposed in at least one place between the end side.

Here, one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, a long displacement member constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. There is known a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this game machine, the one side member and the other side member are formed so as to be able to guide the one longitudinal direction side of the displacement member and the other longitudinal direction side of the displacement member, respectively, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. , the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

However, in a structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member is separately guided by the one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction is separately guided by the other side member, as in the above-described game machine, guidance by the one side member and guidance by the other side member However, there is a problem that it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member because the displacement member is likely to be misaligned with the guide of the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, a deformable movable mechanism is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving means from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member.

The displacement direction of the displacement member is not limited. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an oblique direction between the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, as the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, for example, there is a difference in the guiding speed of the displacement member between the one-side member side and the other-side member side, or A case where a difference occurs in the guiding directions (phases) of the two, or a case where a difference occurs between the two is exemplified. Since the same applies to the following, the description thereof is omitted.

A game machine A2 in the game machine A1, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including the guide groove and the guided portion guided along the guide groove, so the structure of the movable mechanism can be simplified. can be In addition, since the movable amount and movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for the mode of deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It is easy to construct a movable mechanism.

The guide groove may be a through hole or a groove as long as the inner wall surface can guide the guided portion. Also, the guided portion may have a shape that can be displaced and/or rotated within the guide groove, and examples thereof include a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, a polygonal cross section, or an elliptical cross section. The guide groove may allow only the rotation of the guided portion. That is, the guide grooves are not limited to straight lines, curved lines, or a combination thereof, and may be formed in a circular or polygonal shape that allows only the rotation of the guided portion. good.

A game machine A3 in the game machine A2, wherein the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in an elongated hole shape elongated in a direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism is an elongated hole in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed into a shape, the guided part can be easily displaced (easily guided) along the guide groove, and the deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the other side member can be effectively corrected by the movable mechanism. can be absorbed into

It is preferable that the groove width of the guide groove (the width in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole) is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be regulated to the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member, thereby reducing the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. This is because the absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

A game machine A4 in the game machine A3, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of the guide grooves.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the movable mechanism has a plurality of elongated guide grooves extending in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. can be ensured, and rattling and wobbling can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In addition, if the plurality of guide grooves is elongated in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the positions of the start and end of each guide groove are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. may be different for each. In other words, as long as the guide grooves are formed parallel to each other, their arrangement positions may differ along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

The game machine A5 of the game machine A1 is characterized in that the movable mechanism comprises a ball joint comprising a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed with a ball joint comprising a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion, so that the movable mechanism can be smoothly operated. It can be deformed, and can stably absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. Moreover, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, it is possible to absorb the deviation regardless of the direction of deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member.

A game machine A6 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, since the movable mechanism is provided with the elastic body, the deformation of the elastic body causes the guidance by the one side member and the other side member. In addition to being able to absorb the misalignment caused by the guide by the elastic body, the movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the viscosity characteristics (damping effect) of the elastic body can be utilized to quickly converge the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member), thereby suppressing the occurrence of the deviation described above. .

Examples of elastic bodies include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). Further, the movable mechanism including the guide groove and the guided portion and the movable mechanism including the ball joint may be formed further including an elastic body. As a result, the function of returning to the initial position and the function of facilitating convergence of vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

A game machine A7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism has a restricting means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, since it is provided with a restricting means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount, there is a gap between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It is possible to prevent damage due to excessive deformation of the movable mechanism when absorbing the deviation that occurs.

When the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion, the restricting means restricts deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by constraining the guided portion to the inner wall surface (for example, the terminal end) of the guide groove. and one that restricts the deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by abutting one and the other of the deformable members that are separated by interposition of the movable mechanism.

A game machine A8 in any one of the game machines A1 to A7, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed at two positions between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed in two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, so that the one side member When a deviation occurs between the guidance by the other side member and the guidance by the other side member, one of the movable mechanisms interposed at two locations deforms according to the guidance state by the one side member, and the other is the other side member It can be deformed according to the guidance state by the two movable mechanisms, and the deviation can be reliably absorbed by the interlocking of the two movable mechanisms. Therefore, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving means from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is driven by the driving means at one end and driven at the other end, and the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are deformed in mutually different modes. A game machine A9 to play.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven along with the driving (single-side drive). The number of means can be set to 1, and compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member respectively, the product cost is can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where there is a tendency for misalignment to occur between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the game machine A8, each of the two movable mechanisms has a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. It can be responsible for aspects. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations in the gaming machine A9 are different in at least one of a permissible amount of deformation and a direction of deformation.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are different from each other in at least one of the allowable amount of deformation and the deformation direction. can be responsible for a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the amount of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the amount of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the direction of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driving side is set to the driven side. It can be a direction different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

As an aspect of the game machine A10, for example, one movable mechanism has a shaft-shaped guided portion supported by a circular guide groove and only rotation is permitted, and the other movable mechanism has an elongated hole-shaped portion. A shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted into the guide groove and is allowed to be displaced along the extending direction of the guide groove, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, there is exemplified a mode in which the sliding directions of the guided portions are different between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

A gaming machine A11 in the gaming machine A9, characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations have mutually different forces required to deform by a unit amount.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations differ in the force required to deform by a unit amount. Each of the mechanisms can be responsible for a variant suitable for the driving side and a variant suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the drive side can be made easier (or harder to deform) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a mode of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with elastic bodies of the same type or different types, one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism deform the elastic bodies. The flexibility (hardness if the elastic body is an elastomer, spring constant if the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, or both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type of elastic body, but the elasticity For example, one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism have different body sizes (dimensions such as cross-sectional area).

In the game machine A8, the game machine A12 is characterized in that the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member are driven by different drive means.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, one end side and the other end side are driven by different driving means (double-sided drive), so the structure is driven by one driving means (single-sided drive). As compared with , the shared load of the driving means can be reduced, so that the size of the displacement member can be increased or the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

In such a double-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the driving of one end of the displacement member and the driving of the other end, and there is a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the other-side member. , and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by interposing the movable mechanism in two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, it becomes possible to adopt a double-sided drive structure for the first time. It has become possible to increase the size of the displacement member or speed up the displacement speed of the displacement member while ensuring the stabilization of the displacement of the member.

In addition, in the game machine A12, "different drive means" is the same as "two drive means". Therefore, the configuration (type (for example, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.) of the driving means itself, characteristics (for example, torque vs. current characteristics, torque vs. rotation speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (for example, rated output, etc.), etc. ) may have the same configuration or may have different configurations. The same applies to the following.

The displacement member is driven at one end by the drive means and driven at the other end, and the movable mechanism is located at one point between the one end and the other end of the displacement member, A game machine A13 characterized in that the displacement member is biased toward either the one end side or the other end side of the longitudinal center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive means, and along with the drive, the other end side of the displacement member is driven. drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is interposed only in one place, the product cost can be reduced compared to the case where it is interposed in two places.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Guidance by the member and guidance by the other side member tend to be misaligned. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member as a whole. Therefore, even with a one-side drive and one movable mechanism, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stoppage of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, a second displacement member is disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, and the displacement member has the driving means at the one end side. and the other end side is driven by and the second displacement member is displaced, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased toward one end side or the other end side from the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Characterized game machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and along with the drive, the other end side of the displacement member is driven. drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where misalignment is likely to occur between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the game machine A14, by displacing the second displacement member, the center of gravity of the displacement member is shifted from the center in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member. Since it can be biased to one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), such movement of the center of gravity causes a deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member to be caused by the movable mechanism. It is possible to form an easy-to-absorb state. As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with one-sided driving, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stoppage of the displacement member can be suppressed.

As a mode for changing the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, the center of gravity of the displacement member may While the position is brought closer (or farther) to the drive side (one end side), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member by the drive means, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to the driven side (the other end side). (or away), or while the displacement member is displaced on the outward path, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer (or farther) to the drive side (one end side), while the displacement member is displaced on the return path. is exemplified by moving the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member toward (or away from) the driven side (the other end side). The latter form is particularly effective when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced (raised and lowered) along the vertical direction (gravitational direction). That is, for example, focusing on the one end side, the state in which the one end side is guided by the one side member changes depending on whether the one end side is guided by the one side member during the upward movement in which the movement is displaced against gravity or in the downward movement in which the displacement is assisted by gravity. Being able to change the position of the center of gravity according to the state is effective for proper functioning of the movable mechanism. The same applies to the other end side.

The second displacement member may be slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, or may be a rotating body formed to be rotatable and eccentric to the center of rotation. and the like. The trajectory of slide displacement is exemplified by a straight line, a curved line, a combination thereof, and the like.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member; and a restricting means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A15 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A14, the second displacement member is disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member. An effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since the movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the displacement member rattles due to the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the second displacement member is displaced. There is a risk of obstruction. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A15, since the restricting means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement of the movable mechanism is restricted and the second displacement member is restrained from rattling. It can be displaced in a stable state.

The second displacement member may be, for example, a rotary body rotatably disposed on the displacement member, a slide body slidably displaced with respect to the displacement member, or a shaft rotatably supported on the displacement member. An example is a rocking body that rocks and displaces the other end side around the one end side that is formed.

In the gaming machine A15, when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to create a state in which deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. A game machine A16 characterized by forming.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A15, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, thereby reducing the movement of the movable mechanism. Since the state in which the deformation is restricted is formed, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted using the displacement of the displacement member. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a mode of the restricting means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them A first engaging member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engaging member engageable with the first engaging portion is formed on the displacement member, and the displacement member is When the movable mechanism is displaced to the end of the displacement, the first engaging member and the second engaging member are engaged to restrict the displacement of the displacing member, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. Secondly, an insertion member is formed in the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the movable mechanism Thirdly, the form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by inserting the insertion member into the gap between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition is the one side member, the other side member or A first magnet is arranged on the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and a second magnet is arranged on the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, , the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member and restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. When it is formed from the guide portion, a concave portion is provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the guided portion is fitted into the concave portion of the guide groove, A form in which deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted is exemplified. In the third mode, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

The gaming machine A15 comprises a third displacement member that is displaceable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, and the regulation means is such that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. and a game machine A17 characterized by forming a state in which deformation of said movable mechanism is regulated.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A15, since the third displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the predetermined position, an effect is produced by displacing the third displacement member. It can be carried out. In this case, the restriction means forms a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by the action of the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position on the displacement member. , the deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a mode of the restricting means that acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position contacts the displacement member. Secondly, part of the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position is separated by the interposition of the movable mechanism. Thirdly, the third displacement member is provided with a first magnet, A second magnet is disposed in the displacement member, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby displacing the displacement member. A mode in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted is exemplified, respectively. In the third mode, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

In particular, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the third displacement member comprises a plurality of ring-forming members, and when displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of ring-forming members coalesce to form the ring-shaped body. It is preferably formed and formed such that the annular body surrounds the second displacement member (ie, the annular body is disposed around the second displacement member). Thus, in the first embodiment, the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed by the annular forming member abuts the outer peripheral side of the second displacement member from all sides, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism and Positioning (centering) of the two displacement members can also be performed. The same applies to the third embodiment.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using, as an Example, the Biasing Spring 366 that Biases the Second Rack 364 Nonparallel>
A game machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, wherein a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member; and an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, wherein the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. B1.

Here, a game machine is known in which a driving force of a driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace a displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it. Therefore, it is also possible to provide an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack, and to assist the driving force of the driving means with the urging force of the urging means.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the game machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (directly), it is guided along the guide mechanism. A predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (ie, the rack rattles toward and away from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the direction of direct movement of the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that encourages the unsteady posture of the rack.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and the biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack are provided. Since the direction of the biasing force is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, the biasing force of the biasing means can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rack against the guide mechanism that guides the rack. As a result, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of turbulence in its posture. Furthermore, since the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the direction of linear motion of the rack, even if the rack's attitude changes once, it will not change its attitude. As the force in the direction of convergence, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied. Therefore, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

A game machine B2 in the game machine B1, wherein the biasing means is formed of an elastic body.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of an elastic body, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack can be adjusted to the linear movement direction of the rack. can simplify the structure for making them non-parallel. Moreover, if the elastic body is used, it is possible to continuously apply an urging force according to the displacement of the rack, so that the rack can be stably urged.

Examples of elastic bodies include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). For example, an elastic body is formed from a belt-like or string-like rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) is set to be non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. At the same time, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, respectively, it is possible to simplify the structure and achieve stable biasing (application of continuous biasing force).

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and arranged in a bent posture.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture. It is possible to easily secure a sufficient space, and accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and secure the biasing force. That is, in order to secure the biasing force of the elastic body, it is necessary to lengthen the length of the elastic body. It becomes difficult to secure installation space. On the other hand, according to the game machine B3, since the elastic body is arranged in a bent posture, the length dimension of the elastic body is lengthened, and interference with other members is avoided while securing the biasing force. As a result, a space for arranging the elastic body can be secured.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that part or all of the elastic body is curved. Examples include a shape in which a portion is connected with a curved portion (i.e., a “<” shape in which the bent portion is rounded), and a shape in which the entirety is curved (i.e., “C” shape). be done.

A gaming machine B4, wherein the urging means in the gaming machine B1 is formed of a magnet.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of magnets, a stable biasing force can be applied to the rack over a long period of time. That is, while the elastic body is subject to deterioration (settling) as the rack is repeatedly operated and the urging force is changed, by using a magnet as in the game machine B4, the urging force can be maintained for a long period of time. can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the biasing force non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack can be stably exhibited over a long period of time.

When the urging means is formed of magnets, a first magnet is arranged on the rack, and a second magnet is arranged on the locus of movement of the rack. A configuration is exemplified in which the two magnets attract or repel each other to apply a biasing force to the rack. In this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material). Also, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

In the gaming machine B4, the biasing means divides the range in which the rack moves linearly into a range in which a biasing force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the biasing force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value. A game machine B5 characterized by forming.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the urging means has a range in which an urging force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack in the range in which the rack moves linearly, and an urging force applied to the rack. Since a range is formed in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value, the urging force applied to the rack can be an urging force suitable for the state of the rack.

For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force that exceeds the reference value to the rack, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and the occurrence of erratic posture is suppressed, while in the second range By setting the biasing force applied to the rack to a reference value or less, it is possible to reduce the biasing force (magnetic force) acting as resistance to the driving of the rack, thereby suppressing the energy consumption of the driving means.

In this case, the first magnet is arranged on the rack, and the range (first range) where the second magnet is arranged and the second magnet are arranged on the movement locus of the rack. is not provided (second range), and when the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel By matching, a biasing force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack, while when the rack (first magnet) passes through the second range, the magnet that interacts with the first magnet A configuration in which no urging force is applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is set to a reference value or less) is exemplified by the non-existence (or small effect). As described above, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material) in this case as well. Also, as in the case described above, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a direction in which a force component is generated to bring the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion. is generated, the gap between the tooth flank of the rack and the tooth flank of the pinion can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth flanks suppresses the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa), thereby improving the responsiveness and preventing the collision between the tooth flanks at the initial stage of meshing. Acceleration of wear of the tooth flank and damage to the tooth flank can be suppressed. Further, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack by the biasing means is a direction in which a force component is generated to separate the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Since it is in the direction of generating It is possible to suppress the resistance when transmitting the driving force to.

In any one of game machines B1 to B7, in the range in which the rack linearly moves, a force component is applied to bring the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion in the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means. A first range in which the force is generated, and a second range in which the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack by the biasing means is the direction in which the force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion is generated. A game machine B8 characterized in that and are formed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack can be changed within the range in which the rack moves linearly. The meshing state of the rack and pinion can be changed to an optimum state according to the state of the displacement member, rack or driving means.

For example, by applying the first range to the initial stage of the transitional state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage of starting the displacement of the displacement member), the tooth flanks are brought closer to each other and the driving force is While aiming to improve the responsiveness in the transmission of the second range, the second range is applied to the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and has reached a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed) By doing so, it is possible to separate the tooth flanks and suppress the resistance.

Alternatively, the opposite may be done. That is, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage of starting displacement of the displacement member), the inertial force is large due to the start of displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state. When the load on the drive means increases, applying the second range to such an initial stage separates the tooth flanks and suppresses the resistance, thereby suppressing the load on the drive means. On the other hand, when the transmission of the driving force is stabilized and becomes a steady state (that is, when the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member increases. When the influence of rattling is transmitted to the displacement member and the stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered, by applying the first range to such a stage, the tooth flanks are brought close to each other, and the rattling of the rack can be prevented. , the displacement can be stabilized even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high. In particular, the latter configuration is a structure in which a long displacement member installed between the one-side member and the other-side member is guided by the one-side member and the other-side member at one end side and the other end side, respectively, and is displaced. becomes effective in

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, a one-side member and the other-side member are arranged at a predetermined interval, and the displacement member is bridged between the one-side member and the other-side member so as to extend between the one-side member and the other-side member. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that one end side and the other end side are guided and displaced by the member and the other side member, respectively.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, one side member and the other side member are arranged at a predetermined interval, and between the one side member and the other side member One end side and the other end side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, and the displacement member is displaced. It is possible to effectively exhibit the effect by making it non-parallel to.

Here, in such a structure, if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, and not only does the load on the driving means become excessive, but also the displacement member may lead to the suspension of In other words, in the conventional product in which the posture of the rack tends to fluctuate, the fluctuation of the rack causes a deviation between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member, resulting in unstable displacement of the displacement member. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that the rack is less likely to rattle. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a violent attitude. Further, even if the attitude of the rack fluctuates once, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied as a force in the direction of converging the fluctuation of the attitude. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the deviation between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member due to the rampage of the rack.

A gaming machine B9 comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. B10.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts on the rack as an external force, causing the rack to rattle. . As a result, the attitude of the rack fluctuates, causing destabilization of meshing between the rack and the pinion and deterioration of durability. On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. By the biasing force applied from the biasing means, it is possible to oppose the rack, thereby making it difficult for the rack to rattle. As a result, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the rack from becoming unstable, stabilize the engagement between the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking, as an Example, the Biasing Spring 366 Arranged in a Bent Posture>
a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member and an urging means, wherein the urging means is arranged in a bent posture.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, biasing means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and biasing means A gaming machine is known that includes an opposing member that is sandwiched between and arranged to face the base member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space in which the urging means can be arranged is limited. That is, in order to secure the biasing force of the biasing means, it is necessary to secure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to dispose the biasing means while avoiding interference with other members. It was difficult to make the length dimension long enough.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture, interference with other members can be avoided and the arrangement can be facilitated, so that a sufficient length can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that part or all of the elastic body is curved. Examples include a shape in which a portion is connected with a curved portion (i.e., a “<” shape in which the bent portion is rounded), and a shape in which the entirety is curved (i.e., “C” shape). be done.

In the game machine C1, an opposing member is arranged to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member has an opening formed in a region including at least one of one end and the other end of the biasing member. A gaming machine C2 characterized by comprising an opening.

Here, when arranging the urging means in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the installation space, but it is difficult to maintain the flexed posture. There was a problem of being caught (jumping with its own elastic recovery power). Therefore, in the assembly process, while pressing the biasing means with one hand so that the biasing means maintains its bent posture, the other hand connects the biasing means to the target member or the base member. It was necessary and complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, it is provided with a facing member arranged opposite to the base member across the biasing means, and the facing member has one end of the biasing member or Since the opening is formed in a region including at least one of the other ends, even after connecting one of the ends of the urging means and arranging the opposing member, the opening of the opposing member can be opened. One end or the other of the other ends of the biasing means can be connected via. That is, by arranging the opposing member to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, it is possible to prevent the biasing means from being repelled. As a result, the work of connecting the other of the one end and the other end of the urging means can be facilitated, and the assembling work can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the opposing member is arranged to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, the opening formed in the opposing member allows the distance between the opposing member and the biasing means to be increased accordingly. can be suppressed to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing means from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the target member. In addition, even if one material has a lower strength than the other, such as when the biasing means is made of a metal coil spring and the opposing member is made of a resin material, these It is possible to suppress the wear of one member due to sliding and the dust generated by the wear from entering mechanical movable parts and electronic devices such as sensors and giving adverse effects.

In the gaming machine C2, the facing member has the openings in a region including one end and a region including the other end of the urging member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the opposing member is formed with openings in the regions including one end and the other end of the biasing member. The opposing member can be left at the bent portion of the . Therefore, the facing member can press the portion necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing means while maximizing the formation area of the opening. As a result, simplification of assembly work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

In the game machine C3, the opposing member is a communication path that communicates an opening formed in a region including one end of the biasing means and an opening formed in a region including the other end of the biasing means. and the communication path is formed as an opening of a size through which the biasing means can pass, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the following:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the opening formed in the area including one end of the biasing means and the opening formed in the area including the other end of the biasing means A communication path is provided, and the communication path is formed as an opening of a size that allows the urging means to pass through, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the urging means arranged in a bent posture. First, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to the target member or the base member through respective openings of the opposing member, and then through respective openings and communicating passages of the opposing member. , the biasing means can be arranged between the opposed members of the base member and the opposing member (i.e., after both ends of the biasing means can be fixed, a bent posture can be formed), thereby repelling the biasing means. This urging means can be easily arranged in a bent posture while suppressing the movement.

The gaming machine C5, which is the gaming machine C1, is characterized by comprising a stop plate member arranged opposite to the base member across the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture.

Here, when arranging the urging means in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the installation space, but it is difficult to maintain the flexed posture. There was a problem of being caught (jumping with its own elastic recovery power). Therefore, in the assembly process, while pressing the biasing means with one hand so that the biasing means maintains its bent posture, the other hand connects the biasing means to the target member or the base member. It was necessary and complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, a stop plate member is provided so as to face the base member across the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to the target member or the base member, respectively, and then the intermediate portion of the biasing means is locked to the stop plate member (the base member and the stop plate member face each other). (i.e., after fixing both ends of the biasing means, a bent posture can be formed), thereby suppressing the biasing means from being repelled, while allowing such biasing means to be bent. It can be easily arranged in a posture. Therefore, simplification of assembly work can be achieved.

Furthermore, the region where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the biasing means, and the region other than the bent portion of the biasing means is open, thereby suppressing sliding when the biasing means is elastically deformed. to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing means from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the target member. In addition, since the area other than the bent portion of the biasing means is open, the mating member wears due to sliding, and the dust generated due to the wear is generated by mechanical moving parts and electronic devices such as sensors. It can be suppressed that it enters and gives an adverse effect.

In the game machine C5, a rotary contact member is formed to be rotatable and the outer peripheral surface thereof is formed to contact the biasing means, and the biasing means is positioned between the one end and the other end. A portion of the stop plate member abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the rotary abutment member, so that the stop plate member is disposed in a bent posture, and the stop plate member extends radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotary abutment member in a flange shape. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is formed integrally with the rotary abutment member as a protruding flange.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the rotating abutting member is rotatably formed to abut the outer peripheral surface of the urging means in order to make the urging means into a bent posture. When the biasing means is elastically deformed (e.g., stretched), the rotary abutment member and stop plate member (flange) can be rotated with the elastic deformation, so that the elastic deformation of the biasing means is smooth. can be done. That is, in order to bend the biasing means, a member (corresponding to a rotating contact member) contacting the biasing means and the biasing member are restrained so as not to be repelled (they do not jump by their own elastic recovery force). As compared with the case where the holding member (corresponding to the stopping plate member) is fixed, the sliding resistance generated between it and the biasing means can be suppressed. Moreover, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the wear due to the sliding and the adverse effects of the dust generated due to the wear.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member and formed to contact the biasing means, and the displacement contact member is adapted to the biasing means. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a portion between the one end and the other end of the means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the displacement contact member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement contact member is connected to one end of the urging means. By being displaced while being in contact with a portion between the other end, the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture, so that the work of assembling the biasing means can be facilitated. That is, first, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to the target member or the base member, respectively, and then the displacement abutment member is displaced, whereby the biasing means can be in a bent posture. Therefore, since a bent posture can be formed after both ends of the biasing means are fixed, it is possible to easily dispose the biasing means in a bent posture while suppressing repulsion of the biasing means. .

In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, and the guide means includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the biasing means is in a bent posture, A game machine C8 characterized by comprising a second guide part that is folded back from the terminal end side of the guide part and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member includes the first guide part extending in the direction in which the biasing means is bent and the end of the first guide part. and a second guide part that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means. By arranging the displacement abutment member on the second guide portion of the guide means, the displacement abutment member is held against the terminal end of the second guide portion by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member. There is no need to separately prepare fastening screws, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, and one end of the biasing means is directly attached to one of the pair of target members. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member A pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member, and the pair of target members are each biased by a separate biasing means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, each target member is urged by a separate urging means. However, there was a problem that variations occurred in the thickness.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the biasing means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when two biasing means are provided, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in the characteristics of each biasing means (such as dimensional tolerance). By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, variation in displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

In this case, the pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be arranged on separate base members. It may be in the form of

In addition, the game machine C9 includes one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and a one end side and the other side member that are installed between the one side member and the other side member and are connected to the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the game machine G1 to a configuration that guides one end side of the displacement member and a configuration that guides the other end side of the displacement member. In such a game machine, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member due to the tendency of misalignment between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member. By applying , the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement between them can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the other side of the displacement member can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the deviation.

In the game machine C9, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member by being brought into contact with the connection member, and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained. Gaming machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the intermediate portion of the urging means whose one end and the other end are respectively connected to the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as the base. An urging force is applied to the member so as to maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, so that the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, such temporary fixing can improve the work efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. In addition, since the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the target member but also for fixing the connecting member to the base member, a member (for example, , fastening screws) are not required to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C10, a displacement abutment member displaceably disposed on the base member and abutted against the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means; and a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member, wherein the displacement contact member is displaced by the driving force of the contact member driving means, whereby the bending state of the biasing means can be changed. A gaming machine C11 characterized by:

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine C10 is displaceably disposed on the base member and abuts on the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means. A displacement contact member and contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement contact member are provided. Since the bent state can be changed, the biasing state of the biasing means can be adjusted to a more appropriate one according to the state of the target member to which the biasing force is applied.

As for the displacement direction of the displacement contact member, firstly, the direction connecting one end of the biasing means (the position where it is connected to the target member) and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the direction connecting the one end of the biasing means Secondly, the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member do not change. , thirdly, and a combination of the first and second directions are exemplified.

In the case of the first direction, the preload of the biasing means (the load applied to the biasing means in the assembled state) can be increased without changing the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member. You can adjust the size. That is, the apparent spring constant of the biasing means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the biasing force applied by the biasing means according to the amount of displacement of the target member from the reference position is controlled according to the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is at the upper end position, the preload of the biasing means is increased so that the force required to maintain the target member at the upper end position is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means, while the target member is at the upper end position. When displacing, the preload of the biasing means can be reduced to suppress the biasing force of the biasing means from acting as resistance when displacing the target member.

In the case of the second direction, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the biasing means. Therefore, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be switched between the direction matching the displacement direction of the target member and the non-parallel direction, or the degree of non-parallelism can be increased or decreased by changing the direction of the target member. It can be controlled according to the state (for example, attitude, displacement speed, or displacement position). For example, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the target member starts to displace, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable. On the other hand, in the steady state stage where the displacement speed of the target member reaches a constant value, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, and the degree of making the direction of the biasing force non-parallel is reduced to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required to drive the target member can be suppressed.

The configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack meshed with the pinion. This is because the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be changed, so that the meshing state (meshing state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled.

In addition, in the game machine C11, the case where the displacement contact member is driven by the driving force of the contact member driving means has been explained, but such contact member driving means is omitted, and the displacement contact member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. can be In this case, the displacement contact member is displaced according to the state of the object member, and the preload and/or the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means can be adjusted. The member can be returned to its initial position. As an elastic support structure, for example, an elastic body is connected to a displacement abutting member that is displaceable along a guide groove provided in a base member, and the elastic deformation of the elastic body displaces the displacement abutting member and the initial displacement. A structure that enables return to a position, an outer cylinder of a bush that connects the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder with a rubber-like elastic body, is disposed on the base member, and a displacement contact member is disposed on the inner cylinder, A structure that enables the displacement and return to the initial position of the displacement contact member by elastic deformation of the bush is exemplified. According to the latter structure, the displaceable direction of the displaceable contact member is not limited to one direction, so the displacement direction of the displaceable contact member can be set to the third direction described above.

Alternatively, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the disposition position of the displaceable contact member may be manually adjustable. In this case, the preload or (and ) the direction of the biasing force can be adjusted. As a structure for manually adjusting the arrangement position of the displacement contact member, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. A structure that adjusts the preload etc. according to the position where the displacement contact member is installed, and a plurality of support holes for attaching and detaching the displacement contact member are provided in the base member, and the preload etc. are adjusted according to the position of the support hole in which the displacement contact member is arranged. A structure etc. are illustrated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Second Rack 364 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: driving means for generating a driving force; and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means; a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member; a guide means for guiding the pinion, wherein the guide means guides the rack in a displaceable state along the tooth surface of the pinion.

Here, a game machine is known in which a driving force of a driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace a displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and pinion can convert rotary motion into linear motion, they are often used as a mechanism for linearly displacing a displacement member by the driving force (rotary motion) of a motor.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the game machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (directly), it is guided along the guide mechanism. A predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (ie, the rack rattles toward and away from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, it is provided with a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and guide means for guiding the rack, and the guide means is displaceable along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in a stable state, even if the attitude of the rack becomes unstable, it is easy to maintain constant meshing between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of driving force.

The rack being displaced along the tooth flank of the pinion means that the linear tooth flank of the rack is in contact with the arc-shaped tooth flank of the pinion when viewed in the axial direction of the pinion (the straight line of the rack tooth flank). is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface), the rack is rotated about the pinion axis.

The game machine D1 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and a portion to be guided by the guided portion. a protruding portion that is slidably inserted through the pinion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the shaft of the pinion. and a protruding portion that is provided and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack. By relatively rotating the installation portion, the rack can be displaced along the guided portion while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the attitude of the rack becomes violent, it is possible to easily maintain the constant engagement between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

In this case, the guiding means has the guided portion formed on the rack and the protruding portion formed in the region of the base member facing the rack, so that the guided portion and the protruding portion are arranged on the movement trajectory of the rack. can be placed in In other words, there is no need to form a portion outside the outer shape of the rack so that the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since it can be arranged, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in the surface of the rack facing the base member, or may be an elongated opening formed in the rack. In this case, the width dimension of the guided portion is preferably constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion is preferably circular with a diameter substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the width dimension of the guided portion. preferable. This is because it is easier to make the meshing more constant when the rack is linearly moved while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. However, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and rotate within the guided portion.

The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft with the rack interposed therebetween and extends from the side surface of the rack. a first restricting portion capable of abutting; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. A gaming machine D3, wherein the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is set larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion.

According to the gaming machine D3, the guide means includes a first restricting portion protruding from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft with the rack interposed therebetween, and a second restricting portion for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. Therefore, when the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is displaced in the linear motion direction by restricting the rack from being displaced in the width direction by the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. be able to.

In this case, the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is greater than the amount of displacement allowed by the second restricting portion than the amount of displacement allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion. In addition to the effect of the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the attitude of the rack becomes violent, it is possible to easily maintain the constant engagement between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a guided portion such as a groove or an opening in the rack, the rigidity of the rack can be secured accordingly, and the durability can be improved. Further, by securing the rigidity of the rack, it is possible to suppress deformation of the rack when it is driven by the rotation of the pinion, and from this point also, it is possible to easily maintain constant meshing between the rack and the pinion.

In addition, it is preferable that the first restricting portion is a rod-shaped body projecting from the base member. This is because the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth flank of the pinion when the first contact portion abuts against the side surface of the rack to restrict the displacement of the rack. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion (rod-shaped body) include a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a polygonal shape, and a shape obtained by partially combining these shapes. In this case, the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion is preferably such that the side surface facing (abutting) the rack is curved in an arcuate cross-sectional shape. This is because resistance can be reduced when restricting the displacement by contacting the side surface of the rack, and the displacement of the rack can be hardly hindered.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it comprises an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, since it is provided with a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack, the biasing force is used to assist the driving force of the driving means. can do. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers a displacement member, due to the effect of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required to raise the displacement member than to lower it. By applying a biasing force to the rack, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guide means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide means and the rack, and the posture of the rack fluctuates by the amount of the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the rack, the biasing force of the biasing means acts as a force that promotes the unsteady posture of the rack. In contrast, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in the structure in which the biasing force is applied to the rack by the biasing means, it is possible to easily maintain constant engagement between the rack and the pinion even when the attitude of the rack is unstable, and to stabilize the transmission of driving force. can.

As the biasing means, for example, the elastic force of an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.) or elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) may be used as the biasing force, or the magnetic force of a magnet may be used. For example, it is used as an urging force.

A gaming machine D5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the rectilinear direction of the rack.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. The biasing force of the biasing means can act as a force in the direction of pressing against the guide means for guiding the . As a result, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of turbulence in its posture.

Furthermore, since the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the direction of linear motion of the rack, even if the rack's attitude changes once, it will not change its attitude. As the force in the direction of convergence, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied. Therefore, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

The linear movement direction of the rack means the direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is the direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, since the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can rotate about the pinion axis), the linear movement direction of the rack changes according to the rotational position of the rack. be done.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized by comprising a linear motion restricting means for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, since it is provided with a linear motion restricting means for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, , the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, it is necessary to resist the gravitational force acting on the displacement member in order to stop and hold the displacement member at the raised position. Since the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be restricted by the linear motion restricting means, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced (or the driving can be stopped) accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means when holding the displacement member at a predetermined position (for example, the raised position).

In the gaming machine D6, a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack is provided, and the linear movement restricting means is engageable with a first engaging portion formed on the rack and the first engaging portion. a second engaging portion formed on the guide means, wherein the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack; , a direction for engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the linear motion restricting means includes the first engaging portion formed on the rack and the guiding means formed so as to be engageable with the first engaging portion. the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack; Since it is in the direction of engaging with the engaging portion, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be performed in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the rectilinear direction.

That is, the rack is displaceable (rotatable about the axis of the pinion) along the tooth surface of the pinion, and the biasing force of the biasing means biases the rack in the direction of displacing it along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is formed as uneven engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the rectilinear direction, the unevenness and the unevenness occur. By matching the position of the rack, the rack can be rotated by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the engagement of the uneven shape (the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion) can be formed (inserting the convex into the concave). , the engagement can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from this state, the rack is rotated in the direction of releasing the engagement of the uneven shape while resisting the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby releasing the engagement of the uneven shape (from concave to The protrusion can be pulled out), and the rack can be displaced in the rectilinear direction.

The game machine D7 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a portion to be guided by the guided portion. a protruding portion that is slidably inserted through the pinion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion; A game machine D8 characterized in that the second engaging portion is formed by a projecting portion of the guiding means, and the second engaging portion is formed by a concave portion provided in the inner wall surface of the guided portion of the guiding means.

According to the game machine D8, the guiding means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and rotatably and slidably inserted through the guided portion and facing the pinion shaft. Since the protruding part protruding from the base member is provided at the position where the game machine D2 is located, the same effect as that of the game machine D2 can be obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the direct motion restricting means is formed in the guided portion of the guide means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the protruding portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

The gaming machine D7 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion across the rack and extends from the side surface of the rack. a first restricting portion capable of abutting; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. The amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is set larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction that is allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and the direct-acting restricting means comprises the first engaging portion. The game machine D9 is characterized in that the joining portion is formed by a concave recess provided in the side surface of the rack, and the second engaging portion is formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means.

According to the game machine D9, the guide means includes a first restricting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and capable of coming into contact with the side surface of the rack, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting the displacement of the rack, wherein the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack permitted by the second restricting portion is between the first restricting portion and the pinion Since it is made larger than the allowable amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D3 is exhibited. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the direct motion restricting means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. Since the second engaging portion is formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

The game machine D6 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion. a protruding portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion; A first engaging portion formed by deepening a portion of the recess in the guided portion is provided, and the tip end side of the projecting portion of the guiding means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. A gaming machine D10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the guiding means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack on the rack, and a rotatable and The game machine D2 has the same effect as the game machine D2 because it is slidably inserted and has a projecting part projecting from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion. In this case, the direct-acting restricting means has a first engaging portion formed by deepening a portion of the recess in the guided portion of the guiding means, and the guiding means protrudes from the first engaging portion. Since the tip side of the portion is formed to be engageable, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the projecting member can be performed in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the rectilinear direction.

In addition, since the first engaging portion of the direct-acting restricting means is formed by partially deepening the recessed groove (guided portion) of the rack, there is no need to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the projecting portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

In the gaming machine D11, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in the projecting direction by a spring is provided on the tip side of the projecting portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engaging portion. is preferred. This is because it is possible to smoothly engage and disengage the first engaging portion and the distal end side of the projecting portion.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D10, comprising a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and a cover member arranged to face the base member with the rack and the pinion interposed therebetween, wherein the base member and the cover member A game machine D11, wherein displacement of the rack is regulated by the facing surface of the rack, and a connecting portion connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged near the rack.

Here, the rack and the pinion are arranged on the base member, and the base member is covered with the cover member, and the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member are arranged in the thickness direction of the rack (i.e., the base member and the cover member). A game machine having a structure that restricts displacement in the opposing direction) is known. In this case, if the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the restriction of displacement in the thickness direction of the rack will be insufficient, adversely affecting the state of meshing with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions connecting the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost will increase accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, since the connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged near the rack, the base member and the cover are arranged. It is possible to stabilize the gap mainly with respect to the region of the facing surfaces of the member that contributes to the regulation of the displacement of the rack. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of connecting portions to be provided, reduce the product cost, and sufficiently regulate the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction, thereby stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

A game machine D12 in the gaming machine D11, wherein the rack has an opening formed as an elongated opening, and the connecting part is inserted through the opening of the rack.

According to the game machine D12, the rack is provided with an opening formed in a long hole shape, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at a position closest to the rack. can be connected by parts. Therefore, the gap can be stabilized in the region of the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member that is most suitable for restricting the displacement of the rack. As a result, the number of connecting portions is minimized to reduce product costs, while maximizing the restriction of displacement in the thickness direction of the rack even with the fewest connecting portions to ensure the meshing state with the pinion. can be stabilized to

In the gaming machine D12, the guiding means includes a guided portion formed as an elongated opening in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a guided portion rotatably and slidably inserted through the guided portion. and a protruding portion protruding from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the opening being formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion being formed by the protruding portion. A game machine D13 characterized by being formed.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12, the guiding means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a portion rotatably and slidably guided by the guided portion. Since the game machine D2 has the same effect as that of the game machine D2, the game machine D2 has the same effect as the game machine D2. In this case, since the guided portion forms the opening and the protruding portion forms the connecting portion, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the product cost. That is, since the connecting portion is arranged by utilizing the guided portion (opening portion) formed in the rack, it is not necessary to arrange the connecting portion outside the outer shape of the rack. can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the guided portion and the protruding portion constituting the guide means for guiding the displacement of the rack are connected to each other for fixing the base member and the cover member, and the opening for inserting the connecting portion. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine D14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D12 or D13, displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by contacting the connecting portion with the terminal end of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12 or D13, the connecting portion abuts on the terminal end of the opening, thereby restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction, thereby improving the space efficiency. It is possible to reduce the product cost. For example, a structure is conceivable in which a stopper wall that abuts on the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member, and the side surface of the rack is brought into contact with the stopper wall to restrict the displacement of the rack in the linear movement direction. In the structure, the space for arranging other members outside the outer shape of the rack is reduced due to the formation of the stopper wall. On the other hand, in the game machine D14, since it is not necessary to arrange the connection part corresponding to the stopper wall outside the outer shape of the rack, other members can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack. , space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member, the connecting portion can also serve as a stopper function for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. The number of points can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine D14, the base member and the cover member are made of a resin material, and the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member and the cover member, and the standing tip side thereof is at the base member or the cover member. A game characterized in that it is fastened to the other by a metal screw, and in the state of being fastened by the screw, the metal screw is buried inside the connecting portion along the erecting direction of the connecting portion. Machine D15.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects of the game machine D14, the upright leading end side of the connecting portion erected from one of the base member and the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member or the cover member with a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded inside the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. As a result, when the connecting portion is brought into contact with the terminal end of the opening to restrict the displacement of the rack, damage to the connecting portion can be prevented and durability can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Interposed Member 370 as an Example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A game machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, characterized by comprising an interposition member interposed between the one side member and the other side member. Gaming machine E1.

Here, one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, a displacement member constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. (For example, see JP-A-2014-14602). According to this game machine, the one side member and the other side member are formed so as to be able to guide the one longitudinal direction side of the displacement member and the other longitudinal direction side of the displacement member, respectively, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. , the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

However, in the amusement machine described above, the overall rigidity of the unit (the structure in which the displacement member is installed between the one-side member and the other-side member) is low and easily damaged, making it difficult to handle as a unit. There was a problem that Therefore, for example, in the process of transporting the unit and the process of attaching the unit to the mating member, it is necessary to handle the unit so as not to apply a large load, resulting in poor workability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the intervening member interposed between the one side member and the other side member is provided, the entire unit can be made into a frame shape, and its rigidity can be improved. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated. Therefore, for example, in the transportation process and the mounting process, the permissible value of the load acting on the unit is relaxed, so that workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks respectively connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and disposed so as to be linearly movable to the one side member and the other side member; a pair of pinions which are joined together and rotatably disposed on the one side member and the other side member, respectively, and to which the driving force of the driving means is applied; a pair of rod-shaped bodies fixed to the one side member and the other side member, respectively, wherein the rack is connected to the rod-shaped bodies and the connecting portion is slidable along the rod-shaped bodies. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the rod-shaped bodies are fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body. to form a closed connecting loop between the displacement member and the one side member and between the other side member and the intermediate member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are not connected. As for connection, according to the game machine E2, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected (formed a closed connection loop) via the rack and the rod-like body. Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be enhanced. Further, by fixing the rod-shaped body to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

In addition, a rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member means that a rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached to the one-side member and the other-side member and fixed ( For example, it is intended to include not only the case of fixing by fastening or adhesive fixing, but also the case of integrally forming a rod-shaped body with one side member and the other side member (for example, integrally by resin molding using a molding die). Moreover, it is preferable that the rod-shaped body is formed of a metal material. This is because, when the one-side member and the other-side member are made of a resin material, it is possible to efficiently improve the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member and stabilize the posture of the rack. Further, the driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

The game machine E1 comprises a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between the spiral grooves of the nut and the screw shaft, and the nut is attached to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. and the screw shaft is disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member is a ball A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is displaced along a screw shaft of a screw mechanism.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are interposed. A closed connecting loop can be formed with the installation member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are not connected. As for connection, according to the gaming machine E3, the displacement member, the one-side member, and the other-side member can be connected (formed a closed connection loop) via the ball screw mechanism. Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be enhanced. Further, by fixing the screw shaft to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

In addition, the state of the displacement member tends to be unstable because the rack and pinion are subject to large fluctuations in their meshing state. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, a plurality of balls are interposed between the spiral grooves of the nut and the screw shaft, so that there is very little variation in the meshing state. Therefore, for example, unlike the game machine E2, it is not necessary to separately provide a rod-shaped body. That is, for example, in the game machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the improvement of the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member, and the stability of the rack posture The two configurations, the second configuration (rod-shaped body) for simplification, are formed by separate members, but according to the game machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). can.

In addition, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end side is guided by the other side member, respectively, misalignment is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3, in which the displacement member is guided by the ball screw mechanism, is particularly effective in suppressing the deviation between the guidance by the one side safety and the guidance by the other side member.

The game machine E2 or E3 is characterized by comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Gaming machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is located at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a deviation between the guidance by one side member and the guidance by the other side member (that is, the deviation between the rack on the one side member side and the rack on the other side member side, or the deviation between the rack on the side of the one side member and the rack on the other side member Even if there is a deviation between the nut on one side and the nut on the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, rod-shaped bodies or screw shafts are disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via the ball, respectively. Or the posture of the nut can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the member on one side of the displacement member and the guidance by the member on the other side, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the function of absorbing the deviation by the movable mechanism can be reliably exhibited. be able to.

A game machine E5 in any one of the game machines E1 to E4, wherein the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state. The relative positions of the side member and the other side member and the interposition member can be adjusted. Therefore, when a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between one side member and the other side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to an attachment target, for example, the one side member and the other side member or the intervening member After one of the installation members is installed, even if the other is displaced from the installation position, the position of the other can be adjusted to the installation position. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the mounting work.

In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position of the displacement member as in the game machine E4, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of attaching the unit to the attachment target is improved. can be achieved.

The modes of displacement of the interposed member with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member include, for example, rotation by pivoting, linear or curved sliding displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or Displacement in a direction in which elastic deformation of an elastic body due to elastic support is allowed is exemplified.

In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the intervening member are connected at one point, and the connection point is connected in a displaceable state by fastening with a screw. A game machine E6 characterized by.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the intervening member are connected at one point, and the connection point is fastened with a screw. Since they are connected in a displaceable state, relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the one side member or the other side member can be permitted with the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to the attachment target, the attachment position relative to the attachment target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting work can be improved.

Furthermore, after the unit is attached to the object to be attached, the unit can be fixed to the object to be attached so as not to be displaced by the fastening force of the screws. That is, before the unit is attached, the screws are temporarily fixed, and the mounting position can be adjusted by the relative displacement described above. , the unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting object.

In addition, as a structure for fixing the unit so as not to be displaceable with respect to the mounting object, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, and is fastened to the connecting portion between the one side member or the other side member and the intervening member, and the tapping screw circumference is By forming a unit in a relatively rotatable state and fastening the tip of the tapping screw to the mounting object, the whole is fixed so as not to be displaced by the axial force of the tapping screw.

A game machine E7 in the game machine E5 or E6, characterized in that at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member and the intervening member are connected by engagement in a displaceable state.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member and the other side member and the intervening member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement, so that the one side member Alternatively, a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between a one-side member that guides a displacement member and the other-side member) is attached to an attachment target while allowing relative displacement of the intervening member with respect to the other-side member. Since it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate part such as a screw for connecting the two parts while improving workability, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The displaceable engagement includes a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted into one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted into one groove, and a convex portion in one recess. are slidably fitted.

In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, and biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, wherein the biasing A gaming machine E8 characterized in that the urging force of means acts on the interposed member so as to maintain a state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member. .

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, an urging means disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in order to apply an urging force to the target member. The biasing force of the biasing means acts on the interposed member so as to maintain the state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member. The interposed member can be at least temporarily fixed to the other-side member. Therefore, even if the interposition member is displaceable with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member, the unit (the displacement member can be guided) by temporary fixation using the biasing force of the biasing means. It is possible to improve work efficiency when attaching a structure in which an interposing member is interposed between one side member and the other side member) to an attachment target.

In addition, the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the object member but also for fixing the intervening member to the one-side member and the other-side member. Man-hours can be reduced.

As a mode for applying the biasing force of the biasing means to the intervening member, one end of the biasing means is connected to the target member and the other end is connected to the intervening member to apply the biasing force to the intervening member. In the first mode or when target members are arranged on each of the one-side member and the other-side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one target member of both the target members and the other target member is connected to the other target member. A second mode is exemplified in which the other end of the biasing means is connected and the intermediate portion between one end and the other end of the biasing means is brought into contact with the interposing member to apply the biasing force to the interposing member. be.

In the first form, the target member and the urging means may be arranged only on either one of the one side member and the other side member, and the target member and the biasing means may be arranged on each of the one side member and the other side member. An urging means may be provided, and the other ends of both urging means may be connected to the interposing member. In the former case, for example, in a structure in which the target member and the biasing means are arranged only on one side member out of the one side member and the other side member, one end side of the interposed member The other end side of the interposition member is rotatably connected to the other side member by the engagement of the protrusion, and the biasing force of the biasing means in the direction in which the protrusion is inserted into the recess. is exemplified by applying a biasing force to the intervening member so that According to this aspect, the intervening member is rotated around the shaft support on the other end side by the applied biasing force, and this rotation can form the concave-convex engagement. Even in the case of only one side member, it is possible to ensure the maintenance of the engagement (the state in which the interposition member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member) only by the urging force.

Also, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack engaged with the pinion is linearly moved. , exemplifies a rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member.

In any one of the game machines E5 to E8, when the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, it is connected in a state in which displacement in three-dimensional directions is permitted. Gaming machine E9.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E5 to E8, when the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state, three-dimensional Since they are connected in a state in which they are allowed to be displaced in any direction, it is possible to widen the adjustment range of the relative position between the one side member and the other side member and the interposing member. Therefore, when a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between a one-side member that guides a displacement member and the other-side member) is attached to an attachment target, for example, the one-side member, the other-side member, and the intervening member Even if the mounting surfaces of the installation members are not parallel to each other, the posture of each of these members can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the mounting work.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E9, comprising a base member to which the one side member, the other side member and the intervening member are attached, and at least the one side member and the other side member are displaceable with respect to the base member A gaming machine E10 characterized in that it is attached in a state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E9, at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, so that the displaceable member can be displaced. can be stabilized. That is, by attaching the one-side member and the other-side member to the base member in a displaceable state instead of rigidly connecting them to the base member, the displacement (that is, looseness or wobble) can be used to move the displaceable member. It is possible to absorb the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the object to be attached to the base member in a displaceable state is a case where the intervening member is connected to the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state, such as game machines E5 to E9. , only the one side member and the other side member may be attached, and in addition, the intervening member may also be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the intervening member is connected to the one side member and the other side member in a non-displaceable state (that is, rigidly connected), the one side member and the other side member and the intervening member Both are attached to the base member in a displaceable state.

In the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, and an intermediate portion of the biasing member abutted. A gaming machine E11, wherein the abutment member is disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, and and a contact member that contacts the intermediate portion of the biasing member, and the contact member is disposed on the base member, so that one of the one side member and the other side member (that is, the target member is disposed) object) is displaced (that is, rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the relative position of one of the one side member and the other side member and the abutment member can be changed. . Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the biasing means can be changed, and the biasing means can be in a bent posture or the degree of bending of the biasing means can be changed. It is possible to change the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member. That is, the biasing direction to the target member can be actively controlled only by the mechanical structure according to the state of one of the one-side member and the other-side member (change in posture with respect to the base member).

As the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. , exemplifies a rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member. Here, when one of the one-side member and the other-side member (on which the rack is arranged) is displaced (rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattle. As a result, the attitude of the rack changes, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the urging direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled according to the state (change in posture) of one of the one side member and the other side member. Therefore, the biasing direction of the biasing means applied to the rack can be changed in the direction of stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

The game machine E2 comprises a second pinion directly or indirectly connected to the pinion and a second rack meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving means. By rotating the second pinion, the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion drives the rack, displacing the displacement member, and the second rack is a crank mechanism. A gaming machine E12 characterized by being driven by the driving means via a.

Here, in the game machine E12, after the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinion and converted into rotary motion, the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into linear motion. By adopting the stroke amount of linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a structure is adopted in which the second rack is driven by the drive means via the third pinion, the second rack can be divided into the tooth flanks for the second pinion and the tooth flanks for the third pinion. , and the lengthwise dimension of the second rack increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, so the tooth surface for the third pinion can be eliminated. , the longitudinal dimension of the second rack can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine E12, the crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has an eccentric pin that protrudes at a position eccentric from the rotation center and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rotating body that extends from the second rack. A gaming machine E13 characterized by comprising a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effects of the game machine E12, by rotating the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is moved to the rack groove of the second rack. can be slid (slide displacement) along the , and thereby the second rack can be linearly moved.

The rack groove may be a groove recessed in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) drilled in the second rack. Moreover, it is preferable that the extending direction of the rack groove is set in a direction perpendicular to the linear motion direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack in the force component acting on the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body, and to that extent, the second rack can be moved while minimizing the resistance. This is because it can be moved in a straight line.

In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one-side member or the other-side member and a protruding pin of the rack extending from the one-side member or the other-side member are slidably inserted. and a guide groove,
The crank mechanism includes a rotating body having an eccentric pin projecting at a position eccentric from the rotation center and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a rotating body having the eccentric pin rotatably inserted into the second rack. and an axial hole formed;
In the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member, the second rack is displaced as the rotating body of the crank mechanism is rotated, and the projecting pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove. Thus, the gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E12, the eccentric pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is increased. When the rotating body is rotated by the rotating body, the protruding pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove extending in the one side member or the other side member as the rotating body rotates. can be displaced along the tooth flank of the second pinion. Therefore, even if the attitude of the rack becomes unstable, it is possible to easily maintain constant meshing between the second rack and the second pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

The connection between the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotating body) is performed by rotatably inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole. Since it is not necessary to extend the slot-shaped groove for sliding (sliding) the eccentric pin, it is possible to suppress the decrease in rigidity of the second rack accordingly.

In addition, when the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion, when viewed in the axial direction of the second pinion, the linear tooth surface of the second rack is aligned with the arcuate tooth surface of the second pinion. It means an operation in which the second rack is rotated around the axis of the second pinion while maintaining a state of contact with the second rack (a state in which the straight line of the rack tooth flank is tangent to the circular arc of the pinion tooth flank).

Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in the one-side member or the other-side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one-side member or the other-side member.

A gaming machine E15 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, it comprises detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, since it is provided with detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism, based on the detection result, the rack is positioned at one end of the linear motion range. and reaching the other end side, that is, reaching the starting end and the terminal end of the displacement member, respectively.

In this case, in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the starting end and the terminal end, respectively, the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear movement range. Although it is necessary to dispose the detection units (sensors) at one end and the other end, there is a problem that the wiring becomes long because these two positions are separated from each other. That is, the increased length not only increases the cost of the members, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members. Higher risk of disconnection in

On the other hand, according to the game machine E15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the structure detects the rotational position (phase) of the crank mechanism by the detection means, so that one end of the crank rotation range and the other are detected. Even if the detectors (sensors) are arranged at the ends, they can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, it is possible not only to reduce the member cost, but also to improve the degree of freedom in design and to suppress the occurrence of disconnection.

The crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has a crank pin protruding eccentrically from the center of rotation and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a recess through which the crank pin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. A structure including a crank groove recessed in the second rack as the groove is exemplified. In this case, the detecting means detects the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by its detecting portion (sensor).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Upper Arm Body 435 or the Lower Arm Body 436 as an Example>
A performance member, a displacement means for displacing the performance member between a retracted position and a performance position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, wherein the performance member is placed at the performance position in a predetermined posture. In a game machine that can be arranged, the displacement means includes a base member and an arm body rotatably connected to the base member at one end and having the effect member displaceably disposed at the other end. and a regulating means for regulating the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm, wherein the effect member is moved to the retracted position and the effect by rotating the arm with respect to the base member about one end thereof. A game machine F1 characterized by being displaced between positions.

Here, the production member, a displacement means for displacing the production member between the retracted position and the production position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, and the displacement means is a parallel link mechanism. , a game machine is known in which an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-28226).

That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and have the same length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member. is rotated with respect to the base member while maintaining Therefore, it is possible to displace the production member while maintaining the posture thereof constant, and thus it is possible to arrange the production member in a predetermined posture at the production position.

However, in the structure in which the displacement means utilizes the parallel link mechanism, as in the conventional game machine described above, interference occurs between the first arm and the second arm. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a base member, an arm body rotatably connected at one end to the base member, and an effect member disposed at the other end so as to be displaceable, and a regulating means for regulating the attitude of the effect member with respect to the arm body, so that when the arm body is rotated about the one end side with respect to the base member, the regulating means regulates the attitude of the effect member. It can be displaced, so that the effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at the effect position. In this case, since the arms do not interfere with each other, it is possible to ensure the motion range of the effect member.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, and one end sides of the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member, respectively, and the effect member is the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. The pair of arm bodies each have teeth formed on one end sides thereof, and the one end side is rotatably connected to the base member in a state in which the teeth are engaged with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

According to the game machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arms, one end of which is rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is displaceably disposed on the other end. Then, the pair of arm bodies are rotated about one end side with respect to the base member, so that the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

In this case, according to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the pair of arm bodies each have teeth formed on one end thereof, and the base member is formed in a state in which the teeth are meshed with each other. Since one end side is rotatably connected to , the rotation of the pair of arm bodies can be synchronized. As a result, the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies can be accurately brought into contact with each other at the effect positions. Further, when one of the pair of arm bodies is rotated, the other is also driven to rotate, so that the pair of arm bodies (performance members) can be operated by one driving means.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the arm body is oriented in the vertical direction at the retracted position.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the arms are oriented in the vertical direction at the retracted position, so that the weight of the production members can be supported by the arms. Accordingly, the driving force of the driving means required for holding the effect member at the retracted position can be suppressed. It should be noted that it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to have the arm body in the vertical direction at the retracted position in this way (because the second arm interferes with the first arm). This has become possible for the first time with the present invention. As a result, it is possible to reduce the energy consumption of the driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the regulating means includes a slide body slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. , the slide body is slidably displaced with respect to the base member and the effect member is slidably displaced with respect to the slide body as the arm body is rotated about its one end side; A game machine F1 characterized in that the posture of the effect member with respect to the body is defined.

According to the game machine F4, in any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the regulating means includes a slide body slidably displaceable on the base member, and the effect member is slidably displaced on the slide body. By rotating the arm body about one end side, the slide body can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slidably displaced with respect to the slide body, and the effect member with respect to the arm body. can specify the posture of As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

In the gaming machine F4, the base member includes a guide shaft extending along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide body, and a pair of guide shafts extending parallel to the guide shaft and opposed to each other with a predetermined spacing. An upper end side of the slide body is slidably supported by a guide shaft of the base member, and a lower end side of the slide body is loosely fitted between the pair of opposed wall portions of the base member. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, resistance when the slide body is slidably displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the arm body is rotated about its one end side to produce the effect member. can be smoothly displaced.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on the base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are slidably guided on each of the pair of guide shafts, there are two sliding portions, and frictional resistance is reduced. increases. On the other hand, in the game machine F4, since there is only one sliding portion, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the sliding body is slidably displaced. Further, according to the game machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body comes into contact with the opposing wall portion of the base member, , the slide body can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side thereof is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing walls of the base member. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the slide body is slidably displaced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies rotatably connected at one end side to the base member, and can displace the effect member to the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. and the regulating means connects the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies, and at least one of the connection parts with the production members is slidably displaceable. A slide connecting member is provided, and at least one of the connecting portions is slid and displaced as the arm rotates about one end thereof, and the pair of effect members are displaced. , a game machine F6 characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the regulating means connects the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arms and the production members. Since at least one of the connecting portions is provided with a slide connecting member that can be slidably displaced, at least one of the connecting portions is slidably displaced as the arm body is rotated about its one end side. , the pair of production members can be displaced, and the posture of the production members with respect to the arm body can be defined. As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

In addition, in the game machine F6, two sets (a pair) of an arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the performance members of each set are connected by a slide connecting member. Since the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body can be regulated by slidably displaceable connection by the (regulating means), it is not necessary to provide a suspension structure (slide body) as in the case of game machine F4 or F5, for example. do not have. That is, since the slide body can be omitted, the weight can be reduced. Therefore, even if the suspension structure is omitted, the rattling of the effect member can be suppressed only by the arm body.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the respective sets are disposed facing each other. At the retracted position, the effect members are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and the effect member whose one end side the arm body rotates from the retracted position is disposed at the effect position. Then, the effect members bring their contact surfaces into contact with each other. is provided with a positioning recess that extends along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion when the arm body is rotated and receives the positioning protrusion, and the positioning protrusion is formed with an engaging portion. In addition, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that an engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning recess.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the sets are arranged to face each other, and at the retracted position, the effect members of the sets are separated from each other at a predetermined interval. When the arm body is rotated around one end side, the sets of effect members are displaced toward each other, and in the effect members, the contact surfaces of the sets of effect members are brought into contact with each other. can be made

In this case, one of the mutual contact surfaces of the production members is provided with a positioning projection, and the other contact surface is provided with a positioning projection when the arm body is rotated. Since the positioning recesses that extend along the trajectory of the protrusions and receive the positioning protrusions are recessed, the positioning protrusions and the positioning recesses are engaged with each other at the performance position, and the performance members can be positioned with each other. . That is, since each set of effect members is brought close to each other along the trajectory of circular motion, it is impossible to engage a convex shape with a concave shape and a convex shape of the same size. Since it extends along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion when the arm body is rotated, the positioning protrusion can be received (engaged) in the positioning recess.

On the other hand, the positioning of the effect members by the engagement of the positioning recesses and the positioning protrusions is limited to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning recesses. That is, in order for the positioning recess to be able to receive the positioning protrusion even on the trajectory of the circular motion of the effect member, the positioning recess is extended along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion. Otherwise, the positioning protrusion cannot be engaged. Therefore, the production members cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning concave portion. The engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged with each other at the position, and as a result, the performance members can be positioned with respect to each other even in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and the rattling can be suppressed. .

Here, it is also conceivable to omit the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion and provide only the engaging portion and the engaged portion to position the effect members. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion due to rattling and wobbling of the effect member caused by elastic deformation of the arm body, dimensional tolerance, and the like. On the other hand, in the game machine F7, the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion are first engaged to position the effect members, and then the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. It is possible to suppress the influence of rattling and wobbling of the production member described above, and to reliably engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion.

In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are The game machine F8 is characterized in that the other is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the projecting direction by a spring, Since the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, the ball can be retracted as the effect members approach each other. As a result, the operation from the reception of the positioning projection in the positioning recess to the engagement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be performed smoothly. Disengagement from the joining portion can be smoothly performed in accordance with the movement of the effect member when it is displaced to the retracted position.

It is preferable that the engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is provided in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion as the concave portion is provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, by pressing the ball of the ball plunger mechanism against the bottom surface of the positioning recess and retracting the ball, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism moves along the bottom surface of the positioning recess to the recess ( This is because it is possible to reliably form the engagement between the ball (engaging portion) and the recess (engaging portion).

In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is drawn toward the one magnet by magnetic force. A game machine F9 characterized by being formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is a magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles that are attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning convex portion is received in the positioning concave portion, the magnetic force can attract each other. Even if there is a positional deviation between the engaging portion and the engaged portion, the two can be engaged (magnetically attached) with high accuracy. As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F9, one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and the one side member and the other side member that are bridged between the one side member and the other side member A displacement member displaced by being guided by one end side and the other end side, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the displacement member. A game machine F17, comprising a body, wherein the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is arranged at the effect position.

According to the game machine F17, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F9, one end side of the displacement member can be guided by the one side member, and the other end side of the displacement member can be guided by the other side member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one side member and the other side member by the driving force of the driving means. Further, the driving force transmitted from the effect member disposed at the effect position can rotate the rotating body disposed on the displacement member.

In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end side is separately guided by the other side member, a deviation is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. , it was difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effecting member arranged at the effecting position, the driving means for rotating the rotating body is disposed on the displacement member. can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the displacement member as a whole, and with such weight reduction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, thereby stabilizing the displacement member. can be displaced by In addition, the size of the rotating body can be increased to the extent that the weight can be reduced.

In order to rotate the rotator provided on the displacement member, the means for transmitting the driving force from the effect member provided at the effect position to the rotator includes, for example, a gear provided on the rotator and the effect member The gears provided on the rotor are engaged with each other by placing the effect member at the effect position, and the driving force is transmitted from the effect member to the rotating body through the gears. ) is arranged, a stator is arranged in the production member, and a structure (so-called DC motor structure) in which driving force is transmitted between the rotor and the stator, or the direction of the magnetic poles in the rotating body alternately arranged magnets (stationary magnets) along the circumferential direction, an electromagnet is arranged in the production member, and a structure (so-called linear motor structure) and the like are exemplified.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the urging spring 11366 as an example>
a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member a pair of target members displaceably disposed on the base member, the biasing means disposed in a bent posture, and one of the pair of target members A gaming machine G1, wherein one end is directly or indirectly connected to one of the target members of the pair of target members, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member, and the pair of target members are each biased by a separate biasing means ( For example, see JP-A-2013-169262). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, each target member is urged by a separate urging means. However, there was a problem that variations occurred in the thickness.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when two biasing means are provided, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in the characteristics of each biasing means (such as dimensional tolerance). By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, variation in displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

In this case, the pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be arranged on separate base members. It may be in the form of

In addition, the game machine G1 includes one side member and the other side member which are arranged at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member which are installed between the one side member and the other side member and which are connected to the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the game machine G1 to a configuration that guides one end side of the displacement member and a configuration that guides the other end side of the displacement member. In such a game machine, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member due to the tendency of misalignment between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member. By applying , the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement between them can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the other side of the displacement member can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the deviation.

In the gaming machine G1, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member by being brought into contact with the connection member, and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained. Gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as the base. An urging force is applied to the member so as to maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, so that the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, such temporary fixing can improve the work efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. In addition, since the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the target member but also for fixing the connecting member to the base member, a member (for example, , fastening screws) are not required to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Arm Body 7641 and the Roller Receiving Portion 7311e as an Example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the displacement member being a rotating body rotatably disposed on the displacement member and a rotational driving force to the rotating body. A game machine H1 comprising: a rotation drive means for providing a displacement regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member.

Here, a game is known in which an effect of rotating a rotating body is performed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231926). Also, the one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, the long displacement member bridged between the one side member and the other side member, and the driving force is applied to the displacement member. There is known a game machine provided with driving means for driving (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). For example, when the former rotating body is arranged in the latter displacing member, the position at which the rotation of the rotating body performs an effect can be changed by displacing the displacing member.

However, in this case, if one end of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end is guided by the other side member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated, there is a problem that rattling and wobbling of the displacement member are likely to be amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, resulting in wear and damage of the movable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the displacement restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the rattling and wobbling of the displacement member when rotating the rotating body. . Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear and damage of the movable portion can be suppressed.

Further, even when other members are arranged at positions close to the rotating body at the production position, the displacement restricting means can suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member, so that the rotating body collides with the other member. can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect in which the rotating body is rotated while the other member is positioned close to the rotating body.

In addition, four sets of an arm body and a production member displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are arranged, and at the production position, the production members of each group are in contact with each other to form a circle. A form in which an annular shape is formed and the annular shape is arranged so as to surround the rotating body (an annular shape is arranged around the rotating body) may be adopted. According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member, thereby suppressing collision of the rotating body with the effect member. That is, even in a form in which the annular shape (drawing member) surrounds the rotating body, it is possible to prevent these collisions, so that the two can be brought close to each other and a smaller gap can be formed between the annular shape and the rotating body. Therefore, while making the player recognize the ring shape and the rotating body as one circle as a whole, an effect of rotating only the rotating body can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine H1 comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble due to the deformation of the movable mechanism. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated, the displacement member rattles and wobbles more than when the movable mechanism is not provided, and wear and damage of the movable portion are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H2, the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion and breakage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and the production member.

It should be noted that it is impossible to produce an effect by bringing the effect member close to the rotating rotating body as described above because it is necessary to avoid collision with the rotating body. Since the displacement member rattles and wobbles excessively, it has been impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. In contrast, as in the present invention, by adopting a structure in which the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the displacement regulating means, it becomes possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when a movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement restricting means is configured so that the guided portion of the movable mechanism is aligned with the guide groove. A gaming machine H3 characterized by restricting at least displacement of the displacement member in a direction guided along.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the displacement restricting means restricts at least the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove. It is possible to efficiently regulate the factors that cause rattling and wobbling of members. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobble of the displacement member while reducing the force required for the displacement restricting means.

In the game machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the displacement restricting means is an insertion member formed to be insertable into the gap. A game machine H4, wherein the insertion body is inserted into the gap.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformation members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the deformation member can be inserted into the gap. Since the displacement regulating means has an insertion member which is inserted into the gap and the insertion body is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (that is, the movable mechanism can be fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from rattling or wobbling when the rotating body is rotated, thereby suppressing wear and damage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and other members.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotation base is provided to support the rotary body and is formed concentrically with the rotating body. The game machine H5 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member is restricted by being brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement members by contacting the perimeter of the rotation base with the production members of each set or the displacement means when the production members are arranged at the production positions. The displacement can be restricted by contacting the outer periphery of the rotation base at a certain point. That is, since the outer circumference of the rotation base is held at a plurality of locations, it is possible to suppress displacement of the rotation base in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member), and a plurality of effect members. The relative position of the rotating body with respect to can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotating base is provided to support the rotary body and is formed concentrically with the rotating body. One of the effect member or displacement means and the rotating base is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnet or iron. A member is provided, and the displacement regulating means is arranged such that when the effecting member is disposed at the effecting position, the magnetic force acting between the effecting member of each set or the displacement means and the rotation base causes the A game machine H6 characterized by regulating the displacement of a displacement member.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement members by the magnetic force acting between each group of the production members or the displacement means and the rotation base when the production members are arranged at the production positions. It is possible to regulate the displacement of the rotation base by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since magnetic forces are applied to the rotation base from a plurality of directions, it is possible to suppress displacement of the rotation base (that is, looseness and wobble of the displacement member) in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, The relative position of the rotating body with respect to the production member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In the game machines H5 and H6, the contact positions where the performance members or displacement means of each set are brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base or the positions where the magnetic force is applied are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets, are preferably set at 120° intervals). In this case, there are four sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body, and the effect member or the displacement means of each set is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base. It is preferable that the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force is applied are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (that is, at 90° intervals). Since the rotating base can be constrained from all sides by arranging the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts on each other to face each other (arranged with a phase difference of 180°), the displacement (rattling and wobble) can be prevented in any direction. In addition, when the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the production member of each set is displaced, the rotation with respect to the production member is caused by the contact when the production member of each group is arranged at the production position. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). When the four sets of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, it is possible to perform centering for positioning the rotating body concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

Further, when magnets are arranged on both the effect member or the displacement means and the rotation base, the direction of the magnetic poles of these magnets may be the direction in which the magnetic force acts in the direction of attracting each other, or The magnetic force may be applied in a direction to repel each other.

In the game machine H5 or H6, when the effect members of each set are arranged at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect members adjacent to each other are brought into contact with each other, and one of the contact surfaces is brought into contact with each other. is provided with a magnet, and the other contact surface is provided with a magnet or an iron member with a magnetic pole directed in a direction in which the magnet is attracted by the magnetic force, The game machine H7 is characterized in that when the effect member is arranged at the effect position, contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetically attached to each other.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H5 or H6, when each set of production members is arranged at the production position, each production member contacts the adjacent production members with their contact surfaces. Since the contact surfaces are magnetically attached to each other by using the magnetic force of the magnet, the effect members can be strongly connected to each other. As a result, when the displacement regulating means (effect member or displacement means) comes into contact with the rotation base or exerts a magnetic force to regulate the displacement of the rotation base, the displacement regulating means (effect member) itself may wobble. The rotation base can be firmly held by suppressing rattling. As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress the displacement of the rotation base member (that is, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member), and to reliably position the rotating body relative to the plurality of effect members at a predetermined position.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
210 rear case (base member)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310 Displacement member 311a Protruding pin (guided portion, part of movable mechanism)
311b Stopper surface (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
312 rotation base 313 rotating body (second displacement member)
314a long hole (guide groove, part of movable mechanism)
314b Stopper surface (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
314c Slider holding portion (part of connecting portion)
315c Slider holding portion (part of connecting portion)
315 first rack (rack)
320L One side member 320R, 10320R, 13320R Other side member 331, 10331, 15331, 16331 Rear base (facing member, base member, cover member)
331b rack shaft (part of guide means, part of direct-acting restricting means, projecting portion, second engaging portion)
331c first opening (opening)
331d second opening (opening)
332, 10332 intermediate base (base member, cover member)
341 drive motor (driving means)
351 1st pinion (pinion)
363 crank gear (part of crank mechanism, rotating body)
363a Eccentric pin 364 Second rack (rack, target member)
364a guide groove (part of guide means, guided portion)
364b rack shaft (part of crank mechanism, guide groove)
365a second pinion (pinion)
366, 11366 biasing spring (biasing means)
367 roller (rotating contact member, contact member)
367b flange portion (stop plate member)
370 Interposed member (connection member)
420 rear base (base member, cover member)
422a upper rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
422b lower rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
431 drive motor (driving means)
433 rack 433c upper guide groove (opening, guided portion)
433d Lower guide groove (opening, guided portion)
435 upper arm body (arm body)
436 lower arm body (arm body)
440R1, 440R2 Annular segmented body (part of regulation means, third displacement member, effect member)
440L1, 440L2 Annular segmented body (part of regulation means, third displacement member, effect member)
450 posture regulation member (part of regulation means, slide body)
460 slide mechanism (part of base member)
462 guide rod (guide shaft)
480 cover body (cover member, base member)
491 Positioning projection 491a Engaging recess (engaging portion or engaged portion)
492 Positioning concave portion 492a Engaging convex portion (engaged portion or engaging portion)
2610 ball joint (part of the movable mechanism)
2620 biasing spring (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
3630, 5630 Rubber-like elastic body (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
7311e Roller receiving part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
7641 arm body (part of control means, part of displacement control means)
8641 base (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
8642 insertion part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
9652a-9652e magnets (part of biasing means)
9651 metal rod (part of biasing means)
10331e slit part (guide means)
10367 Roller (rotational abutment, displacement abutment member, abutment member)
10367b First flange portion (stop plate member)
10367c Second flange portion (stop plate member)
11661 roller (displacement contact member, contact member)
13671 telescopic actuator (contact member driving means)
15331g First regulation part (part of guide means)
15331h Second regulation part (part of guide means)
16681 recess (a part of direct motion restricting means, first engaging portion)
17493a recessed portion (engaging portion or engaged portion)
17495 Ball plunger mechanism 17495a Ball portion (engaged portion or engaging portion)
18453 holding part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1991 Magnet (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1992 Metal plate (part of control means, part of displacement control means)
P Guide rod (rod-shaped body)
S Slider (part of connecting part)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting the driving force of a drive means through a rack and a pinion (Patent Document 1). In this case, for example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it. Therefore, it is also possible to provide an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack, and to assist the driving force of the driving means with the urging force of the urging means.

JP 2014-28226 A (for example, FIG. 20)

However, the game machine described above has a problem that the transmission of driving force tends to be unstable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the transmission of driving force.

In order to achieve this object, a game machine according to claim 1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means. a rack and pinion for transmitting force to the displacement member; Non-parallel to the direction.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, it is possible to stabilize the transmission of driving force.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled operation unit viewed from the front; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit when the vertical slide unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit viewed from the back; (a) is a front view of a displacement member, and (b) is a rear view of the displacement member. (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b); be. FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled displacement member as viewed from the front; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled displacement member viewed from the rear; FIG. 10 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit when the vertical slide unit is viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit viewed from the back; Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the rear base, middle base and front base; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the rear base, intermediate base and front base; (a) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state, and (b) is a back perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state. (a) is a front perspective view of a crank gear and a second rack in an exploded state, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear and a second rack in an exploded state. (a) is a front view of the vertical slide unit with the displacement member arranged at the raised position; (b) is a front view of the vertical slide unit with the displacement member arranged between the raised position and the lowered position; It is a front view, and (c) is a front view of the up-and-down slide unit in the state where the displacement member was arrange|positioned at the lowered position. 16 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 15; FIG. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; FIG. 23 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22; FIG. 24 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base in a state where the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 23; (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of a second rack and a second pinion. (a) to (c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other-side member in which the other-side member is viewed from the rear; It is a front view of an annulus formation unit. It is a rear view of an annulus forming unit. It is a front view of the other side annular unit. It is a rear view of the other side annular unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the decomposed other-side annular unit viewed from the front. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the other side annular unit which looked at the decomposed other side annular unit from the back. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the rear base; (a) is a front view of the drive mechanism in a state in which a posture is formed for arranging the annular segment at the retracted position, and (b) is a posture for arranging the annular segment at the annular forming position. FIG. 10 is a front view of the drive mechanism in a folded state; It is a front perspective view of a posture regulation member. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. (c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the ring segment along the line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38(a), and (d) is a portion of the ring segment along the line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId of FIG. 38(b). It is an expanded sectional view. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state where the ring segment is arranged at the retracted position, and (a) and (b) are the ring segment with the retracted position. FIG. 10 is a front view and a rear view of the torus forming unit in a state arranged between the position and the torus forming position, (a) and (b) showing the state in which the torus segment is arranged at the torus forming position; 2 is a front view and a rear view of an annulus forming unit in FIG. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state in which the ring segment is arranged between the retracted position and the ring forming position. (a) and (b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit in a state in which the ring segment is arranged at the ring forming position. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged sectional views of the displacement member in the second embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partial enlarged views of the displacement member in a state where relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism. It is a cross-sectional view. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of a displacement member in a third embodiment, and (c) and (d) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member in a state in which the rubber-like elastic body is elastically deformed. It is a diagram. (a) is a rear view of a displacement member in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of (a). (a) is a rear view of a displacement member in a fifth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 45(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line XLVc-XLVc of FIG. (a) And (b) is a front view of the displacement member in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a front view of a vertical slide unit according to the seventh embodiment; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. FIG. 22 is a front view of a vertical slide unit in an eighth embodiment; It is a front view of a vertical slide unit. FIG. 20 is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base in a ninth embodiment; 4 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base; FIG. FIG. 22 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member in the tenth embodiment; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of the other side member. It is a rear view of the up-and-down slide unit in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 32 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit in the twelfth embodiment; It is a rear view of an up-and-down slide unit. (a) is a rear view perspective view of the other side member in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear schematic diagrams of the other side member schematically illustrating the mode of change in posture of the biasing spring. It is a diagram. (a) is a rear view of a vertical slide unit in a fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit. FIG. 20 is a front view of a transmission mechanism and a rear base in a fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base in the sixteenth embodiment; 4 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base; FIG. (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided ring body in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided ring body in the seventh embodiment, and (c) is a drawing 63(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the segmented ring along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc, and (d) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the segmented ring along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(b). FIG. 20 is a front view of a vertical slide unit and an annular ring forming unit in an eighteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit and the annular ring forming unit; FIG. 20 is a front view of a vertical slide unit and an annular ring forming unit in a nineteenth embodiment;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the later-described protruding motion unit 400 and compound motion unit 500 are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrude into the opening of the center frame 86 and are visible through the opening. It is said that For example, when the protruding motion unit 400 is placed in the rotational position by the first motion (see FIG. 14(a)), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 becomes visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When placed in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the second symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 in which the operation unit 200 is viewed from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the operation unit 200 has a box-shaped back case 210, and the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are stacked in order in the inner space of the back case 210. As shown in FIGS. A decorative cover 500 is provided on the foremost surface of the container.

The rear case 210 has a bottom wall portion 211 and an outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. The box is opened on one side (left front side of FIG. 6) by these wall portions 211 and 212. formed into a shape. A rectangular opening 211a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, and the rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the external shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The vertical slide unit 300 includes a long displacement member 310, one side member 320L and the other side member 320R which are arranged at a predetermined interval and support one side and the other side of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction so as to be able to guide each other. and an interposing member 370 interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposing member 370 are connected to the rear case 210. They are arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 respectively. The displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) while maintaining a posture parallel to the interposition member 370 .

The ring forming unit 400 is composed of a one side ring unit 410L and the other side ring unit 410R. They are arranged on the front (front) side of the side member 320R. A pair of upper and lower annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 are displaceably arranged in each of the annular units 410L and 410R. The divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are formed in a shape obtained by dividing an annular shape into four parts in the circumferential direction. to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

The decorative cover 500 is attached to the standing end surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210 and arranged on the front (front) side of the ring forming unit 400 . That is, the decorative cover 500 partially covers only the portion along the outer wall portion 212 of the rear case 210, shields the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 from the player, and opens the opening 211a (that is, the second The 3-symbol display device 81) is exposed so as to be visible to the player.

The detailed configurations of the vertical slide unit 300 and the annular ring forming unit 400 of the operation unit 200 configured as described above will be described below. First, the detailed configuration of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 28. FIG.

7 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 10, the vertical slide unit 300 has first racks 315 arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of a displacement member 310 in parallel to each other. The rack 315 is meshed with each first pinion 351 respectively arranged on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Further, the displacement member 310 is slidably connected to the guide rod P at one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side thereof. It is arranged (fixed) on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R in a posture aligned in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, in the vertical slide unit 300, when the first pinion 351 is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 341 and the first rack 315 is linearly moved by the rotation, the displacement member 310 is guided by the linear movement. While being guided by the rod P, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 21). Here, the detailed configuration of the displacement member 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG.

11(a) is a front view of the displacement member 310, and FIG. 11(b) is a rear view of the displacement member 310. FIG. 12(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 310 along line XIIa-XIIa in FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 12(b) is a cross-sectional view of displacement member 310 along line XIIb-XIIb in FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded rear perspective view of the disassembled displacement member 310 viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, the displacement member 310 includes a main body portion 311 formed in an elongated shape of a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and a cylinder protruding toward the front from the center of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. a rotating base 312, a rotating body 313 circular in front view rotatably and concentrically supported by the rotating base 312, and end sides connected displaceably to one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311, respectively. It mainly comprises a portion 314 and a first rack 315 fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the end side portion 314 .

A pair of upper and lower protruding pins 311a protrude from the rear surface of the body portion 311 on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The protruding pin 311 a is a part for displaceably connecting the end side portion 314 to the body portion 311 , is formed in a columnar shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted into the elongated hole 314 a of the end side portion 314 .

The pair of upper and lower protruding pins 311a are arranged along a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (vertical direction in FIG. 11(b)). The projecting pin 311a on the other side is arranged along the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (horizontal direction in FIG. 11(b)).

Further, the body portion 311 is formed with stopper surfaces 311b on the end surfaces (the left side and the right side in FIG. 11(a)) on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The stopper surface 311b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 311. As shown in FIG.

A drive motor and a gear mechanism (both not shown) are disposed inside the rotation base 312, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor is transmitted to the rotating body 313 by the gear mechanism, thereby rotating the rotating body 313. It is rotated relative to the base 312 (body portion 311). Note that the rotation base 312 is fixed to the body portion 311 . Therefore, as will be described later, by holding the rotation base 312 by another member, displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted (see FIG. 65, for example).

The end side portion 314 is formed with an elongated hole 314a, a stopper surface 314b, and a slider holding portion 314c. The elongated holes 314a are a pair of upper and lower through holes for receiving the protruding pins 311a of the main body 311, and are oval holes in a front view. The elongated hole 314a has an oval long diameter direction that is orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 and the one side member 320L). and the other side member 320R (horizontal direction in FIG. 11B).

In this case, between the protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 and the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314, there is provided a cylindrical cylindrical portion and a flange projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. A collar C is interposed. The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion of the collar C is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the projecting pin 311a of the main body portion 311, and the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion is equal to or slightly larger than the short diameter of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314. The dimension is set to be slightly smaller, and the outer diameter of the flange portion is set to be greater than the length of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12).

As a result, as will be described later, the protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 moves through the collar C in the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a (horizontal direction in FIG. 12(a)). can be displaced along That is, the body portion 311 can be relatively displaced with respect to the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 27). By interposing the collar C in this way, the collar C rolls between the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a, so that relative displacement can be performed smoothly and wear can be suppressed. and durability can be improved.

The stopper surface 314b is a portion for restricting the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a specified range, and is formed as a flat surface, and the stopper surface 314b is formed in an assembled state (main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314). 314 are connected), it is formed at a position facing the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 with a predetermined gap therebetween.

The stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 are formed when each protruding pin 311a of the main body portion 311 is positioned at the center of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314 in the longitudinal direction (that is, 11(a), when the body portion 311 is not tilted and is parallel to the left and right end side portions 314), they face each other in a parallel posture.

In addition, while maintaining this parallel posture, each protruding pin 311a (collar C) is positioned at the end of the long hole 314a on one side in the major axis direction (left side in FIG. 11(a)) or on the other side in the major axis direction (in FIG. 11(a)). ) on the right side), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval on both the one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 311 (between the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). gap is formed).

The first rack 315 is formed with a rack portion 315a and a slider holding portion 315c. The rack portion 315a is formed as a rack having a toothed side surface of a plate-like member, and is a portion that meshes with the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 9) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In the assembled state, the tooth surface is arranged in parallel with the axis of the guide rod P.

The slider holding portion 315 c is a portion for holding the slider S between itself and the slider holding portion 314 c of the end side portion 314 . The slider holding portion 314c of the end side portion 314 and the slider holding portion 314c of the first rack 315 are each formed in a shape in which a cylinder is vertically divided into two, and are assembled (the first rack is fastened and fixed to the end side portion 314). ), the slider S is held between them (between the inner peripheral surfaces of the cylinder).

The slider S is a cylindrical member that is fitted onto the guide rod P and slides along the axial direction of the guide rod P, and has an outer diameter that corresponds to the inner diameter of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. set. A pair of upper and lower locking walls protrude inward from the inner peripheral surfaces of the slider holding portions 314c and 315c. It abuts to prevent the slider S from slipping off in the axial direction.

In this way, by adopting a structure in which the slider S is interposed between the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 and the guide rod P, the slider S can be slidably and slidably moved relative to the guide rod P made of brass. The material of the end side 314 and the first rack 315 can be set independently of the brass guide rod P, while being able to be made of a material with excellent wear resistance. That is, since the end side portion 314 is a member that restricts the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 by the stopper surface 314c, it is effective to be able to select a material that can ensure the rigidity during the restriction. On the other hand, since the first rack 315 is a member that is meshed with the first pinion 351 and linearly moved by receiving the rotational driving force thereof, it is effective to be able to select a material that can secure rigidity for maintaining the meshing state. becomes.

Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, description will be made. As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is arranged on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 by rotating the first pinions 351 arranged on the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. Each of the first racks 315 provided is linearly moved, whereby the displacement member 310 is slid vertically while being guided along the guide rods P fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. be done. Here, detailed configurations of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG.

15 is an exploded front perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vertical slide unit 300 viewed from the rear. be.

Although the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R have a slight difference in shape, the parts that exhibit their technical functions are bilaterally symmetrical (plane symmetrical with respect to an imaginary plane located in the center between the opposing sides). ), and the configuration thereof is substantially the same, the other side member 320R will be described below as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the other side member 320R includes a rear base 331, an intermediate base 332 covering the front (front) side of the rear base 331, and a front (front) side of the intermediate base 332. a drive motor 341 attached to the intermediate base 332; a first pinion 351 rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 334; and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the Here, detailed configurations of the rear base 331, the intermediate base 332 and the front base 333 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG.

17 is a front perspective view of the rear base 331, intermediate base 332 and front base 333, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the rear base 331, intermediate base 332 and front base 333. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the rear base 331 has a substantially L-shape in a front view from a main body portion formed in a vertically elongated shape and a protruding portion laterally protruding from the lower end of the main body portion. A transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 15 and 16) for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 341 to the first pinion is accommodated between the intermediate base member 332 and the intermediate base member 332 .

The rear base 331 has a pinion shaft 331a and a rack shaft 331b protruding from the front of the main body (the surface facing the intermediate base 332), and has a first opening 331c and a second opening 331c in the main body and the projecting portion. 331d are formed with openings.

The pinion shaft 331a is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the first pinion 351 (see FIG. 19), and the rack shaft 331b is a guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 (see FIG. 19). It is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section that is inserted through the second rack 364 to regulate the posture of the second rack 364 . A screw is fastened to the end surface of the pinion shaft 331 a , and the head of the screw serves as a retainer for the first pinion 351 . Also, the diameter of the rack shaft 331b is set equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 can rotate around the rack shaft 331b.

The rack shaft 331b is arranged at a position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 when the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are assembled. Specifically, the rack shaft 331b is arranged so that the direction connecting the axis of the rack shaft 331b and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364. . As a result, as will be described later, the second rack 364 in which the guide groove 364a is guided by the rack shaft 331b can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a supported by the gear shaft 332i ( See Figure 26).

The first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are openings extending linearly, respectively, and are areas corresponding to the biasing springs 366 (see FIG. 22) arranged in a bent posture (biasing springs 331c and 331d when viewed from the front). (region overlapping spring 366). Therefore, when mounting the biasing spring 366, after the biasing spring 366 is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the biasing spring 366 is inserted through the first opening 331c or the second opening 331d. Since the end portion can be engaged with the mating member, it is possible to prevent the urging spring 366 from being repelled (jumping due to its own elastic recovery force) and mounting in a bent posture. The mounting operation of the biasing spring 366 will be described later (see FIG. 28).

The biasing spring 366 is a coil spring, and the outer peripheral surface thereof is curved in an arc shape. is preferred. This is because it is possible to suppress a decrease in rigidity of the rear base 331 while enabling locking of the ends and suppression of sliding resistance.

The intermediate base 332 is formed in a shape corresponding to the rear base 331 . That is, the intermediate base 332 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the front by a vertically elongated main body portion and a protruding portion laterally protruding from the lower end of the main body portion. By being covered on the front (front) side, the transmission mechanism is housed in the space formed between the opposing sides.

A first pinion insertion window 332a and a motor shaft insertion window 332b are formed in the main body of the intermediate base 332, and a plurality of gear shafts 332c to 332i extend from the rear surface of the main body (the surface facing the rear base 331). And a roller shaft 332r is protruded. The first pinion insertion window 332a is an opening for exposing the first pinion 351 pivotally supported on the pinion shaft 331a of the rear base 331 to the front (front) side of the intermediate base 332. 351 can be engaged with the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 (see FIG. 21).

The motor shaft insertion window 332b connects the drive shaft of the drive motor 341 attached to the front surface (front surface) of the intermediate base 332 to the gear 361 of the transmission mechanism housed between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other. It is an opening for Further, the plurality of gear shafts 332c-332i are shaft-shaped bodies having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the gears 362a-362e, the crank gear 363 and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism, respectively. Screws are fastened to the end surfaces of the gear shafts 332c to 332i, and the heads of the screws are used to prevent the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 and the transmission gear 365 of the transmission mechanism from coming off.

The roller shaft 332r is a cylindrical body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) of the transmission mechanism. The roller 367 supported by the roller shaft 332r is held by the opposing surfaces of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 (the opposing surfaces are retained).

In addition, the intermediate base 332 has a pair of left and right regulation walls 332t projecting from the rear surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the rear base 331), and the front surface of the main body portion (the surface facing the front base 333). A pair of upper and lower holding recesses 332j and 332k are formed, and a connecting shaft 332m projects from the front surface of the projecting portion (the surface facing the front base 333).

The regulating walls 332t are parts for regulating the posture of the second rack 364, and are formed in a pair at a predetermined interval. The space between the pair of restricting walls 332t facing each other is made larger than the width dimension of the second rack 364, and is formed so as to have a gap with the side surface of the second rack 364. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the second rack 364 can be rotated around the rack shaft 331b by the gap (see FIG. 26).

The holding recesses 332j and 332k are parts for holding the upper end side and the lower end side of the guide rod P, respectively, and are spaced apart in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 17) by a distance equivalent to the length dimension of the guide rod P. It is positioned and formed as a recess that is open on the side of the front base 333 . The depth and width of the recess are set to dimensions equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the guide rod P. Therefore, by fitting the guide rods P into the holding recesses 332j and 332k and covering (fastening and fixing) the front base 333 to the intermediate base 332, the guide rods are arranged between the back surface of the front base 333 and the holding recesses 332j and 332k. P can be sandwiched and the guide rod P can be held firmly.

As a result, the other side member 320R is assembled without the front base 333, the guide rod P is held by the displacement member 310, and the guide rod P held by the displacement member 310 is fitted into the holding recesses 332j and 332k. By attaching (fastening and fixing) the front base 333, the other-side member 320R and the displacement member 310 can be connected. Therefore, the work of assembling the vertical slide unit 300 can be made efficient.

The connecting shaft 332m is a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section that serves as a connecting portion with the interposing member 370, and is rotatably inserted into a connecting hole in the connecting plate 371 of the interposing member 370, thereby connecting the other side member 320R. Interposed member 370 is connected. That is, the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370 are connected in a state in which the relative position can be adjusted. Accordingly, as will be described later, when attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210, the attachment work can be performed while adjusting the attachment position, so that workability can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, detailed configurations of the transmission mechanism and first pinion 351 will be described. FIG. 19(a) is a front perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state, and FIG. 19(b) is a back perspective view of the transmission mechanism in the assembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b), the transmission mechanism includes a gear 361 connected to the drive shaft of the drive motor 341, and a top gear (gear 362a) meshing with the gear 361. Gears 362a to 362e as a gear train, a crank gear 363 meshed with the rear gear 362e of the gear train, a second rack 364 driven by the crank mechanism of the crank gear 363, and the second rack 364 , a biasing spring 366 for applying a biasing force to the second rack 364, and a roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366. .

Here, detailed configurations of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 will be described with reference to FIG. 20 . 20(a) is a front perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 20(b) is a rear perspective view of the crank gear 363 and the second rack 364 in the disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the crank gear 363 has an eccentric pin 363a protruding at a position eccentric from the center of rotation, and the eccentric pin 363a protrudes from the crank gear 363. A detected portion 363b is projected from the opposite side. The eccentric pin 363a is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section, and is inserted through the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 in the assembled state. The detected portion 363b is a portion that is detected by a sensor device (not shown), and the sensor device determines the rotational position (phase ). Based on this detection result, main controller 110 can recognize that displacement member 310 has been placed in the raised position (see FIG. 21(a)) or the lowered position (see FIG. 21(c)).

The second rack 364 is formed with a guide groove 364a and a rack groove 364b. The guide groove 364a is an opening through which the rack shaft 331b (see FIG. 17) of the rear base 331 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack (vertical direction in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b)). It is extended in a shape.

The rack groove 364b is a concave groove through which the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted, and extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack. The width of the rack groove 364b is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the eccentric pin 363a so that the eccentric pin 363a can slide along the rack groove 364b as the crank gear 363 rotates. .

The rack groove 364b extends linearly in a direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the rack (that is, in a direction perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364). 363a acting on the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364 can be suppressed from occurring in a component other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364, and the resistance when linearly moving the second rack 364 can be suppressed accordingly. can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 19(a) and FIG. 19(b), description will be made. The transmission gear 365 includes a second pinion 365a that meshes with the rack of the second rack 364, and a speed increasing portion 365b that meshes with the first pinion 351. These second pinion 365a and speed increasing portion 365b It is integrally formed in a concentric state.

The biasing spring 366 is a metal coil spring, one end of which is locked to the lower end of the second rack 364 and the other end of which is locked to the end of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 . The biasing spring 366 is elastically deformed in tension when the second rack 364 is positioned at the lower end of the movable range, and applies the elastic recovery force to the second rack 364 as a biasing force. When the second rack 364 is displaced from the lower end to the upper end of the movable range, it is further tensile-deformed along with the displacement, thereby gradually increasing the biasing force applied to the second rack, and the second rack 364 is movable. When it reaches the upper end of the range, it is in the most tensile deformation state and exerts the maximum biasing force on the second rack 364 .

As will be described later, the biasing spring 366 applies a biasing force to the second rack 364 in a direction (inclination direction) non-parallel to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 (see FIGS. 22 to 25). ), by forming the biasing spring 366 from a coil spring, it is possible to simplify the structure in which the direction of applying the biasing force is not parallel to the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 . Further, since the biasing force corresponding to the displacement of the second rack 364 can be continuously applied, the second rack 364 can be stably biased.

The roller 367 has a cylindrical portion 367a that is rotatably supported by the roller shaft 332r (see FIG. 18) of the intermediate base 332, and a flange that protrudes radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a. A flange portion 367b is provided, and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 367a is brought into contact between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366 so that the biasing spring 366 is bent.

Returning to FIG. 7 to FIG. 10, description will be made. The interposing member 370 is formed in a horizontally elongated shape when viewed from the front, and is interposed between the lower ends of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R as described above. Specifically, a pair of flat plate-like connecting plates 671 are suspended from the lower surface (lower side in FIG. 7) of the interposed member 370, and each connecting plate 671 has a circular connecting hole when viewed from the front. By inserting the connecting shaft 332m which is formed to penetrate and protrude from the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 671, the interposing member 370 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. is set.

A screw is fastened to the end surface of the connecting shaft 332m, and the head of the screw serves as a retainer for the connecting plate 671. As shown in FIG. In this case, the inner diameter of the connecting hole in the connecting plate 671 is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 332m, and the thickness of the connecting plate 671 is slightly smaller than the height of the connecting shaft 332m. is set to Therefore, in the connecting portions between the interposing member 370 and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the connecting plate 671 is rotatably supported by the connecting shaft 332m.

As described above, the vertical slide unit 300 is formed such that the displacement member 310 can be displaced along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 7) of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. That is, the displacement member 310 is formed so that one longitudinal side (left side in FIG. 7) and the other side (right side in FIG. 7) can be guided by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, respectively, and the driving force of the driving motor 341 is By being applied, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are displaced along the longitudinal direction.

Conventionally, such a unit (that is, a structure in which the displacement member 310 is installed between the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R) has low rigidity as a whole and is easily damaged. That is, since the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are easily deformed with respect to the displacement member 310 (for example, when viewed from the front, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, which should be parallel to each other, are "half"). or in a side view, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, which should be parallel to each other, are deformed in a "V" shape). , the load concentrates on the connecting portion between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the displacement member 310, which is likely to be damaged. Therefore, for example, in the transporting process of transporting such a unit or the mounting process of attaching the unit to the mating member, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are arranged in a "V" shape with respect to the displacement member 310. It was necessary to handle it so that it would not be deformed, resulting in deterioration of workability.

On the other hand, according to the vertical slide unit 300 of the present embodiment, since the interposed member 320 is interposed between the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the entire unit is frame-shaped and its rigidity is increased. can be improved. That is, it is possible to prevent the one-side member 320L and the other-side member 320R from being deformed into a “V” shape or a “V” shape with respect to the displacement member 310 . Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated, and workability in the transportation process and the mounting process can be improved.

A brass guide rod P is fixed to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. 314c) is connected, the displacement member 310 can be connected to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the guide rod P, thereby connecting the displacement member 310 to the one side member 320L and the other side member. A closed connecting loop between 320R and the interposer 370 can be formed.

That is, in the conventional product (that is, in a form without the guide rod P in this embodiment), the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 and the first pinions 351 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R The connecting loop is cut, and the displacement member 310 is disconnected from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310, the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R can be connected via the guide rod P (a closed connection loop is formed). Therefore, the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole can be increased. Further, since the guide rod P is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, the rigidity of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole.

In the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 (and the first rack 315) are connected so as to be relatively displaceable. (that is, the linear motion progress of the first rack 315 driven by the first pinion 351 of the one side member 320L and the first pinion 351 of the first pinion 320R of the other side member 320R) Even if there is a deviation from the progress of the linear motion of the first rack 315, the deviation is absorbed by the above relative displacement, and the displacement member 310 is formed to be stably displaced (see FIG. 27). ).

In this case, according to this embodiment, the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are connected to the guide rod P via the slider S (that is, in a form that surrounds the guide rod P), and the guide rod P Since the displacement is restricted in any of the directions perpendicular to the axis (radial direction), the postures of the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 can be stabilized when the displacement member 310 is slid. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member 320L of the displacement member 310 and the guidance by the other-side member 320R, relative displacement occurs between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315. can be easily generated, and the function of absorbing deviation due to such relative displacement can be reliably exhibited.

Here, as described above, the interposing member 370 is inserted into the connecting hole of the connecting plate 371 in such a manner that the connecting shaft 332m is rotatable, so that the interposed member 370 is attached to each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R. They are connected so as to be displaceable (relatively rotatable). Therefore, since the relative positions of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R and the interposition member 370 can be adjusted, the workability of attaching the vertical slide unit 300 to the rear case 210 can be improved. For example, even if the other side member 320R is displaced from the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210 after the one side member 320L is attached to the predetermined position of the bottom wall portion 211 of the rear case 210, The position of the other side member 320R can be adjusted with respect to a predetermined position, and as a result, workability can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the displacement member 310, the main body portion 311, the end side portion 314, and the first rack 315 are formed to be relatively displaceable, and the relative displacement is in the lateral direction (longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310) as the longitudinal direction. Since the configuration utilizes the elongated hole 314a, the configuration in which the interposing member 370 and the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R are relatively rotatable ensures the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole. , it is particularly effective in ensuring compatibility with the function of making it possible to adjust the mounting position.

Next, operations of the vertical slide unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 27. FIG. As described above, the other side member 320R will be described below as a representative example, and the description of the one side member 320L will be omitted.

FIG. 21(a) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 with the displacement member 310 placed at the raised position, and FIG. 21(b) shows the displacement member 310 placed between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 21(c) is a front view of the vertical slide unit 300 in a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged in the lowered position. 21(a) to 21(c) illustrate a state in which the front base 333 is removed so that the first pinion 351 and the first rack 315 can be visually recognized.

22 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and the rear base 331 viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 23 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and the intermediate base 332 viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 24 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base 331 in a state in which the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. 22, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the transmission mechanism and intermediate base 332 in a state in which the transmission mechanism has transitioned from FIG. be.

22 and 23 correspond to the state in which the displacement member 310 shown in FIG. 21(a) is arranged at the raised position, and FIGS. Corresponds to the state placed in position. 22 and 24, illustration of the first pinion 351 is omitted. Also, a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated) is illustrated. However, the hatching of the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 21(a), 22 and 23, when the displacement member 310 is positioned at the lowered position, the transmission mechanism is such that the second rack 364 is at the lowest position (FIGS. 22 and 23) in the movable range. 23), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most contracted state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the forward direction (clockwise (right) in FIG. 22) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 is rotated by the gear train (gears 362a to 362e) to the crank gear 363. , and the crank gear 363 is rotated clockwise (right) in FIG.

22, the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is slid along the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 is It is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 22), and the second pinion 365a is rotated clockwise (rightward) in FIG. That is, the transmission gear 365 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the rotation of the transmission gear 365 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the speed increasing portion 365b, and the first pinion 351 rotates forward (clockwise (right) in FIG. 23).

The clockwise (right) rotation of the first pinion 351 in FIG. 23 is the counterclockwise (left) rotation of the other side member 320R in FIG. a) The counterclockwise (counterclockwise) rotation displaces (lowers) the first rack 315 of the displacement member 310 downward (downward in FIG. 21(a)). As a result, the displacement member 310 is lowered as shown in FIG. 21(b), after which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21(c).

When the displacement member 310 is placed at the lowered position shown in FIG. 21(c), the transmission mechanism moves the second rack 364 to the uppermost position (FIGS. 24 and 25) of the movable range, as shown in FIGS. 25), and the biasing spring 366 is in the most extended state. From this state, when the gear 361 is rotated in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 24) by the driving force of the drive motor 341, the rotation of the gear 361 causes the above-described action through the transmission mechanism. is transmitted to the first pinion 351 by the opposite action, and the first pinion 351 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation in FIG. 23)). As a result, the displacement member 310 is raised as shown in FIG. 21(b), and then placed at the raised position shown in FIG. 21(a).

Here, in this embodiment, after the linear motion of the second rack 364 is transmitted to the transmission gear 365 and the first pinion 351 and converted into rotary motion, the rotary motion is transmitted from the first pinion 351 to the first rack 315. The stroke amount of the displacement member 310 (first rack 315) is ensured by adopting a two-stage rack structure in which the movement is converted into linear motion. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a third pinion that is rotationally driven by the drive motor 341 is adopted as a configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364, the second rack 364 has a tooth surface for the second pinion 365b. It is necessary to secure each of the tooth flanks for the third pinion, which causes an increase in the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 (vertical direction in FIG. 22).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the configuration for linearly moving the second rack 364 is formed not by the third pinion but by the crank mechanism (the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 and the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364). Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to provide the second rack 364 with a tooth surface for the third pinion, and the longitudinal dimension of the second rack 364 can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, since the rack groove 364b extends linearly in the direction perpendicular to the tooth surface of the second rack 364 (that is, the direction perpendicular to the direction of linear movement of the second rack 364, the left-right direction in FIG. 22), When the crank gear 363 is rotated and the eccentric pin 363a slides in the rack groove 364b, a force component acting on the rack groove 364b from the eccentric pin 363a includes a component other than the linear motion direction of the second rack 364. can be suppressed, and the resistance can be reduced accordingly. As a result, energy consumption required for linear motion of the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

21(a) or the lowered position shown in FIG. It is done by In this case, for example, sensor devices are provided at the start and end of the movable range of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, respectively, and the displacement member 310 is placed at the raised position or the lowered position according to the detection results of each sensor device. In the structure for detecting the movement of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, it is necessary to dispose sensor devices at separated positions such as the start and end of the linear motion of the first rack 315 and the second rack 364, which lengthens the wiring accordingly. If the wiring becomes long, not only does the material cost increase, but it is necessary to route the wiring while avoiding interference with other members. This increases the risk of disconnection. In particular, in the structure in which the transmission mechanism is accommodated between the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 facing each other as in the present embodiment, it is difficult to arrange wiring while avoiding interference with other members (transmission mechanism). .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the crank gear 363 is provided with the detected portion 363b, and the rotation position (phase) of the detected portion 363 is detected by a sensor device, whereby the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position. Each sensor device can be arranged close to each other because of the structure that detects the fact that it has been done. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, it is possible not only to reduce the material cost, but also to improve the degree of freedom in design and to suppress the occurrence of disconnection.

Here, in the structure for raising and lowering the displacement member 310, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member 310, a larger driving force is required when the displacement member 310 is raised than when it is lowered. In this case, in this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position shown in FIG. Therefore, when the displacement member 310 is raised to the raised position, the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to raise the displacement member 310 (that is, to displace the second rack 364 downward (downward in FIGS. 24 and 25). It can be used as a force for That is, the driving force of the driving motor 341 can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 .

However, in such a structure in which the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364, the transmission of driving force between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a tends to become unstable. That is, the guide mechanism that guides the linear motion of the second rack 364 is provided with a predetermined tolerance. The rack 364 has wobble. Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced in a straight line, and the posture of the second rack 364 fluctuates by the tolerance (gap). rattling in the direction of rotation) occurs. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable. In this case, in the structure in which the biasing spring 366 applies the biasing force to the second rack 364, if the direction of the biasing force coincides with the direction of the rectilinear motion of the second rack 364, the biasing spring 366 is The biasing force acts as a force that encourages the second rack 364 to move wildly.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is Being non-parallel (inclined), the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction of pushing the second rack 364 toward one side of the guide mechanism that guides the second rack 364 . can work. As a result, the second rack 364 is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of erratic posture.

Furthermore, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack 364 Even if the posture of the second rack 364 temporarily fluctuates, the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 can be applied to the second rack 364 as a force in the direction to converge the posture of the rack 364 . Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement (tooth engagement) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, and to stabilize the transmission of the driving force.

In this embodiment, the direction in which the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 is applied is inclined in the direction of biasing the lower end side of the second rack 364 toward the side opposite to the second pinion 365a (for example, the left side in FIG. 22). . That is, since the direction in which the biasing force is applied is the direction in which the force component that brings the tooth flanks of the second rack 364 closer to the tooth flanks of the second pinion 365a is generated, the gap between these two tooth flanks can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag in transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth flanks, thereby improving the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress accelerated wear of the tooth flanks and breakage of the tooth flanks due to collision between the tooth flanks immediately after the driving force is transmitted from the stopped state (in the initial stage of meshing). Furthermore, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

Here, as described above, in the structure in which the driving force of the drive motor 341 is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, it is difficult to secure a space for arranging the biasing spring 366. FIG. Therefore, it has been difficult to set the length dimension of the biasing spring 366 to a length dimension that enables exertion of a desired biasing force. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 25, the biasing spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture, so that the length dimension can be secured while avoiding interference with other members. be able to.

That is, in this embodiment, as described above, the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 are formed in a substantially L-shape in a front view from the main body portion and the overhanging portion projecting from the main body portion. as a space for urging the urging spring 366, not only is it possible to arrange the urging spring 366 in a bent posture, but also the rigidity of the structure consisting of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 is increased. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 310 can be stabilized. Furthermore, since the projecting portion projects inward from the lower ends of the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, the dead space formed below the interposing member 370 is effective as a space for arranging the projecting portion. available for In addition, by forming the connecting shaft 332m on the front surface of the projecting portion (intermediate base 332), it is possible to facilitate the connection work with the interposing member 370, thereby improving the workability of the interposing member. The effect of improving the rigidity of the vertical slide unit 300 as a whole by interposing the 370 can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the state of meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a will be described.

26(a) to 26(c) are partially enlarged front views of the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, corresponding to FIG. 26(b) shows the state in which the second rack 364 is rotated clockwise about the rack shaft 331b with respect to the state shown in FIG. 26(a). ) in which the second rack 364 is rotated counterclockwise around the rack shaft 331b. Also, FIG. 26 illustrates a state in which the speed increasing portion 365b of the transmission gear 365 is omitted (a state in which the transmission gear 365 is cut and only the second pinion 365a is partially illustrated). However, the hatching of the cut surface of the second pinion 365a is omitted.

As described above, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, it cannot be completely displaced in a straight line. A rattle in the direction of approaching and separating from the 2-pinion 365a (horizontal direction in FIG. 26(a)) occurs. Therefore, the meshing (meshing) between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a is not stable, and the transmission of the driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rack shaft 331b of the rear base 331 is arranged to face the second pinion 365a, and the rack shaft 331b is rotatable and slidable in the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364. is inserted into the Therefore, when the second rack 364 moves linearly, as shown in FIGS. It can be displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a.

That is, when the posture of the second rack 364 fluctuates, the fluctuation is not caused by rattling in the direction of approaching or separating from the second pinion 365a (horizontal direction in FIG. 26(a)), (rotation around the rack axis 331b). As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a constant meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

In this case, the guide groove 364a is formed in the plate surface of the second rack 364, and the rack shaft 331b is formed in the region of the rear base 331 facing the second rack 364. 331b can be arranged on the trajectory of the second rack 364 in linear motion. That is, there is no need to form a portion (guide groove 364a, rack shaft 331b) for displacing the second rack 364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a outside the outer shape of the second rack 364. Since it can be arranged in a dead space, which is a space for movement of the second rack 364 and in which other members cannot be arranged, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

Next, referring to FIG. 27, the operation of the movable mechanism of the displacement member 310 (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311) will be described.

27(a) to 27(c) are partially enlarged front views of the vertical slide unit 300. FIG. In FIG. 27(a), the left and right end side portions 314 are at the same progress of slide displacement, but in FIG. FIG. 27(c) shows the state in which the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b perform the stopper function when the difference in the progress of the slide displacement exceeds a predetermined amount.

As described above, in the other side member 320R, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism (see FIGS. 22 to 25). The first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on the other longitudinal direction side (the right side in FIG. 21) of the displacement member 310 is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the other side member 320R. Accompanied by linear motion (up or down). At the same time, when the drive motor 341 is rotationally driven in the one side member 320L, the driving force of the drive motor 341 is transmitted to the first pinion 351 via the transmission mechanism, and the first pinion 351 is rotated. A first rack 315 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 is meshed with the first pinion 351 of the one-side member 320L, and the first rack 315 linearly moves (rises) as the first pinion 351 rotates. or lowered). As a result, the displacement member 310 is displaced along the vertical direction (longitudinal direction of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R) (see FIG. 21).

However, in such a structure in which one longitudinal side of the displacement member 310 is guided and driven by the one side member 320L and the other longitudinal side thereof is separately guided and driven by the other side member 320R, guidance and driving by the one side member 320 and driving are performed separately. , guide and drive by the other side member 320R. Therefore, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310 . If there is a large deviation between the guidance and drive by the one side member 320 and the guidance and drive by the other side member 320R, not only will the load on each drive motor 341 become excessive, but there is a possibility that the displacement member 310 will stop. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by inserting the protruding pin 311a of the body portion 311 into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 (see FIG. 12), the end side portion 314 and the second end portion 314 of the body portion 311 are inserted. One rack 315 is formed to be relatively displaceable. Therefore, for example, when the displacement member 310 is raised, if the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (for example, the one-side and the other-side 27(b), even if there is a difference in sliding resistance between the two sliders S, or if there is variation in driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), the one-side member 320L The linear motion of the first rack 315 (left side in FIG. 27(b)) guided and driven precedes the linear motion of the first rack 315 (right side in FIG. 27(b)) guided and driven by the other side member 320R. (located on the upper side in FIG. 27(b)).

That is, when there is a deviation between the guidance or driving by the one side member 320L and the guidance or driving by the other side member 320R, the deviation is caused by the displacement member 310 as shown in FIG. 27(b). It can be absorbed by a movable mechanism (a structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311). As a result, the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the elongated hole 314a that constitutes the movable mechanism extends in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the end side portion 314 slides along the guide rod P (that is, in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310). 27(a), which is the direction connecting the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the guidance or drive by the one-side member 320L differs from the guidance or drive by the other-side member 320R (when there is a deviation), the main body portion 311 is affected by the difference. Displacement (sliding) along the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 of the protruding pin 311a is likely to occur, thereby causing one end side portion 314 to move more along the guide rod P than the other end side portion 314. It is possible to ensure the transition to the form shown in FIG.

Two long holes 314a are formed in parallel in each end side portion 314, and two protruding pins 311a are protruded from one side and the other side of the main body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. By ensuring the strength of the connection between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the main body portion 311 when the displacement member 310 is slid and displaced in the vertical direction.

Stopper surfaces 311b and 314b are formed on the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, respectively. 27(b), when the displacement at one end side portion 314 precedes the displacement at the other end side portion 314, the displacement difference exceeds the specified amount, as shown in FIG. 27(c). ), the stopper surfaces 311b and 314b can be brought into contact with each other to regulate. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress breakage of the projecting pin 311a.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided for each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are driven (double-sided drive). In comparison with the structure driven by the drive motor 341 (single-sided drive), the shared load of the drive motor 341 can be reduced, and the size of the displacement member 310 can be increased or the displacement speed of the displacement member 310 can be increased accordingly. can be planned.

On the other hand, in such a double-sided drive structure, it is impossible to completely synchronize the driving on the side of the one side member 320L and the driving on the side of the other side member 320R, and deviation is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movable mechanism (the structure in which the end side portion 314 and the first rack 315 are relatively displaceable with respect to the body portion 311) is provided on one side and the other side of the body portion 311 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in two places. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the driving on the side of the one-side member 320L and the driving on the side of the other-side member 320R, the movable mechanism positioned on the side of the one-side member 320L of the two movable mechanisms formed at two locations is used. The mechanism is deformed in different forms (protruding pin 311a can be displaced within slot 314a.

Therefore, deviations on the one side and the other side can be effectively absorbed by interlocking the movable mechanisms on the one side and the other side. As a result, the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 310 can be suppressed.

Next, a method of assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in which the other side member 320L is viewed from the rear. 28, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 28, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 by attaching the drive motor 341 to the front of the intermediate base 332 and mounting the gear shafts 332c to 332g on the rear of the intermediate base 332. After mounting the gears 362a to 362e, the crank gear 363 to the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 to the gear shaft 332i (see FIG. 18 for the gear shafts 332c to 332i), the second rack 364 is inserted into the rack groove. The eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 is inserted through 364b, and the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365 is meshed with the eccentric pin 363a.

Next, after the roller 367 is placed on the rear surface of the intermediate base 322 in such a direction that the flange portion 367a is brought into contact with it, the urging spring 366 is placed. The biasing spring 366 is placed in a bent posture while engaging the other end with an engaging portion formed at the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332 . At this stage, one end of the biasing spring 366 is not locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, and is held between the roller 367 and part of the gear train (gears 362a, 362b). be.

In this case, the biasing spring 366 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so that it can be stably held in a bent posture. In this case, a part of the gear train (gears 362a and 362b) is also used as a part for holding the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture, so a wall portion for holding the biasing spring 366 is not provided. It is possible to dispense with the need to provide them, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 332 (the state shown in FIG. 28) in this way, the front of the rear base 331 is faced to the rear of the intermediate base 332, and both are fastened and fixed. Finally, one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c of the rear base 331 . This completes the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and intermediate base 332 .

The operation of locking one end of the biasing spring 366 to the locking portion of the second rack 364 uses, for example, a jig having a claw-shaped tip. Specifically, one end of the urging spring 366 is locked (held) by the tip of a jig inserted from the first opening 331c of the rear base 331, and the urging spring 366 is elastically deformed (extended) while the second rack is moved. 364 is locked.

Here, when the biasing spring 366 is arranged in a bent posture as in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily secure the installation space while maintaining the bent posture of the biasing spring 366. This is difficult, and a phenomenon occurs in which the urging spring 366 is repelled (jumped by its own elastic recovery force) during the assembly process. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 28 (that is, before the rear base 331 is covered on the rear side of the intermediate base 332), when one end of the biasing spring 366 is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364, hold down the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 with one hand so that the biasing spring 366 remains bent and the second rack 364 does not fall off, while holding the rear base 331 in the middle with the other hand. It is necessary to cover the base 332, which is complicated.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first opening 331 c is formed in a portion of the rear base 331 (the region including one end of the biasing spring 366 ), so that the rear base 331 is positioned on the rear surface of the intermediate base 332 . After covering, one end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c. That is, by covering the back base 331 first, the back base 331 is arranged to face the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 (that is, the back base 331 is arranged to face the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364). 364 can be held down), and it is possible to suppress the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of connecting one end of the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

In addition, by forming the first opening 331c in the rear base 331 in this way, not only can the workability of the assembly work (the work of attaching the biasing spring 366) be improved, but also the biasing spring 366 can reduce the sliding resistance when elastically deforming (stretching). That is, as described above, the first opening 331c is formed in a region overlapping the biasing spring 366 when the rear base 331 is viewed from the rear, thereby suppressing the sliding between the biasing spring 366 and the rear base 331. can reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing spring 366 from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the second rack 364 . Further, even when the biasing spring 366 is formed as a metal coil spring and the rear base 331 is formed of a resin material, the first opening 331c is formed so that the biasing spring 366 Abrasion of the back base 331 due to sliding can be suppressed, and as a result, it is possible to suppress dust generated due to abrasion from entering mechanical moving parts and electronic devices such as sensor devices and giving adverse effects.

Further, in the rear base 331, not only the first opening 331c corresponding to one end side of the biasing spring 366 but also the second opening 331d corresponding to the other end side of the biasing spring 366 are formed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sliding resistance and suppress wear as described above.

In this case, the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d are formed linearly (that is, only in the area corresponding to the linear portion of the urging spring 366). Therefore, it is possible to leave the plate surface (opposing member facing the biasing spring 366 ) at the bent portion of the biasing spring 366 . Therefore, while maximizing the formation area of the opening, while maximally securing the effect of reducing sliding resistance and suppressing wear, the opposing member is provided at a location necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing spring 366 . can be placed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 41, the detailed configuration of the ring forming unit 400 will be described.

29 is a front view of the ring forming unit 400, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the ring forming unit 400. FIG. 29 and 30 illustrate a state in which the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the ring forming unit 400 is composed of one side ring unit 410L and the other side ring unit 410R, which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A pair of upper and lower annular segments 440L1, 440L2, 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged in the units 410L and 410R, respectively. The ring forming unit 400 operates the ring units 410L and 410R to move the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position shown in FIG. forming position), and forms a ring shape at the ring forming position (see FIGS. 39 to 41).

Here, the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R have a slight difference in shape, but the parts exhibiting technical functions are bilaterally symmetrical (center symmetrical with respect to an imaginary plane located at ), and the configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, the other side ring unit 410R will be described as a representative example, and the one side ring unit 410L will be described. are omitted. The positioning mechanism will be described later with reference to FIG.

31 is a front view of the other ring unit 410R, and FIG. 32 is a rear view of the other ring unit 410R. Note that FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate the state in which the split ring members 440L1 and 440L2 are arranged at the ring forming position.

33 is an exploded front perspective view of the other side annular unit 410R viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the other side annular unit 410R viewed from the back. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the annular unit 410R; Note that FIGS. 33 and 34 correspond to the state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 34, the other annular unit 410R includes a rear base 420, a drive mechanism 430 provided on the rear base 420, and an annular segment 440R1 driven by the drive mechanism 430. , 440R2, an attitude defining member 450 that defines the attitudes of the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2, a suspension mechanism 460 that suspends and supports the upper part of the attitude defining member 450 from the rear base 420, and the attitude defining member 450. It mainly includes a lower end guide mechanism 470 that guides the lower end and a cover body 480 that covers the rear base 420 . Now, with reference to FIG. 35, the rear base 420 will be described.

35 is a front perspective view of the rear base 420. FIG. As shown in FIG. 35, the rear base 420 includes a body portion that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front, an upper projecting portion that projects sideways from the upper end of the body portion, and a portion extending from the upper projecting portion. It is formed in a generally inverted F shape when viewed from the front, with a lower protruding portion that protrudes sideways from the main body portion at a position that is also downward.

The rear base 420 has a motor shaft insertion window 421 formed in its main body. are projected respectively. The motor shaft insertion window 421 is an opening for connecting the drive shaft of the drive motor 431 attached to the rear surface of the rear base 420 to the gear 361 of the drive mechanism on the front side of the rear base 420 .

The upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are respectively inserted into the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d (see FIG. 36) of the third rack 433 of the drive mechanism to guide the linear motion of the third rack 433. is a shaft-shaped body with a circular cross section. The diameters of the upper rack shaft 462a and the lower rack shaft 462b are set equal to or slightly smaller than the groove widths of the upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d of the third rack.

The gear shaft 423 is a shaft-shaped body having a circular cross section for rotatably supporting a transmission gear 434 (see FIG. 36) of the drive mechanism. It is a cylindrical body with an annular cross section for rotatably supporting the rotation bases 435a and 436a (see FIG. 36) of the body 435 and the lower arm body 436, respectively.

On the front surface of the rear base 420, a cover body 480 is provided (fixed by fastening) in areas corresponding to the upper rack shaft 422a, the gear shaft 423, and the upper and lower arm shafts 425, 426. The upper end side of the third rack 433, the transmission gear 434, and the upper and lower arm bodies 435, 436 (rotational bases 435a, 436a) are housed between them (see FIG. 31).

A suspension mechanism 460 is arranged (fixed by fastening) on the upper protruding portion of the rear base 420, and a lower end guide mechanism 470 is arranged on the lower end and the lower protruding portion of the main body portion of the rear base 420 ( fastening and fixing) (see FIGS. 31 to 33 for all). As will be described later, the posture regulating member 450 is suspended from the front (front) side of the rear base 420 via a suspension mechanism 460 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The lower end guide mechanism 470 restricts the rattling (rocking) in the front-rear direction when sliding to the right. The lower end side of the third rack 433 and the gear 432 are accommodated between the lower end guide mechanism 470 and the rear base 420 (see FIG. 31).

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. The drive mechanism 430 is a mechanism that displaces the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 by the driving force of the drive motor 431, and is fixed to the drive motor 431 attached to the rear surface of the rear base 420 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 431. a gear 432 driven by the gear 432, a third rack 433 linearly moved by the gear 432, a transmission gear 434 rotationally driven by the linear movement of the third rack 433, and a transmission gear 434 driven by the transmission gear 434 to rotate An upper arm body 435 and a lower arm body 436 are formed. Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the detailed configuration and operation of drive mechanism 430 will be described.

FIG. 36(a) is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. is a front view of the drive mechanism 430 in a state in which a position for arranging the . It should be noted that illustration of the drive motor 431 is omitted in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 36(a) and 36(b), the third rack 433 is formed in a vertically long flat plate shape when viewed from the front. 433d. The upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b are portions formed as racks by tooth cutting the side surfaces of the upper end side and the lower end side of the flat plate-like body (the left side surface in FIG. 36(a)). A transmission gear 434 is meshed with the rack portion 433b on the upper end side, and a gear 432 is meshed with the rack portion 433a on the lower end side.

The upper guide groove 433c and the lower guide groove 433d are openings through which the upper rack shaft 422a and the lower rack shaft 422b (see FIG. 35) of the rear base 420 are respectively inserted, and are adjacent to the upper rack portion 433a and the lower rack portion 433b, respectively. 36(a), and extends linearly in the vertical direction (that is, the longitudinal direction of the plate-like body (third rack 433), the vertical direction in FIG. 36(a)) in parallel with the tooth flanks.

The upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed as elongated flat bodies, with rotary bases 435a and 436a on the proximal end side of the elongated bodies, and rotary connecting parts 435b and 436b on the distal end side of the elongated bodies. are respectively formed.

The rotary bases 435a and 436a are provided with circular shaft holes in a front view for being rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420, respectively. A gear is engraved. That is, the rotation bases 435a and 436a are formed as gears rotatably supported by the upper arm shaft 425 and the lower arm shaft 426 of the rear base 420. As shown in FIG. The gear on the rotation base 435a of the upper arm 435 meshes with the gear on the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436, and the gear on the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436 meshes with the transmission gear 434.

The rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b are portions that are connected to the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2, and as will be described later, are connected to the divided annular bodies via arm connection grooves 451 (see FIG. 37) of the posture determining member 450. 440R1 and 440R2 are rotatably connected to rotary connecting portions 441 (see FIG. 34) projecting from the rear surfaces of the 440R1 and 440R2.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), when the drive mechanism 430 is in a state in which the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions, the third rack 433 is at the lowest position (see FIG. 36A) in the movable range. 36), and the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are positioned so that their longitudinal directions are along the vertical direction (that is, on the extension line of the imaginary line along the longitudinal direction of each arm body 435, 436). ) in which the arm shafts 425 and 426 of the rear base 420 are positioned.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm 435 can be erected until it assumes a vertical posture in a state in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted positions. As will be described later, the split ring body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 431 can be suppressed.

From the state shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the gear 432 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise (left) in FIG. 36 ) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 , the rotation of the gear 432 causes the third rack 433 to rotate. is displaced (raised) upward (upward in FIG. 36(a)), and the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (leftward) in FIG. 36(a).

When the transmission gear 434 is rotated counterclockwise (left) in FIG. 36(a), the rotation of the transmission gear 434 causes the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 to rotate clockwise (right) in FIG. 36(a). At the same time, the rotation of the rotation base 436a of the lower arm 436 causes the rotation base 435a of the upper arm 435 to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. As a result, the tip side of the upper arm body 435 (rotational connection portion 435b) is lowered, while the tip side of the lower arm body 436 (rotational connection portion 436b) is raised, as shown in FIG. 36(b). A posture is formed in which the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming position.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), in a state in which the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the annular ring forming position, the third rack 433 is positioned at the lowest position in the movable range (lower side in FIG. 36). ). When the gear 432 is rotated in the opposite direction (clockwise (right) in FIG. 36) by the driving force of the drive motor 431 from this state, the rotation of the gear 432 is transmitted via the third rack 433 and the transmission gear 434, The force is transmitted to the rotation base portion 436a of the lower arm body 436 and the rotation base portion 435a of the upper arm body 435 by an action opposite to the action described above. As a result, the tip side (rotational connection portion 435b) of the upper arm body 435 is raised, while the tip side (rotational connection portion 436b) of the lower arm body 436 is lowered, as shown in FIG. A posture is formed in which the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position.

According to this embodiment, the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 are formed with rotation bases 435a and 436a on their base end sides, and the gears of the rotation bases 435a and 436a are meshed with each other. Since it is rotatably supported by the rear base 420 in this state, the rotation of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be synchronized. As a result, as will be described later, the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2 disposed on the distal end sides of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 can be brought into contact with each other with high precision at the ring forming position (FIG. 31). and FIG. 32). Further, when the rotation base 436a of the lower arm body 436 is rotationally driven, the upper arm body 435 can also be driven and rotated via the engagement of the rotation bases 435a and 436a. Therefore, two arms (upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436) can be rotationally driven by one drive motor 431, and there is no need to provide a drive source for each arm, thereby reducing part costs and space efficiency. can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. The posture regulating member 450 is a member for regulating the postures of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2. That is, when the annular segments R1 and 440R2 are displaced between the retracted position and the annular ring forming position, the annular segments R1 and 440R2 are slid in the left-right direction along with the displacement of the annular segments R1 and 440R2. The posture of the bodies 440R1 and 440R2 is maintained in a non-rotating state (that is, displaced between the retracted position and the annulus forming position while maintaining the parallel posture). Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the detailed configuration of the posture regulating member 450 will be described.

37 is a front perspective view of the posture regulating member 450. FIG. Note that FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the upper end of the posture determining member 450 is suspended by the suspension mechanism 460 and the lower end of the posture determining member 450 is guided by the lower end guide mechanism 470 .

As shown in FIG. 37, the posture regulating member 450 is a front face interposed between the distal end sides (rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2. It is a vertically elongated plate-like member (see FIGS. 31 and 32), and two sets of three grooves, namely, an arm connecting groove 451 and a pair of posture regulating grooves 452 located across the arm connecting groove 451, are vertically arranged. A set is formed.

The arm connection groove 451 is for connecting the rotation connection portions 435a and 436 (see FIG. 36) of the upper arm body 435 and the lower arm body 436 and the rotation connection portions 441 (see FIG. 34) of the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2. , which extends linearly along the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the sliding direction of the posture regulating member 450 by the suspension mechanism 460, the vertical direction in FIG. 37). The posture regulating groove 452 is an opening through which the sliding shaft 442 (see FIG. 34) of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 is inserted through the collar C, and extends linearly in the vertical direction parallel to the arm connecting shaft 451. will be extended to

The groove width of the arm connecting shaft 451 is such that the connecting portion between the rotary connecting portions 435a and 436 of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 and the rotary connecting portion 441 of the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 can rotate within the groove and along the groove. The groove width of the attitude regulating groove 452 is set to a dimension that allows the sliding shaft 442 (collar C) of the annular segments 440R1 and 440R2 to slide along the groove. .

That is, the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 are rotatably connected to the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 via the arm connecting shaft 451, while the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 slide into the attitude regulation groove 452. By inserting the driving shaft 442 , the position determining member 450 is held in a state in which it is made non-rotatable but allowed to slide in the vertical direction. Therefore, as will be described later, when the upper and lower arms 435 and 436 are rotated, the posture regulating member 450 is slid in the left-right direction, and the divided annular members 440R1 and 440R2 maintain their postures in a parallel state. 39 to 41).

The suspension mechanism 460 includes a base portion 461 which is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate in a front view and which is arranged (fixed by fastening) on the overhanging portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35) of the rear base 420, and the base portion 461 is arranged on the base portion 461. and a brass guide rod 462 formed as a rod-shaped body with a circular cross section. The guide rod 462 is arranged in a posture along the left-right direction with the base portion 461 arranged on the rear base 420 . A cylindrical slider portion 453 is provided at the upper end of the posture regulating member 450 , and a guide rod 462 is inserted through the slider portion 453 . As a result, the posture regulating member 450 is suspended from the rear base 420 via the suspension mechanism 460 so as to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The lower end guide mechanism 460 is a member that is arranged (fixed by fastening) at the lower end of the body portion of the rear base 420 and the lower protruding portion (see FIGS. 31 and 35). A guide groove 471 is formed in the portion where it is provided. The guide groove 471 displaces the lower end of the posture determining member 450 in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the lower end of the posture determining member 450 is displaced when the posture determining member 450 is rotated around the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460). It is a part for regulating within a predetermined range, and is formed as a recessed groove with a substantially U-shaped cross section that is open at the top (upper side in FIG. 37) and extends along the direction parallel to the guide rod 462 .

The width of the guide groove 471 is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the lower end of the posture determining member 450, and the guide groove 471 is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the lower end of the posture determining member 450 suspended and supported by the suspension mechanism 460. On the other hand, the inner side surfaces of the guide grooves 471 facing each other are arranged at positions facing each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. That is, the lower end of the posture regulating member 450 is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471, and the lower end of the posture regulating member 450 does not come into contact with the inner surface of the guide groove 471 when the posture regulating member 450 is in a stable state. be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the posture regulating member 450 is supported by the rear base 420 by suspending the upper end side through the suspension mechanism 460, and the lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Therefore, the resistance when the posture regulating member 450 is slid in the lateral direction with respect to the rear base 420 is suppressed, and the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 displaces the split ring bodies 440R1 and 440R2 (Fig. 39 to 41) can be performed smoothly.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on the rear base 420 and the pair of guide shafts guide the upper and lower ends of the posture regulating member 450, there are two sliding portions, which increases the frictional resistance. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since only one sliding portion can be provided, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the attitude determining member 450 is slidably displaced. Further, according to the present embodiment, the posture determining member 450 rotates about the guide rod 462 of the suspension mechanism 460 so that the lower end side of the posture determining member 450 is aligned with the inner surface of the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470. Even if it abuts, since it is suspended and supported, the posture regulating member 450 can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the posture regulating member 450 can be returned to a state in which its lower end side is loosely fitted in the guide groove 471 of the lower end guide mechanism 470 . Therefore, from this point as well, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the posture determining member 450 is slidably displaced.

Returning to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, description will be made. A rotary connecting portion 441 and a sliding shaft 442 are projected from the rear surface of the ring segments 440R1 and 440R2. As described above, the rotary connecting portion 441 is connected to the rotary connecting portions 435b and 436b of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 via the arm connecting shaft 441 of the posture determining member 450, and the sliding shaft 442 is connected to the collar. It is inserted through the posture regulating groove 452 of the posture regulating member 450 via C.

As a result, the annular divisions 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced vertically relative to the attitude determining member 450 as the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 rotate, and slide horizontally together with the attitude determining member 450. As a result, while maintaining the parallel posture, the circular segments 440L1 and 440L2 and the circular segment are displaced along an arc-shaped locus between the retracted position and the ring formation position. The bodies 440R1 and 440R2 abut each other to form an annular shape (see FIG. 41).

In this case, a positioning mechanism is formed on each of the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2, thereby properly contacting the ones displaced along the arc-shaped trajectory and preventing backlash after contact. It can suppress sticking and wobbling. Now, with reference to FIG. 38, the positioning mechanism formed on the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 will be described.

The positioning mechanisms are formed on the contact surfaces of the divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2. The positioning mechanism formed on the contact surface will be described as a representative example, and the explanation of the positioning mechanisms formed on other contact surfaces will be omitted.

38(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the segmented ring 440L1 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIa in FIG. 29, and FIG. 38(b) is a portion of the segmented ring 440R1 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIIb in FIG. 38(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the split ring body 440L1 taken along line XXXVIIIc-XXXVIIIc of FIG. 38(a), and FIG. 38(d) is an enlarged side view of FIG. 38(b). FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an annular segment 440R1 taken along line XXXVIIId-XXXVIIId;

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(d), the positioning mechanism includes positioning projections 491 protruding from the contact surface (side surface) of the annular segment 440R1 and receiving the positioning projections 491. Possible recesses include a positioning recess 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 440L1, an engaging protrusion 492a projecting from the recessed bottom surface of the positioning recess 492, and an engaging protrusion 492a. An engaging concave portion 491a is provided in the projecting end surface of the positioning convex portion 491 as a concave portion that can receive the portion 492a.

As shown in FIGS. 38(b) and 38(d), the positioning projections 491 are formed on the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. surface) and front and rear side surfaces (the right and left surfaces in FIG. 38(b)) are formed as tapered surfaces that are inclined in the direction of narrowing the facing distance toward the projecting tip. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 38(a), the positioning recess 492 has a direction in which the distance between the upper and lower side surfaces (the upper surface and the lower surface in FIG. 38(a)) narrows toward the bottom surface of the recess. is formed as a tapered surface that inclines to As a result, even if there is a positional deviation between the divided annular body 440L1 and the divided annular body 440R1, the positioning protrusion 491 is aligned with the positioning recess 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. Make it easier to accept.

The length of extension of the positioning recess 492 (vertical length in FIG. 38(a)) is longer than the length of extension of the positioning protrusion 491 (length in the vertical direction in FIG. 38(b)). (d)), the direction in which they extend is the direction corresponding to the arc-shaped trajectory of the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 (that is, the direction along the movement trajectory when the contact surface is viewed from the front). . As a result, when the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 approach each other along an arc-shaped trajectory and their contact surfaces contact each other, one of the annular segmented bodies 440L1 and 440R1 precedes the other. Even if there is a positional deviation between them, the positioning protrusion 491 can be easily received in the positioning recess 492 in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other.

The engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) at the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby performing final positioning. The protrusion height of the engaging protrusion 492a is set smaller than the recess depth of the positioning recess 492, and the recess depth of the engaging recess 491a is the same as that of the positioning protrusion 491. It is set to a dimension smaller than the projection height.

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively rough positioning accuracy (relatively wide permissible range of positional deviation) can be performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, the projecting tip of the positioning projection 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of , by engaging the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a with each other, the positioning accuracy is improved, the annular shape is properly formed, and rattling after the annular shape is formed is reduced. It is possible to perform two-stage positioning that can reliably suppress wobble.

The operation of the annular ring forming unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG.

39(a) and 39(b) are a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in a state where the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the retracted position, and FIG. 40(a) and FIG. 40(b) is a front view and rear view of the ring forming unit 400 in which the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged between the retracted position and the ring forming position, and FIG. 41(b) is a front view and a rear view of the ring forming unit 400 with the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 arranged at the ring forming positions.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), at the retracted position, the split ring members 440L1 to 440R2 are most distant from each other. That is, by maximizing the facing distance between the posture determining members 450 of the one-side annular unit 410L and the other-side annular unit 410R (that is, each posture determining member 450 is arranged at the most retracted position in the left-right direction). ), the distance between the annular segments 440L1, 440L2 and the annular segments 440R1, 440R2 facing each other in the horizontal direction is maximized. In addition, by arranging the divided annular bodies 440L1 to 440R2 at the upper end or the lower end of each posture regulating member 450, the distance between the divided annular bodies 440L1 and 440R1 and the divided annular bodies 440L2 and 440R2 in the vertical direction can be increased. is maximized.

From this state, when the drive mechanism 430 is operated to rotate the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436 (see FIG. 36), each posture regulating member 450 moves left and right along with the rotation of the upper and lower arm bodies 435 and 436. By moving forward, the divided annular bodies 440L1 and 440L2 and the divided annular bodies 440R1 and 440R2 are displaced in the direction of narrowing the distance between them facing each other in the left-right direction. The bodies 440L1 to 440R2 are lowered or raised, respectively, and the gaps between the divided annular bodies 440L1, 440R1 and the divided annular bodies 440L2, 440R2 in the vertical direction are narrowed, and the state shown in FIG. 40 is formed.

When the operation of the drive mechanism 430 is further advanced from the state shown in FIG. 40, each posture defining member 450 is arranged at the most advanced position in the horizontal direction along with the rotation of the upper and lower arms 435 and 436. The divided annular bodies 440L1, 440L2 and the divided annular bodies 440R1, 440R2 are displaced in the left-right direction to a position where the contact surfaces of the divided annular bodies 440L1, 440R1 and 440L2, 440R2 are vertically displaced (raised or lowered) to a position where their contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other. As a result, as shown in FIG. 41, the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions to form a ring shape.

As described above, according to the ring forming unit 400, the posture determining member 450 can be slid in the horizontal direction by the suspension mechanism 460, and the ring divisions 440L1 to 440L1 through the grooves 451, 452 of the posture determining member 450 Due to the sliding displacement of 440R2 in the vertical direction, the postures of the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are maintained constant (parallel) and displaced along arc-shaped trajectories to form an annular shape at the annular forming position.

Here, as a mechanism for displacing each of the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2, a parallel link mechanism (a mechanism comprising a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and of equal length) can also be used. It is possible to form a toric shape at the forming location. For example, focusing on the split ring body R1, the base ends of the first and second arms are rotatably connected to the rear base 420, and the tip sides of the first and second arms are connected to the split ring body 440R1. By rotatably connecting and rotating these first and second arms, it is possible to displace the split ring body 440R1 while maintaining it in a fixed posture. Therefore, by providing such a mechanism for each of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2, the ring can be formed at the ring forming position.

However, in such a structure using a parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm interfere with each other, so that it is not possible to secure a sufficient range of motion for the annular divisions 440L1 to 440R2. For example, focusing on the split ring body 440R1, in this embodiment, the upper arm body 435 is tilted in the horizontal direction at the ring formation position (see FIGS. 36(b) and 41), and the upper arm body is tilted at the retracted position. Similarly, in the parallel link mechanism, the first arm and the second arm are tilted horizontally at the ring formation position, and the first arm and the second arm are tilted at the retracted position. to stand up vertically. In this case, in the parallel link mechanism, when raising and lowering the first arm and the second arm in the retracted position, one arm interferes with the base end side of the other arm, so it is not possible to stand up in a vertical posture. . As a result, the annular segment 440R1 cannot be sufficiently retracted rearward.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the posture determining member 450 is arranged so as to be slidable in the lateral direction with respect to the rear base 420, and the rotation of the split ring member 440R1 with respect to the posture determining member 450 is restricted. The base end side of the upper arm body 435 is connected to the rear base 420 and the tip end side is rotatably connected to the annular split body 440R1. The ring segment 440R1 is displaced while maintaining a fixed posture. That is, unlike the parallel link mechanism, two arms are not required, and only one arm (upper arm body 435) can be used. As a result, the arms do not interfere with each other, so that the upper arm body 435 can be erected until it assumes a vertical posture (see FIG. 36(a)), and the annular divided body 440R1 can be sufficiently retracted rearward. can be done.

Further, for example, in the parallel link mechanism, since the first arm and the second arm are inclined at the retracted position, the weight of the annular segment 440R1 moves the first arm and the second arm in the inclination direction (that is, direction to form an annulus forming position). Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 431 needs to support the weight of the split ring R1, which increases energy consumption.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm body 435 can be vertically erected at the retracted position, so that the upper arm body 435 can support the weight of the divided annular body 440R1. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 431 required to support the weight of the annular divided body 440R1 (hold it at the retracted position) can be reduced or eliminated, and energy consumption can be reduced.

When the ring divisions 440L1 to 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions shown in FIG. 41, positioning is performed by the positioning mechanism as described above (see FIG. 38).

Specifically, a positioning projection 491 protrudes from the contact surface of the divided annular body 440R1, and a positioning recess 492 is formed from the contact surface of the divided annular body 440L1. 492 (vertical dimension in FIG. 38(a)) is set to be larger than the extended length of the positioning projection 491 (vertical dimension in FIG. 38(b)). When 440L1 and 440R1 are displaced toward the annulus forming position and the contact surfaces come closer to each other, the positioning convex portion 491 is received (engaged) in the positioning concave portion 492 for positioning. can.

That is, since the abutment surfaces of the ring divisions 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other along an arc-shaped (circular motion) trajectory, a concave shape and a convex shape of the same size are combined with a convex shape. cannot be combined. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the positioning recess 492 extends as an elongated hole longer than the positioning protrusion 491 along its trajectory. 491 can be received (engaged).

On the other hand, positioning only by the engagement of the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492 does not allow the positioning to be performed in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the positioning concave portion 492 (left and right direction in FIG. 38(a), FIG. 41(a) vertical direction). That is, even when the annular divisions 440L1 and 440R1 are brought close to each other due to the arc-shaped restriction, the positioning recess 492 can receive the positioning protrusion 491, so that the positioning recess 492 is longer than the extension length of the positioning protrusion 491. Since the extending length of the positioning recess 492 is increased, the positioning protrusion 491 cannot be engaged in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492 . Therefore, it is not possible to position the annular divided bodies 440L1 and 440R1 in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492, which causes rattling and wobble.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is formed with the engaging concave portion 491a, and the positioning concave portion 492 is formed with the engaging convex portion 492a. When arranged in the position, the engagement recess 491a and the engagement projection 492a can be engaged with each other, and as a result, the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 can be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess 492 as well. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of rattling and wobbling.

It is also possible to omit the positioning protrusion 491 and the positioning recess 492 and position the annular segments 440L1 and 440R1 only by the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a. However, in this case, it is difficult to receive (engage) the engaging protrusion 492a with the engaging recess 491a due to the elastic deformation of the upper arm body 435 and the dimensional tolerance of the sliding and rotating parts. becomes. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the positioning convex portion 491 is first engaged with the positioning concave portion 492 to perform the first stage of positioning, and then the engaging concave portion 491a is covered as the second stage of positioning. Since the engaging projections 492a are engaged, the positioning of the second stage (engagement of the engaging projections 492a with the engaging recesses 491a) can be reliably performed, and the above-described annular divisions 440L1 and 440R1 can be engaged. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of backlash and wobble.

That is, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning (first stage positioning), the protruding tip of the positioning protrusion 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of contacting, by engaging the engaging concave portion 491a and the engaging convex portion 492a (positioning of the second stage), the positioning accuracy is improved and the annular shape is properly formed. It is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobbling after forming the ring shape.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a second embodiment will be described. 42(a) and 42(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in the second embodiment. 42(c) and 42(d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state where relative displacement is formed by the ball joint mechanism.

42(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 42(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b). Also, FIGS. 42(c) and 42(d) correspond to enlarged portions of FIGS. 42(a) and 42(b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the projecting pin 311a of the body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 to connect the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the second embodiment are connected by a ball joint 2610 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 42( a ) to 42 ( d ), in the displacement member 2310 according to the second embodiment, between the rear surface of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 2314 . are connected by a pair of upper and lower ball joints 2610 . The ball joint 2610 is formed by connecting spheres (ball portions) at both ends with a rod-shaped body, and by bringing the spheres at both ends into spherical contact with socket portions formed in the main body portion 2311 and the end side portions 2314 respectively, the main body The portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable in any direction.

The socket portions of the main body portion 2311 and the end side portions 2314 are covers in which hemispherical spherical surfaces are recessed in the portions where the hemispherical spherical surfaces are recessed in the back surface of the main body portion 2311 and the front surface of the end side portions 2314. By covering bodies 2311d and 2314d, they are formed by their spherical surfaces. Also, the cover bodies 2311a and 2314a are tapered to avoid interference with the rod-shaped body of the ball joint 2610. As shown in FIG.

Thus, in this embodiment, the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are connected via the ball joint mechanism, so that they can be smoothly displaced relative to each other in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 2310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on the one side and the other side). If there is a difference in the sliding resistance in the case where there is a difference in the sliding resistance, or if there is a variation in the driving force between the drive motors 341 on one side and the other side), even if there is a gap between the two, the gap is corrected by the ball joint mechanism. It can be absorbed by the relative displacement of the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 (see FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 2310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 2310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in the displacement member 2310 according to the present embodiment, biasing springs 2620 are interposed between the back surfaces of the main body portion 2311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 2314 . The biasing spring 2620 is formed as a coil spring and is interposed between the body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in an elastically compressed and deformed state. Therefore, the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 2620 acts as a force to keep the facing distance between the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 constant.

In this way, with the urging spring 2620 interposed, when the main body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 are relatively displaced via the ball joint mechanism in order to absorb the deviation described above, the main body portions 2311 and the end side portion 2314 can be returned to the initial position by the biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the biasing spring 2620 .

The urging spring 2620 is arranged with the ball joint 2620 (rod-shaped body) inserted through its inner periphery. As a result, the ball joint 2610 can also serve as a mechanism for holding the urging spring 2620 so that it does not fall off, eliminating the need to provide a separate holding mechanism, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the cost of parts. and can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a third embodiment will be described. 43(a) and 43(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 3310 in the third embodiment. 43(c) and 43(d) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the displacement member 2310 in a state in which the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is elastically deformed.

43(a) corresponds to the cross section taken along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 11(b), and FIG. 43(b) corresponds to the cross section taken along line XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 11(b). Moreover, FIG.43(c) and FIG.43(d) correspond to the enlarged part of FIG.43(a) and FIG.43(b), respectively.

In the first embodiment, the projecting pin 311a of the body portion 311 is inserted into the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314 to connect the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 so as to be relatively displaceable. The body portion 2311 and the end side portion 2314 in the third embodiment are connected by a rubber-like elastic body 3630 so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 43( a ) and 43 ( b ), in the displacement member 3310 according to the third embodiment, between the rear surface of the main body portion 3311 on one side and the other longitudinal direction side and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 . are connected by a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 . The rubber-like elastic body 3630 is formed in a columnar shape from an elastomer, and elastically deforms itself to connect the main body part 2311 and the end side part 2314 in a state in which relative rotation is possible in an arbitrary direction. In addition, the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is disposed in a posture in which the axial direction thereof is perpendicular to the rear surface of the main body portion 3311 and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 are connected via the rubber-like elastic body 3630, so that they can be relatively displaced smoothly in any direction. Therefore, when the displacement member 3310 is moved up and down, for example, the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L is different from the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R (for example, the slider S on the one side and the other side). If there is a difference in sliding resistance between the two drive motors 341, or if there is a difference in the driving force between the drive motors 341 on the one side and the other side), even if there is a deviation between them, the deviation is corrected by the rubber-like elastic body The elastic deformation of the 3630 itself displaces the body portion 3311 and the end portion 3314 relative to each other, thereby absorbing the deformation (see FIG. 27). As a result, the displacement member 3310 can be stably displaced, and excessive load on each drive motor 341 and stopping of the displacement member 3310 can be suppressed.

In addition, when the main body portion 3311 and the end side portions 3314 are relatively displaced by the elastic deformation of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 in order to absorb the deviation described above, the main body portion 3311 and the end side portions 3314 are elastically deformed. The elastic recovery force of the body 3630 allows it to return to its initial position.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rubber-like elastic body 3630 is made of elastomer, the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 can be converged at an early stage by utilizing the viscosity characteristics (damping effect) of the elastomer. can be done. As a result, it is possible to suppress the influence of the vibration of the main body portion 3311 and the end side portion 3314 from causing a difference between the guidance or drive by the one side member 320L and the guidance or drive by the other side member 320R. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of misalignment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a fourth embodiment will be described. 44(a) is a rear view of the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 44(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 4310 taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of FIG. 44(a).

In the first embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided for each of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R, and both sides of the displacement member 310 in the longitudinal direction are driven (double-sided drive). However, in the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 is provided only for the one side member 320L (that is, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted), and only one longitudinal side of the displacement member 4310 is driven. (single-sided drive). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In addition, the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment has a movable mechanism on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) (the end side portion 314, the 4314 to be relatively displaceable) and the configuration of the first rack 4315, and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b), the displacement member 4310 in the fourth embodiment is a projection projecting from the rear surface of the main body portion 4311 on the other longitudinal direction side (left side in FIG. 44(a)). The number of protrusions of the setting pin 311a is one. The arrangement position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 44(a)) of the projecting pin 311a on the other longitudinal side is the pair of upper and lower pins arranged on the one longitudinal side (the right side in FIG. 44(a)). It is the intermediate position of the projecting pin 311a.

On the other hand, an end side portion 4314 connected to the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) of the body portion 4311 is provided with a shaft support hole 4314a only at one location. The shaft support hole 4314a is a circular hole in a front view for receiving the protruding pin 311a on the other longitudinal side of the body portion 4311, and its inner diameter is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion of the collar C. set. Therefore, the projecting pin 311a is rotatably inserted through the collar C into the shaft support hole 4314a.

That is, on one side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 44(a)), as described above, the body portion 311 is displaced (slid) relative to the end side portion 314 along the left-right direction (the long diameter direction of the long hole 314a). On the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 44(a)), only rotation about the protruding pin 311a is allowed as a relative displacement of the main body portion 4311 with respect to the end side portion 4314. be.

In the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R is omitted, so that the first rack 4315 arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44A) becomes the slider holding portion 315 (ie, the rack portion 315a is omitted). As a result, one longitudinal side (the right side in FIG. 44(a)) of the displacement member 4310 is guided along the guide rod P and driven by the one side member 320L (driving motor 431). The other side (the left side in FIG. 44(a)) is only guided along the guide rod P and is not driven by the other side member 320R (driving motor 431).

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, since the displacement member 4310 is formed as a one-side drive that drives only one side in the longitudinal direction, the drive motor 341 of the other side member 320R and its driving force are transmitted to the first rack 4315. A transmission mechanism for this can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down, since it is a one-side drive, the guidance by the one-side member 320L and the guidance by the other-side member 320R are different from the guidance on the driving side and the guidance on the driven side. , and their states are different from each other. Therefore, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows relative displacement of the end side portions 314 and 4314 with respect to the main body portion 4311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 4310 is moved up and down as described above. The deviation cannot be properly absorbed by the movable mechanism.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form different forms of relative displacement (different forms of allowable relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

Specifically, the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 44(a)), which is the driven side, is allowed only to rotate relative to the end side portion 4314 of the body portion 4311, while The movable mechanism on one side (the right side in FIG. 44(a)) allows relative rotation and relative displacement (sliding displacement) with respect to the end side portion 4314 of the main body portion 4311 .

As a result, both movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively. can be effectively absorbed by the displacement member 4310 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 4310 even with one-sided driving, and it is possible to prevent the load on the drive motor 341 from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member 4310 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a fifth embodiment will be described. 45(a) is a rear view of the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 taken along line XLVb-XLVb of FIG. 45(a), FIG. 45(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the displacement member 5310 along line XLVc-XLVc in FIG. 45(a).

In the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, one-side drive is adopted, and a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). structure) are different from each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In addition, the displacement member 5310 in the fifth embodiment has a movable mechanism on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction with respect to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment (the end side portion 3314 can be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 5311). structure) and the configuration of the first rack 3315 on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the left side in FIG. 45(a)), and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 45(a) to 45(b), in the displacement member 5310 according to the fifth embodiment, the back surface and the end side portion 3314 on one side in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 5311 (the right side in FIG. 45(a)) are separated from each other. A pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 are provided between the front surface and the upper and lower rubber-like elastic bodies 3630 to provide a pair of upper and lower rubber-like elastic members 3630 between the rear surface of the main body portion 5311 (left side in FIG. 45A) and the front surface of the end side portion 3314 . They are connected to each other by body 5630 . That is, it is the same as the case of the third embodiment. However, although the rubber-like elastic body 5630 is formed in the same shape as the rubber-like elastic body 3630, the rubber hardness is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630, and the spring constant is high. (difficult to transform).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted, so that the drive motor 341 is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (left side in FIG. 45(a)). A first rack 4315 is formed having only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the driving motor 341 for the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack 4315 can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, since the displacement member 5310 is driven on one side, the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 3314 to be displaced relative to the main body portion 5311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction. The movable mechanism cannot properly absorb the above-described deviation when the is moved up and down.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction form different forms of relative displacement (different forms of allowable relative displacement). Therefore, both of these movable mechanisms can bear a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side.

Specifically, the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 5630 constituting the movable mechanism on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. 45(a)), which is the driven side, is higher than the rubber hardness on the other longitudinal direction side (the left side in FIG. ) right side) is set to a value higher (harder) than the rubber hardness of the rubber-like elastic body 3630 that constitutes the movable mechanism, so that the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction) is made more difficult to deform than the drive side (a constant It is possible to reduce the allowable amount of deformation when an external force is applied.

As a result, both movable mechanisms can assume a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side, respectively. can be effectively absorbed by the displacement member 5310 as a whole. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 5310 even in one-sided driving, and to suppress excessive load on the drive motor 341 and stoppage of the displacement member 5310 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a sixth embodiment will be described. 46(a) and 46(b) are front views of the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment. 46(a) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven upward, and FIG. 46(b) shows a state in which the displacement member 6310 is driven downward. In addition, in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 when viewed from the front (hereinafter referred to as “center of gravity position G”) is schematically illustrated using black circles.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating body 313 has its center of gravity position at the center of rotation was described. It is formed so that the position of the center of gravity can be changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Note that the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment has a rack portion 315a extending from the first rack on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIGS. 46(a) and 46(b)) to the displacement member 310 in the first embodiment. The only differences are that they are omitted and that the position of the center of gravity of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric, and the other configurations are the same. In the following only the different configurations are described.

As shown in FIGS. 46(a) to 46(b), in the displacement member 6310 in the sixth embodiment, the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is set at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating body 6313. . Therefore, by changing the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body 6313, the center-of-gravity position G is eccentric to the left side in front view, for example, as shown in FIG. , it can be decentered to the right in front view. Accordingly, in the displacement member 6310, the position of the center of gravity of the main body portion 311 as a whole can be adjusted (shifted) to one side or the other side in the longitudinal direction.

The rotating body 6313 is circular when viewed from the front and is rotationally symmetrical with its center of rotation as a point of symmetry. Position G is formed eccentrically from the center of rotation. Therefore, in the appearance of the rotating body 6313 , the player can visually recognize that the position of the center of gravity G is positioned at the center of rotation of the rotating body 6313 .

Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the drive motor 341 for the other side member 320R is omitted, and along with this, it is arranged on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the right side in FIG. 46(a)). A first rack (not shown) is formed having only the slider holding portion 315c (that is, the rack portion 315a is omitted).

Therefore, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, the driving motor 341 for the other side member 320R and the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force thereof to the first rack can be omitted, and the parts cost can be reduced accordingly. On the other hand, since it is a one-sided drive, if the movable mechanism (the structure that allows relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the main body portion 6311) is the same on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member 6310 The movable mechanism cannot properly absorb the deviation described above when the robot is moved up and down.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by rotating the rotor 6313 and adjusting the center-of-gravity position G in the left-right direction, the center-of-gravity position of the displacement member 311 as a whole is shifted from the center of the displacement member 311 in the longitudinal direction. It can be biased (moved) to one side or the other (ie drive side or driven side).

Therefore, when the displacement member 6310 is stopped, the rotation body 6313 is rotated to perform an effect, and when the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), the rotation body 6313 is moved to a predetermined rotation position (phase). By disposing the displacement member 311 so that the center of gravity of the displacement member 311 as a whole is eccentric, the weight acting on the movable mechanism on one side in the longitudinal direction and the movable mechanism on the other side in the longitudinal direction can be adjusted, and the deviation described above can be absorbed. A comfortable state can be created.

Here, when the displacement direction (upward or downward) of the displacement member 6310 is different, the effect of gravity is changed, so the required state of each movable mechanism is changed. That is, for example, focusing on the driven side, the state of being guided along the guide rod P changes between when moving up when displaced against gravity and when moving down when displacement is assisted by gravity.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, for example, when the displacement member 6310 is raised, the drive side (longitudinal direction one side, FIG. 46A left side) The center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism of , and when the displacement member 6310 is lowered, the center of gravity position G can be brought close to the movable mechanism on the driven side (the other side in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46(b)). As a result, it is possible to adjust the weight acting on the drive-side movable mechanism and the driven-side movable mechanism according to the displacement direction (upward or downward) of the displacement member 6310, thereby making it easier to absorb the deviation described above. As a result, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member 6310 even if the movable mechanism has the same configuration on one side and the other side in the longitudinal direction, and the driving motor It is possible to prevent the load on 341 from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member 6310 .

The center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 need not be maintained at a fixed position while the displacement member 6310 is displaced (raised or lowered), and the center of gravity position G may be adjusted during the displacement. For example, when starting to drive the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431 and for a predetermined period from the start, the position of the center of gravity G approaches (or separates from) the drive side (one end in the longitudinal direction, left side in FIG. 46(a)). On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member 6310 by the drive motor 431, the position of the center of gravity G is moved toward (or away from) the driven side (the other end in the longitudinal direction, the right side in FIG. 46(a)). ) morphology is exemplified.

Further, the position of the center of gravity G to be adjusted by rotating the rotating body 6313 is not limited to the positions (left or right in front view) shown in FIGS. ) can be set.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 and 48 are front views of a vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment. 47 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 48 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position.

1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the movable mechanism (the structure which can relatively displace the end side part 314 with respect to the main-body part 311) was always effective, but in 7th Embodiment, a movable mechanism can be fixed. (relative displacement of the end side portion 314 with respect to the body portion 311 can be regulated). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, in the vertical slide unit 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD are arranged in front of the front bases 333 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD fix the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position, and the main body It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and regulating mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are arranged on one side and the other in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, Restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD are provided on one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side of displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position.

Note that the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD arranged at these four locations have substantially the same configuration except that they are arranged in symmetrical postures. The regulation mechanism 7640LU disposed above is explained as a representative example, and explanations of the other regulation mechanisms 7640LD, 7640RU, and 7640RD are omitted.

The regulation mechanism 7640LU includes an arm body 7641 rotatably disposed on the front base 333, a torsion spring 7642 that imparts a biasing force for rotating the arm body 7641, and a biasing force that is imparted from the torsion spring 7642. and a holding body (not shown) for restricting the rotation of the arm body 7641 by and holding it in the initial position.

A roller 7641 a is rotatably supported at the tip of the arm body 7641 . The torsion spring 7642 urges the arm body 7641 in a rotational direction (clockwise (rightward) in the regulation mechanism 7640LU in FIGS. 47 and 48) in which the tip (roller 7641a) of the arm body 7641 separates from the main body 311 of the displacement member 310. . The holding body regulates the rotation of the arm body 7641 by the biasing force of the torsion spring 7542, and moves the arm body 7641 to the initial position (the direction connecting the rotation center of the arm body 7641 and the rotation center of the roller 7641a is set to the front base 333 48) is maintained along the longitudinal direction of the regulating mechanism 7640LU.

The main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is formed with decorative portions along its upper and lower side edges, and the roller receiving portions 7311e are formed at the longitudinal ends of the decorative portions. is formed to protrude toward the front side of the front base 311 in .

The roller receiving portion 7311e extends in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIGS. 47 and 48) to a position overlapping the roller 7641a of the arm body 7641, and the side surface facing the arm body 7641 approaches the regulation mechanism 7640. It is formed to be slanted upward (in the regulation mechanism 7640LU of FIG. 47, it is slanted upward from its proximal end to its distal end). A curved surface is formed at the proximal end of the side surface facing the arm body 7641 so as to be able to come into contact with the outer circumference of the roller 7641a, and the curved surface holds the roller 7641a.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47 and approaches the lowered position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (lower side surface in FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further lowered, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the body portion 311, thereby gradually tilting the arm body 7641 from the initial position and displacing it. When the member 310 is placed at the lowered position, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the curved surface at the proximal end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311, as shown in FIG.

As a result, the body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched between the left and right arms 7641 of the left and right restriction mechanisms 7640LD and 7640RD, thereby fixing the movable mechanism and moving the body portion 311 in the left-right direction with respect to the end side portions 314 of the body portion 311 . relative displacement (that is, sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 48 and approaches the raised position, the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311 (upper side surface in FIG. When the displacement member 310 is further raised by being brought into contact with the roller 7641a, the roller 7641a rolls along the side surface of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311, thereby gradually tilting the arm body 7641 from the initial position. 47, the roller 4671a is held by the side surface (the curved surface at the proximal end) of the roller receiving portion 7311e of the main body portion 311. When the displacement member 310 is placed at the raised position, as shown in FIG.

As a result, as in the case described above, the body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is sandwiched between the left and right arms 7641 of the left and right regulation mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU, thereby fixing the movable mechanism and moving the ends of the body portion 311. Relative displacement in the left-right direction with respect to the side portion 314 (that is, sliding displacement of the projecting pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is restricted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted. , the rotor 313 can be rotated.

That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body part 311, and the main body part 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by the movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the main body portion 311 rattles or wobbles, which not only hinders the rotation of the rotor 313, but also causes the movable parts to wear or break due to the rattles or wobbles.

On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 can be displaced in a stable state while suppressing rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear and damage of the movable parts. In particular, the configuration of this embodiment is effective when the center of gravity position G of the rotor 6313 is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation (see FIG. 46) as in the sixth embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD act on the arm body 4671 when the displacement member 310 is displaced to its displacement end (the raised position or the lowered position), and the movable mechanism is fixed. to form That is, the displacement (upward and downward) of the displacement member 310 is used to fix the movable mechanism (the arm body 7641 is tilted). The driving motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 47, the arms 7641 of the upper regulation mechanisms 7640LU and 7640RU are automatically returned to their initial positions by the biasing force of the torsion springs 7642 ( 48), similarly, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the lowered position shown in FIG. is automatically returned to (see FIG. 47). That is, the regulation mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD can be automatically returned to the position (initial position) shielded by the front base 333, and made invisible to the player.

In addition, since the roller receiving portion 7311e is formed as part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 (that is, part of the decorative portion of the main body portion 311 is formed by the roller portion 7311e), the arm body 7641 is tilted. It is possible to make the mechanism part for the game inconspicuous to the player.

Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 and 50 are front views of the vertical slide unit 8300 in the eighth embodiment. 49 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 50 shows a state in which the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position. 49 and 50 illustrate a state in which the front base 333 is removed from the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R.

In the seventh embodiment, the arm bodies 7641 of the regulating mechanisms 7640LU to 7640RD sandwich the main body 311 from the left and right, thereby fixing the movable mechanism (regulating the displacement of the main body 311 relative to the end side portion 314). However, in the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD of the eighth embodiment, the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, thereby fixing the movable mechanism ( restricts the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314). In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, in the vertical slide unit 8300 according to the eighth embodiment, regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD are arranged in front of the intermediate bases 332 of the one side member 320L and the other side member 329R. The regulating mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD fix the movable mechanism (the structure that allows the end side portion 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311) when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position or the lowered position, and the main body It is a structure for regulating the relative displacement between the portion 311 and the end side portion 329, and regulating mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU are arranged on one side and the other in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member 310 arranged at the raised position, Restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD are provided on one longitudinal side and the other longitudinal side of displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position.

Although the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD arranged at these four locations are different in shape, they are substantially the same in structure and action for being inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b. Therefore, the regulating mechanism 8640LU disposed above the one side member 320L will be described as a representative example, and explanations of the other regulating mechanisms 8640LD, 8640RU, and 8640RD will be omitted.

The regulation mechanism 8640LU has a base portion 8641 projecting from the front of the intermediate base 332, and a projecting tip of the base portion 8641 projecting toward the displacement member 310 (in the regulation mechanism 8640LU, downward in FIG. 49). and an insertion portion 8642 . That is, the insertion portion 8642 is raised by the base portion 8641 to a height position facing between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b, and is positioned between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIGS. 49 and 50). placed in a position overlapping the The plate thickness of the insertion portion 8642 is set to be equal to or slightly smaller than the interval between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b.

When the displacement member 310 is lowered from the raised position shown in FIG. 49 and then approaches the lowered position, below between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b of the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314, the insertion of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD becomes possible. When the portions 8642 face each other and the displacement member 310 is further lowered to the lowered position, the insertion portions 8642 are inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

As a result, in the displacement member 310, the gap between the stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (clearance for relative displacement) is filled with the insertion portions 8642 of the restriction mechanisms 8640LD and 8640RD. , the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the body portion 311 in the lateral direction with respect to the end side portion 314 (that is, the sliding displacement of the protruding pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 314a of the end side portion 314) is regulated. be.

On the other hand, when the displacement member 310 is lifted from the state shown in FIG. When the portions 8642 face each other and the displacement member 310 is further raised and placed at the raised position, the insertion portions 8642 are inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b as shown in FIG.

As a result, as in the case described above, the displacement member 310 has a gap between the opposing stopper surface 311b of the main body portion 311 and the stopper surface 314b of the end side portion 314 (a gap for relative displacement) between the restricting mechanisms 8640LU and 8640RU. By being filled with the insertion portion 8642, the movable mechanism is fixed, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 in the left-right direction (that is, the projecting pin 311a along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 314a of the end side portion 314) slide displacement) is regulated.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable mechanism is fixed by the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD, and the relative displacement of the main body portion 311 with respect to the end side portion 314 can be restricted. , the rotor 313 can be rotated.

That is, the rotating body 313 is held by the main body part 311, and the main body part 311 is connected to the end side part 314 by the movable mechanism so as to be relatively displaceable. In addition, the main body portion 311 rattles or wobbles, which not only hinders the rotation of the rotor 313, but also causes the movable parts to wear or break due to the rattles or wobbles.

On the other hand, the movable mechanism can be fixed by the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD (the movable mechanism can be canceled), so that the rotating body 313 can be displaced in a stable state while suppressing rattling and wobbling of the main body 311. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress wear and damage of the movable parts. In particular, the configuration of this embodiment is effective when the center of gravity position G of the rotor 6313 is eccentric with respect to the center of rotation (see FIG. 46) as in the sixth embodiment described above.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the restriction mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD allow the insertion portion 8642 to be inserted between the opposing stopper surfaces 311b and 314b by displacing the displacement member 310 to its displacement end (the raised position or the lowered position). to form a state in which the movable mechanism is fixed. That is, the displacement (up and down) of the displacement member 310 is used to fix the movable mechanism (the insertion portion 8642 is inserted between the opposed stopper surfaces 311b and 314b). is not necessary, and the driving motor 341 for displacing (raising and lowering) the displacement member 310 can also be used as driving means for causing the regulation mechanisms 8640LU to 8640RD to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 and 52 are front views of the transmission mechanism and rear base 9331 in the ninth embodiment, with FIG. 51 corresponding to the state of FIG. 22 and FIG. 52 corresponding to the state of FIG. 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is made non-parallel (inclined) with respect to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364, so that the second rack However, the second rack 364 of the ninth embodiment is subject to the magnetic forces of the magnets 9652a to 9652e acting in a direction non-parallel (inclined) to the direction of its linear motion. , and the wildness of the posture is suppressed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the rear base 9331 includes a vertically elongated main body portion and an overhang projecting laterally from the lower end of the main body portion, as in the first embodiment. A metal rod 9651 is arranged on the side of the main body (on the projecting direction side of the projecting portion). The metal rod 9651 is a rod-shaped body made of metal, and is arranged with its longitudinal direction aligned with the linear motion direction of the second rack 364 .

A plurality of magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged on the side of the second rack 364 facing the metal rod 9651 arranged on the rear base 9331, and the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e are arranged. They are formed so as to attract each other by magnetic force. That is, a magnetic force is applied (acted) to the second rack 364 in a direction to urge the lower end side thereof toward the opposite side (left side in FIG. 51) of the second pinion 365a.

Therefore, as in the case of the first embodiment, the tooth flanks of the second rack 364 can be brought close to the tooth flanks of the second pinion 365a, so that the gap between the two tooth flanks can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a time lag in transmitting the driving force from the second rack 364 to the second pinion 365a due to the gap between the tooth flanks, thereby improving the responsiveness. In addition, it is possible to suppress accelerated wear of the tooth flanks and breakage of the tooth flanks due to collision between the tooth flanks immediately after the driving force is transmitted from the stopped state (in the initial stage of meshing). Furthermore, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the second rack 364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant.

Note that in the first embodiment in which the biasing spring 366 is formed as a coil spring, deterioration (settling) occurs as the second rack 364 is repeatedly operated, and the biasing force changes. For example, since the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 uses the magnetic force of the magnet, a stable biasing force can be applied to the second rack 364 over a long period of time.

Here, in this embodiment, all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651 when the second rack 364 is positioned at the lowest movable range as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the second rack 364 is positioned at the top of its movable range as shown in FIG.

Therefore, the period during which the second rack 364 rises from the lowest position in the movable range shown in FIG. 1 period”), since all the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651, a constant magnetic force can be applied to the second rack 364. FIG.

The period during which the second rack 364 rises from the first position to the second position (the position where the rear magnet 9652e and the metal rod 9651 stop facing each other) (hereinafter referred to as the “second period”) is Since the number (area) of the magnets 9652a to 9652e facing the metal rod 9651 is gradually decreased along with the displacement (lifting), the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be gradually decreased.

All the magnets 9652a to 9652e face the metal rod 9651 during the period when the second rack 364 rises from the second position to the uppermost position of the movable range shown in FIG. Therefore, a state in which almost no magnetic force is applied to the second rack 364 can be created.

That is, according to this embodiment, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be applied while being adjusted to a magnitude suitable for the state of the second rack 364 . Specifically, in the first period in which the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a, a larger magnetic force (magnetic force exceeding the reference value) is applied to the second rack 364, thereby causing the second rack 364 to move. While making it difficult to rattle to suppress the occurrence of erratic posture (stabilize the transmission of the driving force to the second pinion 365a), the second rack 364 starts to drive the second pinion 365a. In the third period after entering the stable state, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 is reduced (below the reference value) or is not applied, so that the magnetic force drives the second rack 364. , the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the second period is provided between the first period and the third period, the magnetic force applied to the second rack 364 can be prevented from abruptly changing (decreasing) and gradually Since it can be decreased, the transition from the first period to the third period can be smoothly performed, and the posture of the second rack 364 can be stabilized.

It should be noted that the arrangement objects (back base 331, second rack 364) of the metal rod 9651 and the magnets 9652a to 9652e may be reversed. Also, instead of the metal rod 9651, a magnet may be provided. When arranging magnets, the magnetic force in the attracting direction may be used, or the magnetic force in the repelling direction may be used. These also provide the same effects as in the case of the present embodiment.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 53 is an exploded rear perspective view of the other side member 320L in the tenth embodiment, and illustrates an exploded state. 54(a) and 54(b) are rear perspective views of the other-side member 320L, and illustrate the assembled state. 53 and 54, illustration of the front base 333 and the first pinion 351 is omitted. FIG. 54(a) shows the state before the roller 10367 is attached.

In the first embodiment, the engagement between one end of the biasing spring 366 and the engagement portion of the second rack 364 is performed after the rear base 331 is covered with the intermediate base 332. However, the tenth embodiment is described. One end of the urging spring 366 in the form is locked to the locking portion of the second rack 364 before covering the rear base 331 with the intermediate base 332 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the tenth embodiment, the back base 10331 has a substantially J-shaped slit portion 10331e extending from the portion where the extension lines of the first opening 331c and the second opening 331d intersect each other. is set. The slit portion 10331e starts from the portion opened at the side edge of the rear base 10331, and folds back into a U shape at the end of the portion (first guide portion) extending linearly as a groove of constant width, It is formed as a slit terminating at the end of the linearly extending portion (second guide portion).

In the intermediate base 10332, on the inner side of the bent portion (the portion where the main body portion and the protruding portion intersect), the height of the side wall is made lower than in the case of the first embodiment, and attachment during the assembly process is reduced. Interference with the force spring 366 is suppressed.

The roller 10367 is formed in a disc shape and includes a first flange portion 10367a, a second flange portion 10367b, and a third flange portion 10367c, which are arranged to face each other with a predetermined interval, and a first flange portion 10367a and a second flange portion 10367a. A columnar shaft portion 10367d connecting between the portions 10367b and a columnar contact portion 10367e connecting between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c are provided, and these portions 10367a to 10367e are concentric. It is formed integrally in a different posture.

The shaft portion 10367d is a portion that is inserted through the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 and is rotatably held (supported) at the end of the slit portion 10331e. Or set to slightly smaller dimensions. The abutting portion 10367e is a portion that forms a bent posture of the urging spring 366 by bringing its outer peripheral surface into contact between one end and the other end of the urging spring 366 .

The facing distance between the first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the plate thickness of the back base 10331, and the facing distance between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c is biased. It is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the spring 366 . Therefore, as will be described later, when the shaft portion 10367 is inserted through the slit portion 10331e, the rear base 10331 is sandwiched between the facing first flange portion 10367a and the second flange portion 10367b, and the roller 10367 moves in the axial direction. movement is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 53, assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 in the tenth embodiment is performed by mounting the drive motor 341 on the front surface of the intermediate base 10332 and , After mounting the gears 362a to 362e on the gear shafts 332c to 332g, the crank gear 363 on the gear shaft 332h, and the transmission gear 365 on the gear shaft 332i on the rear surface of the intermediate base 332 (for the gear shafts 332c to 332i 18), the second rack 364 is arranged with the eccentric pin 363a of the crank gear 363 inserted into the rack groove 364b thereof and meshing with the second pinion 365a of the transmission gear 365.

Next, in the tenth embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the engaging portion of the second rack 364 and the other end is engaged with the engaging portion formed at the projecting tip of the projecting portion of the intermediate base 332. lock it. In this case, in this embodiment, the biasing spring 366 is set to be in an unloaded state (a state in which the free length is maintained), so both ends of the biasing spring 366 are locked. can also stably maintain such a state.

After forming the state in which the transmission mechanism is attached to the intermediate base 10332 (the state shown in FIG. 53) in this way, the front of the rear base 10331 is faced to the rear surface of the intermediate base 10332 and both are fastened and fixed (see FIG. 53). 54(a)), and finally, by attaching the roller 10367 to the slit portion 10331e of the rear base 10331 (see FIG. 54(b)), the assembly of the transmission mechanism to the rear base 10331 and the intermediate base 10332 is completed. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54( a ), when the rear base 10331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 10332 , the intermediate base 10332 is bridged between the bent portions (between the main body portion and the projecting portion). Since the biasing spring 366 is extended, the biasing spring 366 is sandwiched between the second flange portion 10367b and the third flange portion 10367c of the roller 10367, and the shaft portion 10367d of the roller 10367 is inserted into the slit portion 10331 of the rear base 10331. , and the roller 10367 is pushed into the folded portion of the slit portion 10331 . As a result, the urging spring 366 is extended and bent, so that the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 presses and holds the roller 10367 against the end of the slit portion 10331e as shown in FIG. 54(b). can do.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the roller 10367 is displaced while being brought into contact between one end and the other end of the biasing spring 366, thereby disposing the biasing spring 366 in a bent posture. , and the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 can be facilitated. That is, in a state in which the rear base 10331 is covered with the intermediate base 10332 (that is, in a state in which the rear base 10331 presses the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364), the biasing spring 366 is bent. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. As a result, the work of assembling the biasing spring 366 in the bent posture can be facilitated, and the efficiency of the assembling work can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring 366 can be used not only for biasing the second rack 364 but also as a holding force for holding the roller 10367 . There is no need to separately prepare a member (for example, a fastening screw), and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

Further, the roller 10367 is rotatably held by pressing its shaft portion 10367d against the terminal end of the slit portion 10331e by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 366 . Therefore, it is not necessary to protrude from the rear base 10331 or the intermediate base 10332 a shaft-like body for rotatably supporting the roller 10367 . Therefore, it is not necessary to cover the rear base 10331 with the intermediate base 10332 while inserting the shaft-like body through the roller 10367 (see FIG. 28), and from this point as well, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved. .

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are biased by separate biasing springs 366 has been described. The second rack 364 of the side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R are biased by one biasing spring 11366 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the vertical slide unit 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has one end locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. A biasing spring 11366 is provided. The biasing spring 11366 is disposed in a symmetrical posture by a roller 11661 abutting on the central position between one end and the other end thereof.

The projecting ends of the overhanging portions of the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R are recessed, and the biasing spring 11366 is installed on the interposing member 11370 via the recessed portions. . In addition, the roller 1161 is rotatably disposed on the interposing member 11370, and the interposing member 11370 is positioned so that the lower portion where the urging spring 11366 is installed is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 55). The biasing spring 11366 can be arranged along one plane (parallel to the plane of FIG. 55) from one end to the other end.

Here, in the first embodiment, the second rack 364 of the one side member 320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 320R are biased by separate biasing springs 366 (see FIG. 15). The magnitude of the biasing force applied to each second rack 364 varies due to individual differences (variations in characteristics caused by dimensions, materials, etc.) of the biasing springs 366 . This causes variation in the posture of each second rack 364 and affects the transmission of driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism. This causes a difference (deviation) between the guidance and driving of the displacement member 310 by the other side member 320R. Such a deviation makes it difficult to stably displace the displacement member 310 as described above, and not only increases the load on each drive motor 341 but also causes the displacement member 310 to stop.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 11366 is locked to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the other end is locked to the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R. That is, since it is biased by one biasing spring 11366, the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 of the one side member 11320L and the second rack 364 of the other side member 11320R can be made uniform. . As a result, variations in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. , the other-side member 11320R can guide and drive the displacement member 310 uniformly, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the transmission mechanism is attached to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332 by connecting one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 to the engaging portion of the second rack 364, as in the first embodiment. 28), the rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332, and between the one side member 11320L and the other side member 11320R. By interposing the interposition member 11370 and then locking one end and the other end of the biasing spring 11366 to the locking portions of the second racks 364 via the first openings 331c of the rear bases 331, , can be implemented. That is, in this embodiment as well, it is possible to easily dispose the biasing spring 11366 in a bent posture while suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. Work efficiency can be improved.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. 56 and 57 are rear views of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment. 56 shows the state before the interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and FIG. are inserted, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the case where the intervening member 370 is fastened and fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R via the connecting plate 371 with screws has been described. It is fixed to the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by the biasing force of the biasing spring 12366 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 56, in a vertical slide unit 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment, engaged portions 12331f are recessed on the opposing surfaces of one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R, and each of these engaged portions 12331f is recessed. Engagement portions 12372 that can be engaged with the portions 12331f project from both ends of the interposition member 12370 . The engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed by bending into a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear.

A locking portion 12373 for locking the other end of the biasing spring 366 is formed on the rear surface of the interposed member 12370, and the projecting ends of the projecting portions of the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are , and the other end of the urging spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370 through the cut portion.

The interposition member 12370 is formed as a flat surface in which a region from the engaging portion 12373 to the side edge is recessed toward the front side (back side of the paper surface of FIG. 56), thereby allowing the biasing spring 366 to The whole up to the other end can be arranged in a posture along one plane (a plane parallel to the paper surface of FIG. 56).

Assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 in the twelfth embodiment is performed as follows. First, the transmission mechanism is assembled to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, and the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are assembled. In this case, contrary to the case of the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the engaging portion of the second rack 364, while the other end is in the unlocked state, and the transmission mechanism is attached. The rear base 331 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate base 332 in the folded state (see FIG. 28).

As a result, the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are formed in the state shown in FIG. While engaging with the portion 12331f, the interposing member 12370 is interposed between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. are engaged with the engaging portions 12373 of the interposed member 12370 respectively. This completes the assembly of the vertical slide unit 12300 as shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are arranged between the intermediate base 332 and the rear base 331 (that is, the biasing spring 366 and the second rack 364 are pressed by the rear base 331). In this state, the other end of the biasing spring 366 can be locked to the locking portion 12373 of the interposition member 12370, thereby suppressing the biasing spring 366 from being repelled and the second rack 364 from falling off. At the same time, the urging spring 366 can be arranged in a bent posture, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, each biasing spring 366 is disposed in a posture inclined downward from the roller 367 (see FIG. 19) toward the engaged portion 12373 of the interposed member 2370, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the force component in the direction to pull the interposed member 12370 toward the left and right (the side of the one side member 320L and the side of the other side member 320R) and the direction in which the interposed member 12370 is pushed upward (toward the displacement member 310). A force component can be applied to such an interposition member 12370 .

As a result, the engaging portion 12372 of the interposition member 12370 is pressed against the engaged portions 12331f of the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366, so that the one side member 320L and the other side member The state in which the interposing member 12370 is interposed between 320R can be maintained. As a result, the intervening member 12370 is held by the one side member 320L and the other side member 320R (that is, at least until the intervening member 12370 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 211 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 210. fixed). Therefore, it is possible to facilitate handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the rear case 210, and to improve workability in the transportation process and the attachment process.

Further, the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from the rear, and the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R and the interposing member 12370 are formed by the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion. Since the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R are coupled by the engagement of 12331f, it is possible to prevent the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R from deforming into a "V" shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to facilitate handling until the vertical slide unit 12300 is attached to the rear case 210, and it is possible to improve workability in the transportation process and the attachment process.

In addition, the biasing force of the biasing spring 363 is not only applied to the second rack 364, but is also used as a fixing force for fixing the intermediate member 12370 between the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. , members (for example, the connecting shaft 332m, the connecting plate 371, and screws for fastening them) for fixing the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R to the interposing member 12370 can be eliminated, and the number of parts and the assembly can be reduced accordingly. Man-hours can be reduced.

It should be noted that the engaging portion 12372 and the engaged portion 12331f are engaged with a predetermined backlash due to the dimensional tolerance. In other words, the amount of backlash allows relative displacement of the interposition member 12370 with respect to the one side member 12320L and the other side member 12320R. , the mounting positions of the one side member 12320L, the other side member 12320R, and the interposing member 12370 can be individually adjusted, and workability can be improved during mounting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58(a) is a rear perspective view of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIGS. It is a back schematic diagram of the other side member 13320R to illustrate.

In the first embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 367 for bending the biasing spring 366 is fixed at a predetermined position. is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

The configuration of the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as that of the other side member 10320R in the tenth embodiment except for the addition of a telescopic actuator 13671. As shown in FIG. Therefore, description of the same configuration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a telescopic actuator 13671 is arranged on the other side member 13320R in the thirteenth embodiment. The telescopic actuator 13671 includes a main body portion 13671a, a rod portion 13671b held by the main body portion 13671a, and a drive mechanism (not shown) for advancing or retreating (extending or shortening) the rod portion 13671b with respect to the main body portion 13671a. ), the body portion 13671a is fixed to the rear surface of the rear base 331, and the roller 10367 is rotatably connected to the tip of the rod portion 13671b.

In this case, the expansion/contraction actuator 13671 is disposed in a posture in which the expansion/contraction direction (the axial direction of the rod portion 13671b) is along the straight portion from the folded portion to the end of the slit portion 10331e. Therefore, by driving the expansion/contraction actuator 13671 to expand and contract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 10367 is moved between the terminal end of the slit portion 10331e shown in FIG. can be displaced between

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the roller 10367 for contacting the biasing spring 366 and forming the bending posture of the biasing spring 366 is set to the extension/contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the extension/contraction actuator 13671. It can be changed by action. As a result, the bending state of the biasing spring 366 can be adjusted, so that the state of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 (for example, the magnitude and direction of the biasing force) can be adjusted by, for example, , can be adjusted according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its attitude, displacement speed, or displacement position).

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the biasing spring 366 is preloaded (the pressure applied to the biasing spring 366 in the assembled state). The apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 can be increased by increasing the load). can be reduced to reduce the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 366 .

Thus, for example, to stop the displacement member 310 in the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased to increase the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 in the raised position. While assisted by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (either raised or lowered) (i.e., when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is reduced so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the urging force from acting as resistance when displacing the displacement member 310 (second rack 364).

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c), by shortening the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 and the direction of the second rack 364 While the angle (tilt angle) formed by the direction of the linear motion can be reduced (brought closer to parallel), as shown in FIG. Therefore, the angle (tilt angle) between the direction of the biasing force applied to the second rack and the direction of linear motion of the second rack 364 can be increased.

Therefore, for example, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the displacement of the second rack 364 is started, the behavior of the second rack 364 becomes unstable, so that the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced. The tilt angle is increased (that is, the state of FIG. 58(b) is approached) to suppress the occurrence of fluctuations in the attitude of the second rack 364, while the displacement speed of the second rack 364 reaches a constant steady state. Since the behavior of the second rack 364 is stabilized at a certain stage, the inclination angle of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is reduced (brought closer to parallel) to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required to drive the second rack 364 can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 59, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. 59(a) is a rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 59(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the vertical slide unit 14300. FIG. 59(a) shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, and FIG. 59(b) shows a state in which the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended.

In the eleventh embodiment, the posture of the biasing spring 11366 is maintained constant, but the posture of the biasing spring 11366 in the thirteenth embodiment is changed. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

The vertical slide unit 14300 of the fourteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 11300 of the eleventh embodiment in that a telescopic actuator 13671 and a left and right roller 14662 are added, and the roller 11661 is the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671. The other configurations are the same except that it is arranged at the tip of the . Therefore, description of the same configuration is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), a telescopic actuator 13671 and left and right rollers 14662 are arranged in the vertical slide unit 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment.

The telescopic actuator 13671 is disposed at the center of the biasing spring 11366 in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 59(a)) in the rear view shown in FIG. ) along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 59(a)) (that is, the posture along the line of symmetry of the biasing spring 11366).

Further, in the present embodiment, the roller 11661 is rotatably arranged at the tip of the rod portion 13671a of the telescopic actuator 13671, while the left and right rollers 14662 are rotatably arranged at the rear surface of the interposing member 11370.

Therefore, by driving the telescopic actuator 13671 to extend and retract the rod portion 13671b, the roller 11661 is positioned horizontally side by side with the left and right rollers 14662 as shown in FIG. 59(c), and a position below the left and right rollers 14662 (lower side in FIG. 59(a)).

59A, in which the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671 is shortened, the biasing spring 11366 extends from the left and right bending portions (roller 367, see FIG. 19) to the contact portion with the roller 11661. are formed linearly.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the roller 11661 that contacts the biasing spring 11366 can be changed by the expansion and contraction of the rod portion 13671b by the telescopic actuator 13671, and the biasing spring 11366 Depending on the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position), the state of the biasing force applied to the second rack 364 from can be adjusted.

As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b), by extending the rod portion 13671b of the telescopic actuator 13671, the preload of the urging spring 11366 (the load applied to the urging spring 11366 in the assembled state) is increased. can be increased to increase the apparent spring constant of the biasing spring 11366. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. , the apparent spring constant of the urging spring 11366 can be reduced.

Thus, for example, to stop the displacement member 310 in the raised position, the preload of the biasing spring 366 is increased to increase the force required to maintain the displacement member 310 in the raised position. While assisted by the biasing force, when the displacement member 310 is displaced (either raised or lowered) (i.e., when the second rack 364 is displaced), the preload of the biasing spring 366 is reduced so that the biasing spring 366 It is possible to suppress the urging force from acting as resistance when displacing the displacement member 310 (second rack 364).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the preload of one biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted. can be equalized with the second rack 364 of . As a result, variations in the posture of each second rack 364 can be suppressed, and the transmission of the driving force to the first pinion 351 in each transmission mechanism can be made uniform. , the other-side member 11320R can guide and drive the displacement member 310 uniformly, and the displacement member 310 can be stably displaced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the angle (tilt angle) formed by the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 11366 to each second rack 364 and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 does not change. Only the preload of the biasing spring 11366 can be adjusted (while maintaining a constant tilt angle). As a result, when adjusting the preload of the biasing spring 11366, the inclination angle (the direction in which the biasing force is applied) is changed along with the adjustment, and the change in the inclination angle causes the posture of the second rack 364 to change. can be avoided.

Next, referring to FIG. 60, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a front view of the transmission mechanism and rear base 15331 in the fifteenth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG.

In the first embodiment, by inserting the gear shaft 331b arranged to face the second pinion 365a into the rack groove 364b of the second rack 364, the second rack 364 is placed on the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In the fifteenth embodiment, the first restricting portion 15331g arranged to face the second pinion 365a is brought into contact with the side surface of the second rack 15364. , the second rack 15364 is made displaceable along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIG. 60, the second rack 15364 of the transmission mechanism in the fifteenth embodiment has a side surface on which the rack is formed (the side surface on the second pinion 365a side) and a side surface opposite to the side surface (the left side in FIG. 60). ) are formed as flat surfaces parallel to the tooth flanks of the rack. Specifically, the side surfaces on both sides of the second rack 15364 are formed as flat surfaces parallel to each other at least within the range where a first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of second restricting portions 15331h described later abut.

A first restricting portion 15331g and a pair of left and right second restricting portions 15331h are projected from the front surface of the rear base 15331 . The first restricting portion 15331g is a portion that abuts against the side surface of the second rack 15364 (the left side surface in FIG. 60) to regulate its posture, and faces the shaft of the second pinion 365a with the second rack 15364 interposed therebetween. (the position facing the gear shaft 332i of the intermediate base 332 in the assembled state of the rear base 15331 and the intermediate base 332), and is formed as a cylindrical body with a circular cross section. Specifically, the position of the first restricting portion 15331g is such that the direction connecting the axis of the first restricting portion 15331g and the axis of the gear shaft 332i is perpendicular to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 15364. is set to

The second restricting portion 15331h is a part for restricting the displacement in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 60) of the second rack 15364. A pair of the second restricting portions 15331h are formed at a predetermined interval and each has a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Formed as a body. The space between the pair of second restricting portions 15331h facing each other (horizontal direction in FIG. 60) is larger than the width dimension of the second rack 15364, and is formed so as to have a gap with the side surface of the second rack 15364. As shown in FIG.

In this case, the amount of displacement of the second rack 15364 in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 60) allowed by the second restricting portion 15331h is allowed between the first restricting portion 15331g and the second pinion 365a. is larger than the amount of displacement in the left-right direction (width direction) of the second rack 15364 . It should be noted that the allowable difference in displacement amount is preferably set to 1.5 times or more. This is because the displacement (rotation) of the second rack 15364 along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a can be reliably formed.

With the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the second rack 15364 is displaced (rotated) along the tooth surface of the second pinion 365a and moved in the direction of linear motion. It can be displaced (see Figure 26). As a result, even when the posture of the second rack 15364 is unstable, the engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a can be easily maintained constant, and the transmission of the driving force can be stabilized.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is not necessary to form the rack groove 364b (see FIG. 22) in the second rack 15364 as in the case of the first embodiment. Rigidity can be ensured and durability can be improved. In addition, since the rack groove 364b can be omitted and the rigidity of the second rack 15364 is ensured, deformation of the second rack 15364 when driven by the rotation of the second pinion 365a can be suppressed. Also from this point of view, it is possible to easily maintain constant engagement between the second rack 15364 and the second pinion 365a.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. 61 and 62 are front views of the transmission mechanism and rear base 15331 in the sixteenth embodiment, corresponding to FIGS. 22 and 24, respectively.

In the first embodiment, the guide groove 364a of the second rack 364 is formed with a constant groove width along the longitudinal direction, but the guide groove 634a of the second rack 16364 in the sixteenth embodiment By forming the recess 16681, the width of the groove is expanded in a part of the longitudinal direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the second rack 16364 of the transmission mechanism in the sixteenth embodiment has a recess 16681 on the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the second pinion 365a side (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62). recessed. The recessed portion 16681 is a portion for restricting the linear motion of the second rack 16364, and is formed as a recessed portion curved in an arc shape that can be engaged with the rack shaft 331b at the upper end and the lower end of the guide groove 364a. . The inner diameter of the recess 16681 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the rack shaft 331b.

The central angle of the arc of the concave portion 16681 is preferably set within the range of 30° or more and 120° or less, and more preferably set within the range of 45° or more and 90° or less. This is to achieve the conflicting functions of maintaining the engagement state between the recessed portion 16681 and the rack shaft 331b and facilitating the release of the engagement.

For example, in order to stop and hold the displacement member 310 at the raised position (see FIG. 21(a)), it is necessary to resist the gravitational force acting on the displacement member 310. power increases. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the raised position, as shown in FIG. , the rack shaft 331b can be engaged with the recess 16681 at the lower end of the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 to restrict the linear motion of the second rack 16364. As shown in FIG. As a result, the drive force required for the drive motor 341 can be reduced (or its drive stopped). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 when holding the displacement member 310 at the raised position can be suppressed.

Further, when the displacement member 310 is arranged at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. 62, the second rack 16364 is arranged at the uppermost part of the movable range, so that the guide groove 364a of the second rack 16364 The linear motion of the second rack 16364 can be restricted by engaging the rack shaft 331b with the concave portion 16681 at the upper end of the . As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement member 310 arranged at the lowered position from rattling due to the influence of disturbance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the recess 16681 is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove 364a on the side of the second pinion 365a (the right side in FIGS. 61 and 62) and is applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second pinion 16364. 61, the direction of the biasing force applied to the second rack 16364 is inclined (not parallel) to the direction of linear motion of the second rack 16364. 62 to engage the recess 16681 with the rack shaft 331b. It can be done with linear motion.

That is, when the second rack 16364 is displaced to the top or bottom of the movable range, the concave portion 16681 faces the rack shaft 331b, and the second rack 16364 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The rack shaft 331 b can be engaged (inserted) into the recess 16681 , and the engagement between the recess 16681 and the rack shaft 331 b can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing spring 366 . On the other hand, when the second pinion 365a is driven to rotate from this state, the second rack 16364 is rotated in the direction in which the rack shaft 331b is pulled out of the recess 16681 while resisting the biasing force of the biasing spring 366. The engagement with the rack shaft 331b is released. Thereby, the second rack 16364 can be linearly moved.

Further, in the present embodiment, a mechanism (linear motion restricting means) for restricting the linear motion of the second rack 16364 includes a guide groove 364a formed in the second rack 16364 and a rack inserted into the guide groove 364a. Since it is constructed using the shaft 331b, there is no need to enlarge the outer shape of the second rack 16364, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the portion for rotatably guiding the second pinion 365a, the rack shaft 331b also serves as a portion (a portion that engages with the concave portion 16681) that constitutes the linear movement restricting means. By reducing the number of points, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a seventeenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided annular body 17440L1 in the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. 63(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the divided annular body 17440R1 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 63(c) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the split ring body 17440L1 along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc in FIG. 63(a), and FIG. FIG. 17 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a ring segment 17440R1; 63(a) and 63(b) correspond to FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b).

In the first embodiment, a two-step positioning mechanism is configured by providing the engagement recess 491a and the engagement protrusion 492a on the tip of the positioning protrusion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning recess 492. A ball plunger mechanism 17495 is provided on the tip of the positioning protrusion 491 and the bottom surface of the positioning recess 492 in the seventeenth embodiment. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) to 63(d), the positioning mechanism in the seventeenth embodiment projects from the contact surface (side surface) of the split ring member 17440R1 as in the first embodiment. and a positioning recess 492 recessed in the contact surface (side surface) of the annular divided body 17440L1 as a recess capable of receiving the positioning protrusion 491. A recessed portion 17493a is provided in the bottom surface 17493, and a ball 17495a of a ball plunger mechanism 17495 projects from the projecting tip surface of the positioning projection 491. As shown in FIG.

The recessed portion 17493a is formed as a spherical concave portion, and is formed so that the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be engaged. That is, the diameter of the spherical surface of the recess 17493a is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495. A bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recess 17493a.

These recessed portions 17493a and balls 17495a are engaged with each other (concavo-convex fitting) in the final stage when the contact surfaces of the annular segments 17440L1 and 17440R1 are brought into contact with each other, thereby performing final positioning. It is a part. The dimension by which the ball 17495a protrudes from the protruding end surface of the positioning projection 491 is set smaller than the recess depth of the positioning recess 492 .

As a result, in the initial stage when the contact surfaces are brought into contact with each other, provisional positioning with relatively rough positioning accuracy (relatively wide permissible range of positional deviation) can be performed by the positioning convex portion 491 and the positioning concave portion 492. Thus, the projecting tip of the positioning projection 491 can be reliably received in the positioning recess 492, and the subsequent proper positioning position can be smoothly guided. In the final stage of , by engaging the ball 17495a with the recessed portion 17493a, the positioning accuracy is increased, the annular shape is properly formed, and rattling and wobble after the annular shape is formed are reliably suppressed. Two stages of positioning are possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, the second stage of the positioning mechanism is a structure in which the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 is engaged with the recessed portion 17493a provided in the recessed bottom surface 17493. In the second stage of positioning when the bodies 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the ring forming position, the ball 17495a can be rolled on the recessed bottom surface 17493, and as a result, the positioning protrusion 491 is formed in the positioning recess 492. The ball 17495a can be smoothly moved from being received until the ball 17495a engages with the recessed portion 17493, and the engagement between the ball 17495a and the recessed portion 17493 can be released by releasing the annular segment 17440L1 and the recessed portion 17493. This can be done smoothly with the movement of the 17440R1 to the retracted position.

In this case, since the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 is inclined downward toward the recessed portion 17493a, the ball 17495a of the ball plunger mechanism 17495 can be guided to the recessed portion 1793a along the recessed bottom surface 17493. , the balls 17495a can be reliably engaged with the recesses 17493a.

Furthermore, even if the protruding tip of the positioning protrusion 491 collides with the recessed bottom surface 17493 of the positioning recess 492 when the annular segments 17440L1 and 17440R1 are arranged at the annular ring forming position, the ball plunger mechanism 17495 does not move. The ball 17495a is brought into contact with the recessed bottom surface 17493, and as the ball 17495a retreats, the spring is elastically deformed to absorb the impact.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400. FIG.

64 and 65 correspond to the front view and rear view of the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 in the state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, the assembled state of the operation unit 200). 64 shows the vertical slide unit 18300 and the annular ring forming unit 18400 partially cut by a virtual plane passing through the center of the posture regulating member 18450 in the annular ring forming unit 18400 in the thickness direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 65). Corresponds to the cross-sectional view.

In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide unit 300 and the ring forming unit 400 are not in contact with each other except for the portion where they are attached to the rear case 210 has been described. Partial contact with the ring forming unit 18400 is enabled. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 18300 of the eighteenth embodiment has the same configuration as the vertical slide unit 300 of the first embodiment except that the diameter of the rotation base 18312 is increased. On the other hand, the annular ring forming unit 18400 in the eighteenth embodiment differs from the annular ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in the shape of the side edge of the posture regulating member 18450 facing the rotation base 18312 (rotation base 18312). Other configurations are the same except that a holding portion 18453 is formed on the outer circumference of the 18312 so as to be able to abut thereon. Descriptions of these same configurations will be omitted below. Note that the holding portion 18453 is curved in an arc concentric with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 in a rear view.

As shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b), after the vertical slide unit 18300 places the displacement member 310 between the raised position and the lowered position, the ring forming unit 18400 moves the ring segment 440L1. 440R2 are arranged at the ring forming positions, a ring shape is formed by the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2, and a rotating body 313 which is circular in front view is spaced at a predetermined interval on the inner circumference side of the ring shape. arranged concentrically. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by an annular shape.

In this case, the displacement member 310 is provided with a movable mechanism (a structure that allows the end side portions 314 to be relatively displaced with respect to the main body portion 311). It is supported in a floatable state. Therefore, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, rattling or wobble occurs with respect to the end side portion 314 of the body portion 311 along with the rotation. 440L1-440R2), causing damage. Incidentally, when the center of gravity position G of the rotating body 6313 is eccentric from the center of rotation as in the case of the sixth embodiment described above, the problem of damage due to collision becomes particularly conspicuous.

On the other hand, if a gap is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 to such an extent that they do not collide with each other, the effect of rotating the rotating body 313 surrounded by the ring shape cannot be obtained. cannot perform sufficiently. Further, even if the rotating body 313 does not collide with the annular shape (annular segmented bodies 440L1 to 440R2), the rotation of the rotating body 313 causes rattling and wobble with respect to the end side portion 314 of the body portion 311. If continued, the movable parts (for example, the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) will wear out.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member 310 of the vertical slide unit 18300 is arranged between the raised position and the lowered position, and the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 of the annulus forming unit 18400 are placed at the annulus forming position. , and a pair of ring forming units 18400 slidably displaced in the left-right direction (the direction of approaching each other) by the hanging mechanism 450. The posture regulating member 18450 has its holding portion 18453 in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 of the vertical slide unit 18300, and as shown in FIG.

As a result, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 can be held by the ring forming unit 18400, so that the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 can be restricted (the movable mechanism can be fixed). . As a result, even if the rotating body 313 is rotated, it is possible to prevent the body portion 311 from wobbling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, thereby forming the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 in an annular shape (circular shape). Collision with the inner peripheral surfaces of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2), and wear and damage to movable parts (for example, projecting pins 311a and elongated holes 314a) can be suppressed.

In particular, according to this embodiment, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 in the displacement member 310 is a projection along the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 65) of the long hole 314a in the end side portion 314. When the setting pin 311a slides, the pair of posture determining members 18450 are slid in the horizontal direction as described above, and the holding portions 18453 of the pair of posture determining members 18450 are moved by the vertical slide unit 18300. As shown in FIG. 65, the main body portion 311 of the displacement member 310 is held (relative displacement with the end side portion 314 is restricted) by sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the lateral direction.

Therefore, it is possible to efficiently prevent the projecting pin 311a from being displaced along the elongated hole 314a, that is, the cause of rattling or shaking with respect to the end side portion 314 of the main body portion 311. FIG. As a result, the force required to hold the main body portion 311 (restriction of relative displacement with respect to the end side portion 314) can be reduced, and the rattling and wobbling can be reliably suppressed.

Further, in this case, since the posture regulating member 18450 sandwiching the outer peripheral surface of the rotation base 18312 from the left and right direction is supported by the upper and lower arms 435 and 436 extending along the left and right direction as shown in FIG. The holding force in the direction (horizontal direction) in which the body portion 311 is displaced relative to the end side portion 314 can be increased. Become.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an annulus forming unit 18400 is provided to form an annulus shape by arranging the annulus segments 440L1 to 440R2 from the retracted position to the annulus forming position, and the annulus forming unit 18400 is provided. Using the operation of the 18400 to form an annular shape, the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted (the movable mechanism is fixed). That is, it is possible to regulate the relative displacement in addition to the action for presentation, and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for regulating the relative displacement. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a front view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment.

66 corresponds to a front view and a rear view of the vertical slide unit 19300 and the ring forming unit 19400 in a state of being attached to the rear case 210 (that is, an assembled state of the operation unit 200). FIG. 66 shows a vertical slide unit 19300 and an annular ring forming unit 19400 that are partially moved by a virtual plane that passes through the centers of the annular divided bodies 440L1 to 440R2 in the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the plate thickness direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 66). It corresponds to a cross-sectional view cut into .

In the eighteenth embodiment, the vertical slide unit 18300 and the ring forming unit 18400 are brought into direct contact to regulate the relative displacement of the main body 311 with respect to the end side portion 324. However, the nineteenth embodiment is described. Then, while keeping the vertical slide unit 19300 and the annular ring forming unit 19400 out of contact, the relative displacement of the main body part 311 with respect to the end side part 324 is restricted. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Here, the vertical slide unit 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment differs from the vertical slide unit 300 in the first embodiment except that a plurality of magnets 1991 are arranged (added) on the outer peripheral side of the rotor 313. , other configurations are the same. On the other hand, the annular ring forming unit 19400 in the nineteenth embodiment is different from the annular ring forming unit 400 in the first embodiment in that it is located on the inner peripheral side of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313). The other configurations are the same except that a plurality of metal plates 1992 are arranged (added) to. Descriptions of these same configurations will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the nineteenth embodiment, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) magnets 1991 arranged on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 313 are positioned equidistant from the center of rotation of the rotating body 313. are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the other hand, the plurality of (four in this embodiment) metal plates 1992 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2 (the side facing the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 313) are made of a metal material, It is formed as a plate-like body curved in an arc shape along the inner peripheral surface of the ring shape formed by the ring segments 440L1 to 440R2. That is, each metal plate 1992 forms an annular shape concentrically with the rotor 313 when viewed from the front.

As a result, according to this embodiment, the magnetic force acting between the magnet 1991 provided on the rotating body 313 and the metal plate 1992 provided on each of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 causes the rotating body 313 to rotate. can be restricted in any direction from being displaced in the radial direction. That is, the rotating body 313 can be held at a position concentric with the annular shape formed by the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 (at the center on the inner peripheral side). As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 313 from colliding with the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape (annular segments 440L1 to 440R2). In addition, when the rotating body 313 is rotated, the body portion 311 can be prevented from rattling or wobbling with respect to the end side portion 314, so that the movable portion (for example, the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a) can be prevented from moving. Abrasion and damage can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the metal plate 1992 is continuous over almost the entire circumference, and the magnets 1991 are arranged at intervals of 90° in the circumferential direction. arrangement), whereby the rotating body 313 can be constrained from all sides. Therefore, not only can its displacement (rattling and wobble) be suppressed in any direction, but also the rotation body 313 If the relative positions of the rotators 313 and 313 are misaligned, centering can be performed to position the rotor 313 concentrically with respect to the annular shape.

In addition, as in the case of the 18th embodiment, the rotating body 313 is held on the inner peripheral side of the annular shape by utilizing the action performed by the annular ring forming unit 19400 for the purpose of forming the annular shape. (regulating the relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314), and there is no need to separately provide a mechanism or driving means for holding the rotating body 313 (regulating the relative displacement). Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

For example, assuming that the engaging structure of the engaged portions 12331f of the one side members 12320R and 12320L and the engaging portion 12372 of the interposing member 12370 in the twelfth embodiment and the biasing spring 11366 in the eleventh embodiment are one, You may comprise a game machine combining the structure which carries out.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the biasing spring 366 has a substantially "<"-shaped posture when viewed from the front has been described, but the posture is not necessarily limited to this. It may be in an approximately "S" shape, an approximately "J" shape in front view, or a combination thereof. That is, the bent posture of the biasing spring 366 may be any shape as long as it is a shape formed by bending or curving a coil spring at one or more points.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the elongated hole 314a formed in the end side portion 314 is formed in an oval shape in front view in which the semicircles on both sides are connected by a straight line. may be in the shape of That is, as long as the protruding pin 311a is displaceable, it may be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front, or may be bent in a "<" shape when viewed from the front. These may be formed in combination.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the vertical slide unit 300 is disposed in a posture in which the displacement member 310 is displaced along the direction of gravity (vertical direction). (direction perpendicular to the direction of gravity), or displaced in a direction in which the displacement member 310 is inclined with respect to the direction of gravity (vertical direction). can be Even with these postures, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the contact surfaces of the annular segments 440L1 to 440R2 and 17440L1 to 17440R2 are in contact with each other in a locus of circular motion while maintaining a posture parallel to each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may come close to each other while changing the degree of parallelism with respect to the contact surface of the other party, and finally come into contact with each other in a parallel posture, or While maintaining a mutually parallel posture with respect to the contact surface of the other party, they approach each other by linear movement in a direction non-perpendicular to the contact surface, and finally abut in a parallel posture. Also good.

In the first embodiment, the amount of relative displacement between the body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 is restricted within a predetermined range by the abutment of the stopper surfaces 311a and 314a. Alternatively, or in addition to this, the protruding pin 311a may be brought into contact with the terminal end of the elongated hole 314a to limit the amount of relative displacement between the main body portion 311 and the end side portion 314 within a predetermined range. .

In the first embodiment, one end of the biasing spring 366 is engaged with the second rack 364 via the first opening 331c in assembling the transmission mechanism to the rear base 331 and the intermediate base 332, but this is not necessarily the case. The other end of the urging spring 366 may be engaged with the intermediate base 332 via the second opening 331d.

In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the displacement members 4310 and 5310 are driven by the drive motor 341 of the one side member 320L. , 5310 may be driven. That is, the side of the movable mechanism where sliding displacement is permitted or the rubber hardness is low (soft) is defined as the driving side, but the movable mechanism side where only rotation is permitted or the rubber hardness is high (hard) is defined as the driving side. It is good as

In the thirteenth embodiment, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack and the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364 due to the telescopic motion of the telescopic actuator 13671 are the same. Although the angle (tilt angle) formed by these two directions is increased or decreased, the tilt direction may be reversed. For example, when the telescopic actuator 13671 is extended to a predetermined position, the tilt direction is rightward (for example, the state shown in FIG. 58(b)). A state in which there is no inclination (that is, a state in which the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack coincides with the direction of the linear motion of the second rack 364, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(c). state), and the direction of the inclination is leftward. As a result, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing spring 366 to the second rack 364 is changed (reversed) according to the state of the second rack 364 (for example, its posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). Adjustments can be made.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the side surface of the second rack 15364 (left side surface in FIG. 60) is formed as a flat surface, and the side surface of the second rack 15364 and the first restricting portion 15331g are not engaged with each other. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a concave portion that can be engaged with the first restricting portion 15331g (for example, corresponding to the concave portion 16681 in the sixteenth embodiment) may be formed on the side surface of the second rack 15364. good. As a result, as in the sixteenth embodiment, the linear motion of the second rack 15364 can be restricted, and the energy consumption of the drive motor 341 can be suppressed.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with the protruding pin 311a and the elongated hole 314a as an example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A game machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, comprising a movable mechanism formed so as to be deformable, wherein the movable mechanism comprises one end side of the displacement member and the other side of the displacement member. A game machine A1 characterized in that it is interposed in at least one place between the end side.

Here, one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, a long displacement member constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving force is applied to the displacement member. There is known a game machine provided with driving means for giving (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). According to this game machine, the one side member and the other side member are formed so as to be able to guide the one longitudinal direction side of the displacement member and the other longitudinal direction side of the displacement member, respectively, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. , the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

However, in a structure in which one side in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member is separately guided by the one side member and the other side in the longitudinal direction is separately guided by the other side member, as in the above-described game machine, guidance by the one side member and guidance by the other side member However, there is a problem that it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member because the displacement member is likely to be misaligned with the guide of the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, a deformable movable mechanism is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving means from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member.

The displacement direction of the displacement member is not limited. Alternatively, it may be displaced along an oblique direction between the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, as the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, for example, there is a difference in the guiding speed of the displacement member between the one-side member side and the other-side member side, or A case where a difference occurs in the guiding directions (phases) of the two, or a case where a difference occurs between the two is exemplified. Since the same applies to the following, the description thereof is omitted.

A game machine A2 in the game machine A1, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed by including the guide groove and the guided portion guided along the guide groove, so the structure of the movable mechanism can be simplified. can be In addition, since the movable amount and movable direction of the movable mechanism can be arbitrarily set according to the shape (contour) of the guide groove, it is suitable for the mode of deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It is easy to construct a movable mechanism.

The guide groove may be a through hole or a groove as long as the inner wall surface can guide the guided portion. Also, the guided portion may have a shape that can be displaced and/or rotated within the guide groove, and examples thereof include a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, a polygonal cross section, or an elliptical cross section. The guide groove may allow only the rotation of the guided portion. That is, the guide grooves are not limited to straight lines, curved lines, or a combination thereof, and may be formed in a circular or polygonal shape that allows only the rotation of the guided portion. good.

A game machine A3 in the game machine A2, wherein the guide groove of the movable mechanism is formed in an elongated hole shape elongated in a direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the guide groove of the movable mechanism is an elongated hole in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member (that is, the direction perpendicular to the displacement direction of the displacement member). Since it is formed into a shape, the guided part can be easily displaced (easily guided) along the guide groove, and the deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the other side member can be effectively corrected by the movable mechanism. can be absorbed into

It is preferable that the groove width of the guide groove (the width in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole) is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guided portion. The direction in which the guided portion is displaced (guided) along the guide groove can be regulated to the direction connecting the one-side member and the other-side member, thereby reducing the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. This is because the absorption by the movable mechanism can be stabilized.

A game machine A4 in the game machine A3, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with a plurality of the guide grooves.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the movable mechanism has a plurality of elongated guide grooves extending in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. can be ensured, and rattling and wobbling can be suppressed when the displacement member is displaced.

In addition, if the plurality of guide grooves is elongated in the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member, the positions of the start and end of each guide groove are along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member. may be different for each. In other words, as long as the guide grooves are formed parallel to each other, their arrangement positions may differ along the direction connecting the one side member and the other side member.

The game machine A5 of the game machine A1 is characterized in that the movable mechanism comprises a ball joint comprising a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the movable mechanism is formed with a ball joint comprising a spherical ball portion and a socket portion that makes spherical contact with the ball portion, so that the movable mechanism can be smoothly operated. It can be deformed, and can stably absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member. Moreover, since the movable mechanism can be deformed in all directions, it is possible to absorb the deviation regardless of the direction of deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member.

A game machine A6 in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, wherein the movable mechanism is formed with an elastic body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, since the movable mechanism is provided with the elastic body, the deformation of the elastic body causes the guidance by the one side member and the other side member. In addition to being able to absorb the misalignment caused by the guide by the elastic body, the movable mechanism can be returned to the initial position by the elastic recovery force of the elastic body. Further, when the elastic body is made of an elastomer, the viscosity characteristics (damping effect) of the elastic body can be utilized to quickly converge the vibration of the movable mechanism (displacement member), thereby suppressing the occurrence of the deviation described above. .

Examples of elastic bodies include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). Further, the movable mechanism including the guide groove and the guided portion and the movable mechanism including the ball joint may be formed further including an elastic body. As a result, the function of returning to the initial position and the function of facilitating convergence of vibration can be further added to the movable mechanism.

A game machine A7 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the movable mechanism has a restricting means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, since it is provided with a restricting means for restricting deformation exceeding a predetermined amount, there is a gap between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. It is possible to prevent damage due to excessive deformation of the movable mechanism when absorbing the deviation that occurs.

When the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion, the restricting means restricts deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by constraining the guided portion to the inner wall surface (for example, the terminal end) of the guide groove. and one that restricts the deformation of the movable mechanism by a predetermined amount or more by abutting one and the other of the deformable members that are separated by interposition of the movable mechanism.

A game machine A8 in any one of the game machines A1 to A7, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed at two positions between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the movable mechanism is interposed in two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, so that the one side member When a deviation occurs between the guidance by the other side member and the guidance by the other side member, one of the movable mechanisms interposed at two locations deforms according to the guidance state by the one side member, and the other is the other side member It can be deformed according to the guidance state by the two movable mechanisms, and the deviation can be reliably absorbed by the interlocking of the two movable mechanisms. Therefore, it is possible to stably displace the displacement member, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the load on the driving means from becoming excessive and stoppage of the displacement member.

In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is driven by the driving means at one end and driven at the other end, and the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are deformed in mutually different modes. A game machine A9 to play.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and the other end side of the displacement member is driven along with the driving (single-side drive). The number of means can be set to 1, and compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member respectively, the product cost is can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where there is a tendency for misalignment to occur between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the game machine A8, each of the two movable mechanisms has a deformation mode suitable for the driving side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. It can be responsible for aspects. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations in the gaming machine A9 are different in at least one of a permissible amount of deformation and a direction of deformation.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations are different from each other in at least one of the allowable amount of deformation and the deformation direction. can be responsible for a deformation mode suitable for the drive side and a deformation mode suitable for the driven side. For example, the amount of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driving side is made larger (or smaller) than the amount of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driven side, or the direction of deformation allowed in the movable mechanism on the driving side is set to the driven side. It can be a direction different from the deformation direction allowed by the movable mechanism. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

As an aspect of the game machine A10, for example, one movable mechanism has a shaft-shaped guided portion supported by a circular guide groove and only rotation is permitted, and the other movable mechanism has an elongated hole-shaped portion. A shaft-shaped guided portion is slidably inserted into the guide groove and is allowed to be displaced along the extending direction of the guide groove, or the guide grooves of both movable mechanisms are formed in an elongated hole shape. However, since the extending directions are different from each other, there is exemplified a mode in which the sliding directions of the guided portions are different between one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism.

A gaming machine A11 in the gaming machine A9, characterized in that the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations have mutually different forces required to deform by a unit amount.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, the movable mechanisms interposed at the two locations differ in the force required to deform by a unit amount. Each of the mechanisms can be responsible for a variant suitable for the driving side and a variant suitable for the driven side. For example, the movable mechanism on the drive side can be made easier (or harder to deform) than the movable mechanism on the driven side. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member as a whole. Therefore, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with the one-sided drive, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stopping of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In addition, as a mode of the gaming machine A11, for example, when both movable mechanisms are formed with elastic bodies of the same type or different types, one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism deform the elastic bodies. The flexibility (hardness if the elastic body is an elastomer, spring constant if the elastic body is an elastic spring) is different from each other, or both movable mechanisms are formed with the same type of elastic body, but the elasticity For example, one movable mechanism and the other movable mechanism have different body sizes (dimensions such as cross-sectional area).

In the game machine A8, the game machine A12 is characterized in that the one end side and the other end side of the displacement member are driven by different drive means.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, one end side and the other end side are driven by different driving means (double-sided drive), so the structure is driven by one driving means (single-sided drive). As compared with , the shared load of the driving means can be reduced, so that the size of the displacement member can be increased or the displacement speed of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

In such a double-sided drive structure, it is difficult to completely synchronize the driving of one end of the displacement member and the driving of the other end, and there is a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the other-side member. , and the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable. On the other hand, as in the present invention, by interposing the movable mechanism in two places between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, it becomes possible to adopt a double-sided drive structure for the first time. It has become possible to increase the size of the displacement member or speed up the displacement speed of the displacement member while ensuring the stabilization of the displacement of the member.

In addition, in the game machine A12, "different drive means" is the same as "two drive means". Therefore, the configuration (type (for example, brush motor, brushless motor, stepping motor, etc.) of the driving means itself, characteristics (for example, torque vs. current characteristics, torque vs. rotation speed characteristics, etc.), capacity (for example, rated output, etc.), etc. ) may have the same configuration or may have different configurations. The same applies to the following.

The displacement member is driven at one end by the drive means and driven at the other end, and the movable mechanism is located at one point between the one end and the other end of the displacement member, A game machine A13 characterized in that the displacement member is biased toward either the one end side or the other end side of the longitudinal center of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A13, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the drive means, and along with the drive, the other end side of the displacement member is driven. drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced. Similarly, since the movable mechanism is interposed only in one place, the product cost can be reduced compared to the case where it is interposed in two places.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Guidance by the member and guidance by the other side member tend to be misaligned. As a result, it is possible to effectively absorb the deviation that occurs between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member as a whole. Therefore, even with a one-side drive and one movable mechanism, the displacement member can be stably displaced, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stoppage of the displacement member can be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, a second displacement member is disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member, and the displacement member has the driving means at the one end side. and the other end side is driven by and the second displacement member is displaced, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is biased toward one end side or the other end side from the longitudinal center of the displacement member. Characterized game machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, one end side of the displacement member is driven by the driving means, and along with the drive, the other end side of the displacement member is driven. drive), the number of drive means can be set to 1, compared with a structure (double-sided drive) in which the number of drive means is set to 2 in order to drive one end side and the other end side of the displacement member, respectively. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

In this case, in the one-side drive structure, the state of the one end side (driving side), which is the driven side, and the state of the other end side (driven side), which is the driven side, are different from each other. Where misalignment is likely to occur between the guidance by the member and the guidance by the other side member, according to the game machine A14, by displacing the second displacement member, the center of gravity of the displacement member is shifted from the center in the longitudinal direction of the displacement member. Since it can be biased to one end side or the other end side (that is, the driving side or the driven side), such movement of the center of gravity causes a deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member to be caused by the movable mechanism. It is possible to form an easy-to-absorb state. As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced even with one-sided driving, and as a result, excessive load on the driving means and stoppage of the displacement member can be suppressed.

As a mode for changing the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member by the displacement of the second displacement member, for example, the center of gravity of the displacement member may While the position is brought closer (or farther) to the drive side (one end side), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of driving of the displacement member by the drive means, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer to the driven side (the other end side). (or away), or while the displacement member is displaced on the outward path, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member is brought closer (or farther) to the drive side (one end side), while the displacement member is displaced on the return path. is exemplified by moving the position of the center of gravity of the displacement member toward (or away from) the driven side (the other end side). The latter form is particularly effective when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced (raised and lowered) along the vertical direction (gravitational direction). That is, for example, focusing on the one end side, the state in which the one end side is guided by the one side member changes depending on whether the one end side is guided by the one side member during the upward movement in which the movement is displaced against gravity or in the downward movement in which the displacement is assisted by gravity. Being able to change the position of the center of gravity according to the state is effective for proper functioning of the movable mechanism. The same applies to the other end side.

The second displacement member may be slidably displaced along the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, or may be a rotating body formed to be rotatable and eccentric to the center of rotation. and the like. The trajectory of slide displacement is exemplified by a straight line, a curved line, a combination thereof, and the like.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A14, a second displacement member disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member; and a restricting means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism. A gaming machine A15 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine A15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A14, the second displacement member is disposed on the displacement member and formed to be relatively displaceable with respect to the displacement member. An effect can be performed by displacing the second displacement member. In this case, since the movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, when the second displacement member is displaced, the displacement member rattles due to the deformation of the movable mechanism, and the second displacement member is displaced. There is a risk of obstruction. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A15, since the restricting means for restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism is provided, the displacement of the movable mechanism is restricted and the second displacement member is restrained from rattling. It can be displaced in a stable state.

The second displacement member may be, for example, a rotary body rotatably disposed on the displacement member, a slide body slidably displaced with respect to the displacement member, or a shaft rotatably supported on the displacement member. An example is a rocking body that rocks and displaces the other end side around the one end side that is formed.

In the gaming machine A15, when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to create a state in which deformation of the movable mechanism is regulated. A game machine A16 characterized by forming.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A15, the regulating means acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, thereby reducing the movement of the movable mechanism. Since the state in which the deformation is restricted is formed, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be restricted using the displacement of the displacement member. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a mode of the restricting means that acts on at least one of the displacement member and the movable mechanism to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, one side member, the other side member, or one of them A first engaging member is formed on the base member to which the side member and the other side member are attached, and a second engaging member engageable with the first engaging portion is formed on the displacement member, and the displacement member is When the movable mechanism is displaced to the end of the displacement, the first engaging member and the second engaging member are engaged to restrict the displacement of the displacing member, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. Secondly, an insertion member is formed in the one side member, the other side member, or the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, the movable mechanism Thirdly, the form in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by inserting the insertion member into the gap between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition is the one side member, the other side member or A first magnet is arranged on the base member to which the one side member and the other side member are attached, and a second magnet is arranged on the displacement member, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of its displacement, , the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby restricting the displacement of the displacement member and restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism. When it is formed from the guide portion, a concave portion is provided in the inner wall surface of the guide groove, and when the displacement member is displaced to the end of the displacement, the guided portion is fitted into the concave portion of the guide groove, A form in which deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted is exemplified. In the third mode, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

The gaming machine A15 comprises a third displacement member that is displaceable between a retracted position and a predetermined position, and the regulation means is such that the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position acts on the displacement member. and a game machine A17 characterized by forming a state in which deformation of said movable mechanism is regulated.

According to the game machine A17, in addition to the effects of the game machine A15, since the third displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable between the retracted position and the predetermined position, an effect is produced by displacing the third displacement member. It can be carried out. In this case, the restriction means forms a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted by the action of the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position on the displacement member. , the deformation of the movable mechanism can be regulated. That is, there is no need to separately provide a driving means for restricting deformation of the movable mechanism, and the driving means for displacing the third displacement member can also be used as the driving means for causing the restricting means to function. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

As a mode of the restricting means that acts on the displacement member to form a state in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted, for example, first, the third displacement member displaced to a predetermined position contacts the displacement member. Secondly, part of the third displacement member displaced to the predetermined position is separated by the interposition of the movable mechanism. Thirdly, the third displacement member is provided with a first magnet, A second magnet is disposed in the displacement member, and when the third displacement member is displaced to a predetermined position, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel each other, thereby displacing the displacement member. A mode in which the deformation of the movable mechanism is restricted is exemplified, respectively. In the third mode, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material).

In particular, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the third displacement member comprises a plurality of ring-forming members, and when displaced to a predetermined position, the plurality of ring-forming members coalesce to form the ring-shaped body. It is preferably formed and formed such that the annular body surrounds the second displacement member (ie, the annular body is disposed around the second displacement member). Thus, in the first embodiment, the inner peripheral side of the annular body formed by the annular forming member abuts the outer peripheral side of the second displacement member from all sides, thereby restricting the deformation of the movable mechanism and Positioning (centering) of the two displacement members can also be performed. The same applies to the third embodiment.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using, as an Example, the Biasing Spring 366 that Biases the Second Rack 364 Nonparallel>
A game machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means, wherein a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member; and an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack, wherein the direction of the urging force applied from the urging means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. B1.

Here, a game machine is known in which a driving force of a driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace a displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-28226). In this case, for example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it. Therefore, it is also possible to provide an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack, and to assist the driving force of the driving means with the urging force of the urging means.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the game machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (directly), it is guided along the guide mechanism. A predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (ie, the rack rattles toward and away from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of driving force becomes unstable. In particular, in a structure in which the urging force of the urging means is applied along the direction of direct movement of the rack, the urging force of the urging means acts as a force that encourages the unsteady posture of the rack.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member and the biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack are provided. Since the direction of the biasing force is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, the biasing force of the biasing means can act as a force in the direction of pressing the rack against the guide mechanism that guides the rack. As a result, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of turbulence in its posture. Furthermore, since the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the direction of linear motion of the rack, even if the rack's attitude changes once, it will not change its attitude. As the force in the direction of convergence, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied. Therefore, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

A game machine B2 in the game machine B1, wherein the biasing means is formed of an elastic body.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of an elastic body, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack can be adjusted to the linear movement direction of the rack. can simplify the structure for making them non-parallel. Moreover, if the elastic body is used, it is possible to continuously apply an urging force according to the displacement of the rack, so that the rack can be stably urged.

Examples of elastic bodies include elastomers (rubber-like elastic bodies, urethane, etc.) and elastic springs (coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, etc.). For example, an elastic body is formed from a belt-like or string-like rubber-like elastic body (rubber band) or a metal coil spring, and its longitudinal direction (stretching direction) is set to be non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. At the same time, by connecting one end to the rack and the other end to the base member, respectively, it is possible to achieve simplification of the structure and stable biasing (application of continuous biasing force).

A gaming machine B3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and arranged in a bent posture.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or a long elastomer and is arranged in a bent posture. It is possible to easily secure a sufficient space, and accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design and secure the biasing force. That is, in order to secure the biasing force of the elastic body, it is necessary to lengthen the length of the elastic body. It becomes difficult to secure installation space. On the other hand, according to the game machine B3, since the elastic body is arranged in a bent posture, the length dimension of the elastic body is lengthened, and interference with other members is avoided while securing the biasing force. As a result, a space for arranging the elastic body can be secured.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that part or all of the elastic body is curved. Examples include a shape in which a portion is connected with a curved portion (i.e., a “<” shape in which the bent portion is rounded), and a shape in which the entirety is curved (i.e., “C” shape). be done.

A gaming machine B4, wherein the urging means in the gaming machine B1 is formed of a magnet.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, since the biasing means is formed of magnets, a stable biasing force can be applied to the rack over a long period of time. That is, while the elastic body is subject to deterioration (settling) as the rack is repeatedly operated and the urging force is changed, by using a magnet as in the game machine B4, the urging force can be maintained for a long period of time. can be constant. As a result, the effect of making the direction of the biasing force non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack can be stably exhibited over a long period of time.

When the urging means is formed of magnets, a first magnet is arranged on the rack, and a second magnet is arranged on the locus of movement of the rack. A configuration is exemplified in which the two magnets attract or repel each other to apply a biasing force to the rack. In this case, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be a member made of iron (ferromagnetic material). Also, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

In the gaming machine B4, the biasing means divides the range in which the rack moves linearly into a range in which a biasing force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack and a range in which the biasing force applied to the rack is equal to or less than the reference value. A game machine B5 characterized by forming.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the urging means has a range in which an urging force exceeding a reference value is applied to the rack in the range in which the rack moves linearly, and an urging force applied to the rack. Since a range is formed in which the force is equal to or less than the reference value, the urging force applied to the rack can be an urging force suitable for the state of the rack.

For example, in the first range, by applying an urging force that exceeds the reference value to the rack, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and the occurrence of erratic posture is suppressed, while in the second range By setting the biasing force applied to the rack to a reference value or less, it is possible to reduce the biasing force (magnetic force) acting as resistance to the driving of the rack, thereby suppressing the energy consumption of the driving means.

In this case, the first magnet is arranged on the rack, and the range (first range) where the second magnet is arranged and the second magnet are arranged on the movement locus of the rack. is not provided (second range), and when the rack (first magnet) passes through the first range, the first magnet and the second magnet attract or repel By matching, a biasing force exceeding the reference value is applied to the rack, while when the rack (first magnet) passes through the second range, the magnet that interacts with the first magnet A configuration in which no urging force is applied to the rack (or the applied urging force is set to a reference value or less) is exemplified by the non-existence (or small effect). As described above, either the first magnet or the second magnet may be made of iron (ferromagnetic material) in this case as well. Also, as in the case described above, the number of the first magnets and the second magnets (including iron members) is arbitrary, and may be one or more.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a direction in which a force component is generated to bring the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B6 to play.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that brings the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion. is generated, the gap between the tooth flank of the rack and the tooth flank of the pinion can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the tooth flanks suppresses the occurrence of a time lag when the driving force is transmitted from the pinion to the rack (or vice versa), thereby improving the responsiveness and preventing the collision between the tooth flanks at the initial stage of meshing. Acceleration of wear of the tooth flank and damage to the tooth flank can be suppressed. Further, even when the tooth flanks are worn, the gap between the tooth flanks can be reduced, so that the meshing state between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized.

In any one of game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack by the biasing means is a direction in which a force component is generated to separate the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B5, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is a force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion. Since it is in the direction of generating It is possible to suppress the resistance when transmitting the driving force to.

In any one of game machines B1 to B7, in the range in which the rack linearly moves, a force component is applied to bring the tooth surface of the rack closer to the tooth surface of the pinion in the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means. A first range in which the force is generated, and a second range in which the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack by the biasing means is the direction in which the force component that separates the tooth surface of the rack from the tooth surface of the pinion is generated. A game machine B8 characterized in that and are formed.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack can be changed within the range in which the rack moves linearly. The meshing state of the rack and pinion can be changed to an optimum state according to the state of the displacement member, rack or driving means.

For example, by applying the first range to the initial stage of the transitional state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage of starting the displacement of the displacement member), the tooth flanks are brought closer to each other and the driving force is While aiming to improve the responsiveness in the transmission of the second range, the second range is applied to the stage where the transmission of the driving force is stable and has reached a steady state (that is, the stage where the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed) By doing so, it is possible to separate the tooth flanks and suppress the resistance.

Alternatively, the opposite may be done. That is, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the transmission of the driving force is started (that is, the stage of starting displacement of the displacement member), the inertial force is large due to the start of displacement of the displacement member in the stopped state. When the load on the drive means increases, applying the second range to such an initial stage separates the tooth flanks and suppresses the resistance, thereby suppressing the load on the drive means. On the other hand, when the transmission of the driving force is stabilized and becomes a steady state (that is, when the displacement member is displaced at a constant speed), the displacement speed of the displacement member increases. When the influence of rattling is transmitted to the displacement member and the stable displacement of the displacement member is hindered, by applying the first range to such a stage, the tooth flanks are brought close to each other, and the rattling of the rack can be prevented. , the displacement can be stabilized even when the displacement speed of the displacement member is high. In particular, the latter configuration is a structure in which a long displacement member installed between the one-side member and the other-side member is guided by the one-side member and the other-side member at one end side and the other end side, respectively, and is displaced. becomes effective in

In any one of the game machines B1 to B8, a one-side member and the other-side member are arranged at a predetermined interval, and the displacement member is bridged between the one-side member and the other-side member so as to extend between the one-side member and the other-side member. A gaming machine B9 characterized in that one end side and the other end side are guided and displaced by the member and the other side member, respectively.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B8, one side member and the other side member are arranged at a predetermined interval, and between the one side member and the other side member One end side and the other end side are guided by the one side member and the other side member, respectively, and the displacement member is displaced. It is possible to effectively exhibit the effect by making it non-parallel to.

Here, in such a structure, if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the displacement of the displacement member becomes unstable, and not only does the load on the driving means become excessive, but also the displacement member may lead to the suspension of In other words, in the conventional product in which the posture of the rack tends to fluctuate, the fluctuation of the rack causes a deviation between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member, resulting in unstable displacement of the displacement member. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack, so that the rack is less likely to rattle. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a violent attitude. Further, even if the attitude of the rack fluctuates once, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied as a force in the direction of converging the fluctuation of the attitude. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized by suppressing the deviation between the guide by the one-side member and the other-side member due to the rampage of the rack.

A gaming machine B9 comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. B10.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, if the movable mechanism functions when the displacement member is displaced, the deformation of the movable mechanism acts on the rack as an external force, causing the rack to rattle. . As a result, the attitude of the rack fluctuates, causing destabilization of meshing between the rack and the pinion and deterioration of durability. On the other hand, according to the game machine B9, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. By the biasing force applied from the biasing means, it is possible to oppose the rack, thereby making it difficult for the rack to rattle. As a result, it is possible to suppress the attitude of the rack from becoming unstable, stabilize the engagement between the rack and the pinion, and improve the durability.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking, as an Example, the Biasing Spring 366 Arranged in a Bent Posture>
a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member and an urging means, wherein the urging means is arranged in a bent posture.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, biasing means having one end connected to the target member and the other end connected to the base member, and biasing means A gaming machine is known that includes an opposing member that is sandwiched between and arranged to face the base member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-28226). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure the urging force because the space in which the urging means can be arranged is limited. That is, in order to secure the biasing force of the biasing means, it is necessary to secure a sufficient length dimension, but it is necessary to dispose the biasing means while avoiding interference with other members. It was difficult to make the length dimension long enough.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture, interference with other members can be avoided and the arrangement can be facilitated, so that a sufficient length can be secured. It is possible to easily secure the urging force.

The bent posture of the elastic body means that part or all of the elastic body is curved. Examples include a shape in which a portion is connected with a curved portion (i.e., a “<” shape in which the bent portion is rounded), and a shape in which the entirety is curved (i.e., “C” shape). be done.

In the game machine C1, an opposing member is arranged to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, and the opposing member has an opening formed in a region including at least one of one end and the other end of the biasing member. A gaming machine C2 characterized by comprising an opening.

Here, when arranging the urging means in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the installation space, but it is difficult to maintain the flexed posture. There was a problem of being caught (jumping with its own elastic recovery power). Therefore, in the assembly process, while pressing the biasing means with one hand so that the biasing means maintains its bent posture, the other hand connects the biasing means to the target member or the base member. It was necessary and complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, it is provided with a facing member arranged opposite to the base member across the biasing means, and the facing member has one end of the biasing member or Since the opening is formed in a region including at least one of the other ends, even after connecting one of the ends of the urging means and arranging the opposing member, the opening of the opposing member can be opened. One end or the other of the other ends of the biasing means can be connected via. That is, by arranging the opposing member to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, it is possible to prevent the biasing means from being repelled. As a result, the work of connecting the other of the one end and the other end of the urging means can be facilitated, and the assembling work can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the opposing member is arranged to face the base member with the biasing means interposed therebetween, the opening formed in the opposing member allows the distance between the opposing member and the biasing means to be increased accordingly. can be suppressed to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing means from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the target member. In addition, even if one material has a lower strength than the other, such as when the biasing means is made of a metal coil spring and the opposing member is made of a resin material, these It is possible to suppress the wear of one member due to sliding and the dust generated by the wear from entering mechanical movable parts and electronic devices such as sensors and giving adverse effects.

In the gaming machine C2, the facing member has the openings in a region including one end and a region including the other end of the urging member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the opposing member is formed with openings in the regions including one end and the other end of the biasing member. The opposing member can be left at the bent portion of the . Therefore, the facing member can press the portion necessary for maintaining the bent posture of the biasing means while maximizing the formation area of the opening. As a result, simplification of assembly work and suppression of sliding resistance and generation of dust can be effectively achieved.

In the game machine C3, the opposing member is a communication path that communicates an opening formed in a region including one end of the biasing means and an opening formed in a region including the other end of the biasing means. and the communication path is formed as an opening of a size through which the biasing means can pass, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the biasing means disposed in the bent posture. A gaming machine C4 characterized by the following:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the opening formed in the area including one end of the biasing means and the opening formed in the area including the other end of the biasing means A communication path is provided, and the communication path is formed as an opening of a size that allows the urging means to pass through, and is bent outward from the bent portion of the urging means arranged in a bent posture. First, one end and the other end of the urging means are connected to the target member or the base member through respective openings of the opposing member, and then through respective openings and communicating passages of the opposing member. , the biasing means can be arranged between the opposed members of the base member and the opposing member (i.e., after both ends of the biasing means can be fixed, a bent posture can be formed), thereby repelling the biasing means. This urging means can be easily arranged in a bent posture while suppressing the movement.

The gaming machine C5, which is the gaming machine C1, is characterized by comprising a stop plate member arranged opposite to the base member across the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture.

Here, when arranging the urging means in a bent posture, it is possible to easily secure the installation space, but it is difficult to maintain the flexed posture. There was a problem of being caught (jumping with its own elastic recovery power). Therefore, in the assembly process, while pressing the biasing means with one hand so that the biasing means maintains its bent posture, the other hand connects the biasing means to the target member or the base member. It was necessary and complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, a stop plate member is provided so as to face the base member across the bent portion of the urging means arranged in the bent posture. Therefore, first, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to the target member or the base member, respectively, and then the intermediate portion of the biasing means is locked to the stop plate member (the base member and the stop plate member face each other). (i.e., after fixing both ends of the biasing means, a bent posture can be formed), thereby suppressing the biasing means from being repelled, while allowing such biasing means to be bent. It can be easily arranged in a posture. Therefore, simplification of assembly work can be achieved.

Furthermore, the region where the stop plate member faces is only the bent portion of the biasing means, and the region other than the bent portion of the biasing means is open, thereby suppressing sliding when the biasing means is elastically deformed. to reduce the occurrence of resistance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the elastic deformation of the biasing means from being hindered, so that the biasing force can be stably applied to the target member. In addition, since the area other than the bent portion of the biasing means is open, the mating member wears due to sliding, and the dust generated due to the wear is generated by mechanical moving parts and electronic devices such as sensors. It can be suppressed that it enters and gives an adverse effect.

In the game machine C5, a rotary contact member is formed to be rotatable and the outer peripheral surface thereof is formed to contact the biasing means, and the biasing means is positioned between the one end and the other end. A portion of the stop plate member abuts against the outer peripheral surface of the rotary abutment member, so that the stop plate member is disposed in a bent posture, and the stop plate member extends radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the rotary abutment member in a flange shape. A game machine C6 characterized in that it is formed integrally with the rotary abutment member as a protruding flange.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, the rotating abutting member is rotatably formed to abut the outer peripheral surface of the urging means in order to make the urging means into a bent posture. When the biasing means is elastically deformed (e.g., stretched), the rotary abutment member and stop plate member (flange) can be rotated with the elastic deformation, so that the elastic deformation of the biasing means is smooth. can be done. That is, in order to bend the biasing means, a member (corresponding to a rotating contact member) contacting the biasing means and the biasing member are restrained so as not to be repelled (they do not jump by their own elastic recovery force). As compared with the case where the holding member (corresponding to the stopping plate member) is fixed, the sliding resistance generated between it and the biasing means can be suppressed. Moreover, since the sliding can be reduced, it is possible to suppress the wear due to the sliding and the adverse effects of the dust generated due to the wear.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a displacement contact member is disposed displaceably on the base member and formed to contact the biasing means, and the displacement contact member is adapted to the biasing means. A gaming machine C7 characterized in that the biasing means is disposed in a bent posture by being displaced while being in contact with a portion between the one end and the other end of the means.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C6, the displacement contact member is provided displaceably on the base member, and the displacement contact member is connected to one end of the urging means. By being displaced while being in contact with a portion between the other end, the biasing means is arranged in a bent posture, so that the work of assembling the biasing means can be facilitated. That is, first, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to the target member or the base member, respectively, and then the displacement abutment member is displaced, whereby the biasing means can be in a bent posture. Therefore, since a bent posture can be formed after both ends of the biasing means are fixed, it is possible to easily dispose the biasing means in a bent posture while suppressing repulsion of the biasing means. .

In the gaming machine C7, the base member includes guide means for guiding the displacement contact member, and the guide means includes a first guide portion extending in a direction in which the biasing means is in a bent posture, A game machine C8 characterized by comprising a second guide part that is folded back from the terminal end side of the guide part and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the guide means for guiding the displacement member includes the first guide part extending in the direction in which the biasing means is bent and the end of the first guide part. and a second guide part that is folded back from the side and extends in a direction that weakens the bent posture of the biasing means. By arranging the displacement abutment member on the second guide portion of the guide means, the displacement abutment member is held against the terminal end of the second guide portion by the elastic recovery force of the urging means. be able to. That is, the urging force of the urging means can be used not only for urging the target member but also for holding (fixing) the displacement contact member. There is no need to separately prepare fastening screws, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C8, a pair of the target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, and one end of the biasing means is directly attached to one of the pair of target members. A gaming machine C9 characterized in that the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member A pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member, and the pair of target members are each biased by a separate biasing means. According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, each target member is urged by a separate urging means. However, there was a problem that variations occurred in the thickness.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C9, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the biasing means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when two biasing means are provided, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in the characteristics of each biasing means (such as dimensional tolerance). By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, variation in displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

In this case, the pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be arranged on separate base members. It may be in the form of

In addition, the game machine C9 includes one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and a one end side and the other side member that are installed between the one side member and the other side member and are connected to the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the game machine G1 to a configuration that guides one end side of the displacement member and a configuration that guides the other end side of the displacement member. In such a game machine, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member due to the tendency of misalignment between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member. By applying , the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement between them can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the other side of the displacement member can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the deviation.

In the game machine C9, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member by being brought into contact with the connection member, and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained. Gaming machine C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9, the intermediate portion of the urging means whose one end and the other end are respectively connected to the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as the base. An urging force is applied to the member so as to maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, so that the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, such temporary fixing can improve the work efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. In addition, since the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the target member but also for fixing the connecting member to the base member, a member (for example, , fastening screws) are not required to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

In any one of game machines C1 to C10, a displacement abutment member displaceably disposed on the base member and abutted against the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means; and a contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the contact member, wherein the displacement contact member is displaced by the driving force of the contact member driving means, whereby the bending state of the biasing means can be changed. A gaming machine C11 characterized by:

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine C10 is displaceably disposed on the base member and abuts on the biasing means to form a bent posture of the biasing means. A displacement contact member and contact member driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement contact member are provided. Since the bent state can be changed, the biasing state of the biasing means can be adjusted to a more appropriate one according to the state of the target member to which the biasing force is applied.

As for the displacement direction of the displacement contact member, firstly, the direction connecting one end of the biasing means (the position where it is connected to the target member) and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the direction connecting the one end of the biasing means Secondly, the distance between one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member is not changed, and the one end of the urging means and the displacement contact member do not change. , thirdly, and a combination of the first and second directions are exemplified.

In the case of the first direction, the preload of the biasing means (the load applied to the biasing means in the assembled state) can be increased without changing the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member. You can adjust the size. That is, the apparent spring constant of the biasing means can be adjusted (increased or decreased). Therefore, the magnitude of the biasing force applied by the biasing means according to the amount of displacement of the target member from the reference position is controlled according to the state of the target member (for example, posture, displacement speed, or displacement position). be able to. For example, when the target member is at the upper end position, the preload of the biasing means is increased so that the force required to maintain the target member at the upper end position is assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means, while the target member is at the upper end position. When displacing, the preload of the biasing means can be reduced to suppress the biasing force of the biasing means from acting as resistance when displacing the target member.

In the case of the second direction, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be changed without changing the magnitude of the preload of the biasing means. Therefore, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be switched between the direction matching the displacement direction of the target member and the non-parallel direction, or the degree of non-parallelism can be increased or decreased by changing the direction of the target member. It can be controlled according to the state (for example, attitude, displacement speed, or displacement position). For example, in the initial stage of the transitional state when the target member starts to displace, the behavior of the target member becomes unstable. On the other hand, in the steady state stage where the displacement speed of the target member reaches a constant value, the behavior of the target member is stabilized, and the degree of making the direction of the biasing force non-parallel is reduced to reduce the resistance. Thus, the energy required to drive the target member can be suppressed.

The configuration of the gaming machine C11 is particularly effective when the target member is formed as a rack meshed with the pinion. This is because the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member can be changed, so that the meshing state (meshing state) between the pinion and the rack can be controlled.

In addition, in the game machine C11, the case where the displacement contact member is driven by the driving force of the contact member driving means has been explained, but such contact member driving means is omitted, and the displacement contact member is elastically supported so as to be displaceable. can be In this case, the displacement contact member is displaced according to the state of the object member, and the preload and/or the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means can be adjusted. The member can be returned to its initial position. As an elastic support structure, for example, an elastic body is connected to a displacement abutting member that is displaceable along a guide groove provided in a base member, and the elastic deformation of the elastic body displaces the displacement abutting member and the initial displacement. A structure that enables return to a position, an outer cylinder of a bush that connects the inner cylinder and the outer cylinder with a rubber-like elastic body, is disposed on the base member, and a displacement contact member is disposed on the inner cylinder, A structure that enables the displacement and return to the initial position of the displacement contact member by elastic deformation of the bush is exemplified. According to the latter structure, the displaceable direction of the displaceable contact member is not limited to one direction, so the displacement direction of the displaceable contact member can be set to the third direction described above.

Alternatively, the contact member driving means may be omitted, and the disposition position of the displaceable contact member may be manually adjustable. In this case, the preload or (and ) the direction of the biasing force can be adjusted. As a structure for manually adjusting the arrangement position of the displacement contact member, for example, the displacement contact member can be displaced along a guide groove provided in the base member, and the displacement contact member is fixed to the guide groove. A structure that adjusts the preload etc. according to the position where the displacement contact member is installed, and a plurality of support holes for attaching and detaching the displacement contact member are provided in the base member, and the preload etc. are adjusted according to the position of the support hole in which the displacement contact member is arranged. A structure etc. are illustrated.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Second Rack 364 as an Example>
A game machine comprising: driving means for generating a driving force; and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means; a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member; a guide means for guiding the pinion, wherein the guide means guides the rack in a displaceable state along the tooth surface of the pinion.

Here, a game machine is known in which a driving force of a driving means is transmitted by a rack and a pinion to displace a displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-75550). Since the rack and pinion can convert rotary motion into linear motion, they are often used as a mechanism for linearly displacing a displacement member by the driving force (rotary motion) of a motor.

However, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion as in the game machine described above, there is a problem that the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack moves linearly (directly), it is guided along the guide mechanism. A predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide mechanism and the rack. (ie, the rack rattles toward and away from the pinion), the engagement with the pinion is not stable, and the transmission of driving force becomes unstable.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, it is provided with a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member, and guide means for guiding the rack, and the guide means is displaceable along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since the rack is guided in a stable state, even if the attitude of the rack becomes unstable, it is easy to maintain constant meshing between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of driving force.

The rack being displaced along the tooth flank of the pinion means that the linear tooth flank of the rack is in contact with the arc-shaped tooth flank of the pinion when viewed in the axial direction of the pinion (the straight line of the rack tooth flank). is tangent to the arc of the pinion tooth surface), the rack is rotated about the pinion axis.

The game machine D1 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and a portion to be guided by the guided portion. a protruding portion that is slidably inserted through the pinion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1, the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack and the shaft of the pinion. and a protruding portion that is provided and is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guided portion of the rack. By relatively rotating the installation portion, the rack can be displaced along the guided portion while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the attitude of the rack becomes violent, it is possible to easily maintain the constant engagement between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

In this case, the guiding means has the guided portion formed on the rack and the protruding portion formed in the region of the base member facing the rack, so that the guided portion and the protruding portion are arranged on the movement trajectory of the rack. can be placed in In other words, there is no need to form a portion outside the outer shape of the rack so that the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Since it can be arranged, space efficiency can be improved accordingly.

The guided portion may be a concave groove formed in the surface of the rack facing the base member, or may be an elongated opening formed in the rack. In this case, the width dimension of the guided portion is preferably constant along the longitudinal direction, and the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion is preferably circular with a diameter substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the width dimension of the guided portion. preferable. This is because it is easier to make the meshing more constant when the rack is linearly moved while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. However, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be an elliptical cross-section, a polygonal cross-section, or the like. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the projecting portion may be any shape as long as it can slide along the guided portion and rotate within the guided portion.

The gaming machine D1 includes a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft with the rack interposed therebetween and extends from the side surface of the rack. a first restricting portion capable of abutting; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. A gaming machine D3, wherein the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is set larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion.

According to the gaming machine D3, the guide means includes a first restricting portion protruding from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft with the rack interposed therebetween, and a second restricting portion for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. Therefore, when the rack is driven by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is displaced in the linear motion direction by restricting the rack from being displaced in the width direction by the first restricting portion and the second restricting portion. be able to.

In this case, the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack is greater than the amount of displacement allowed by the second restricting portion than the amount of displacement allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion. In addition to the effect of the machine D1, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. As a result, even if the attitude of the rack becomes violent, it is possible to easily maintain the constant engagement between the rack and the pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a guided portion such as a groove or an opening in the rack, the rigidity of the rack can be secured accordingly, and the durability can be improved. Further, by securing the rigidity of the rack, it is possible to suppress deformation of the rack when it is driven by the rotation of the pinion, and from this point also, it is possible to easily maintain constant meshing between the rack and the pinion.

In addition, it is preferable that the first restricting portion is a rod-shaped body projecting from the base member. This is because the rack can be easily displaced along the tooth flank of the pinion when the first contact portion abuts against the side surface of the rack to restrict the displacement of the rack. Here, examples of the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion (rod-shaped body) include a circular shape, an elliptical shape, a polygonal shape, and a shape obtained by partially combining these shapes. In this case, the cross-sectional shape of the first restricting portion is preferably such that the side surface facing (abutting) the rack is curved in an arcuate cross-sectional shape. This is because resistance can be reduced when restricting the displacement by contacting the side surface of the rack, and the displacement of the rack can be hardly hindered.

A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it comprises an urging means for applying an urging force to the rack.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, since it is provided with a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack, the biasing force is used to assist the driving force of the driving means. can do. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers a displacement member, due to the effect of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required to raise the displacement member than to lower it. By applying a biasing force to the rack, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted accordingly.

On the other hand, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement member by the rack and pinion, the transmission of the driving force tends to be unstable. That is, when the rack is guided by the guide means, a predetermined gap (tolerance) is provided between the guide means and the rack, and the posture of the rack fluctuates by the amount of the gap. In particular, in a structure in which the biasing force of the biasing means is applied to the rack, the biasing force of the biasing means acts as a force that promotes the unsteady posture of the rack. In contrast, in the present invention, the rack can be displaced in the linear motion direction while being displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, in the structure in which the biasing force is applied to the rack by the biasing means, it is possible to easily maintain constant engagement between the rack and the pinion even when the attitude of the rack is unstable, and to stabilize the transmission of driving force. can.

As the biasing means, for example, the elastic force of an elastic spring (coil spring, torsion spring, leaf spring, etc.) or elastomer (rubber-like elastic body, urethane, etc.) may be used as the biasing force, or the magnetic force of a magnet may be used. For example, it is used as an urging force.

A gaming machine D5 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the rectilinear direction of the rack.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D4, the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack. The biasing force of the biasing means can act as a force in the direction of pressing against the guide means for guiding the . As a result, the rack is made less likely to wobble, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of turbulence in its posture.

Furthermore, since the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is not parallel to the direction of linear motion of the rack, even if the rack's attitude changes once, it will not change its attitude. As the force in the direction of convergence, the biasing force of the biasing means can be applied. Therefore, the engagement between the rack and the pinion can be stabilized, and the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted.

The linear movement direction of the rack means the direction in which the rack driven by the rotation of the pinion is displaced, and is the direction along the tooth surface of the rack. In this case, in the gaming machine D5, since the rack can be displaced along the tooth surface of the pinion (the rack can rotate about the pinion axis), the linear movement direction of the rack changes according to the rotational position of the rack. be done.

A gaming machine D6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 is characterized by comprising a linear motion restricting means for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, since it is provided with a linear motion restricting means for restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction at a predetermined position in the linear motion direction, , the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced. For example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, it is necessary to resist the gravitational force acting on the displacement member in order to stop and hold the displacement member at the raised position. Since the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction can be restricted by the linear motion restricting means, the driving force required for the driving means can be reduced (or the driving can be stopped) accordingly. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the driving means when holding the displacement member at a predetermined position (for example, the raised position).

In the gaming machine D6, a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack is provided, and the linear movement restricting means is engageable with a first engaging portion formed on the rack and the first engaging portion. a second engaging portion formed on the guide means, wherein the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack; , a direction for engaging the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the linear motion restricting means includes the first engaging portion formed on the rack and the guiding means formed so as to be engageable with the first engaging portion. the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the rack is non-parallel to the linear movement direction of the rack; Since it is in the direction of engaging with the engaging portion, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be performed in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the rectilinear direction.

That is, the rack is displaceable (rotatable about the axis of the pinion) along the tooth surface of the pinion, and the biasing force of the biasing means biases the rack in the direction of displacing it along the tooth surface of the pinion. Therefore, for example, in the case where the engagement between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is formed as uneven engagement, when the rack is displaced to a predetermined position in the rectilinear direction, the unevenness and the unevenness occur. By matching the position of the rack, the rack can be rotated by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the engagement of the uneven shape (the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion) can be formed (inserting the convex into the concave). , the engagement can be maintained by the biasing force of the biasing means. On the other hand, when the pinion is driven from this state, the rack is rotated in the direction of releasing the engagement of the uneven shape while resisting the biasing force of the biasing means, thereby releasing the engagement of the uneven shape (from concave to The protrusion can be pulled out), and the rack can be displaced in the rectilinear direction.

The game machine D7 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a portion to be guided by the guided portion. a protruding portion that is slidably inserted through the pinion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion; A game machine D8 characterized in that the second engaging portion is formed by a projecting portion of the guiding means, and the second engaging portion is formed by a concave portion provided in the inner wall surface of the guided portion of the guiding means.

According to the game machine D8, the guiding means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and rotatably and slidably inserted through the guided portion and facing the pinion shaft. Since the protruding part protruding from the base member is provided at the position where the game machine D2 is located, the same effect as that of the game machine D2 can be obtained. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the direct motion restricting means is formed in the guided portion of the guide means, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. Since the second engaging portion of the means is formed by the protruding portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

The gaming machine D7 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion across the rack and extends from the side surface of the rack. a first restricting portion capable of abutting; and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting displacement of the rack in the width direction. The amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction is set larger than the amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction that is allowed between the first restricting portion and the pinion, and the direct-acting restricting means comprises the first engaging portion. The game machine D9 is characterized in that the joining portion is formed by a concave recess provided in the side surface of the rack, and the second engaging portion is formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means.

According to the game machine D9, the guide means includes a first restricting portion projecting from the base member at a position facing the pinion shaft across the rack and capable of coming into contact with the side surface of the rack, and a second restricting portion formed on the base member for restricting the displacement of the rack, wherein the amount of displacement in the width direction of the rack permitted by the second restricting portion is between the first restricting portion and the pinion Since it is made larger than the allowable amount of displacement of the rack in the width direction, the same effect as that of the gaming machine D3 is exhibited. In this case, since the first engaging portion of the direct motion restricting means is formed on the side surface of the rack, it is not necessary to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. Since the second engaging portion is formed by the second restricting portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

The game machine D6 comprises a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and the guide means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack and the guided portion. a protruding portion that is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide portion and protrudes from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion; A first engaging portion formed by deepening a portion of the recess in the guided portion is provided, and the tip end side of the projecting portion of the guiding means is formed to be engageable with the first engaging portion. A gaming machine D10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, the guiding means includes a guided portion as a recessed groove extending along the tooth surface of the rack on the rack, and a rotatable and The game machine D2 has the same effect as the game machine D2 because it is slidably inserted and has a projecting part projecting from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion. In this case, the direct-acting restricting means has a first engaging portion formed by deepening a portion of the recess in the guided portion of the guiding means, and the guiding means protrudes from the first engaging portion. Since the tip side of the portion is formed to be engageable, the engagement and disengagement of the first engaging portion and the projecting member can be performed in accordance with the displacement of the rack in the rectilinear direction.

In addition, since the first engaging portion of the direct-acting restricting means is formed by partially deepening the recessed groove (guided portion) of the rack, there is no need to enlarge the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the portion for engaging with the first engaging portion is formed by the projecting portion of the guide means, the parts can be shared and the number of parts can be reduced accordingly. As a result, miniaturization and reduction in product cost can be achieved.

In the gaming machine D11, a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in the projecting direction by a spring is provided on the tip side of the projecting portion, and the ball of the ball plunger mechanism is engaged with the first engaging portion. is preferred. This is because it is possible to smoothly engage and disengage the first engaging portion and the distal end side of the projecting portion.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D10, comprising a base member on which the rack and the pinion are arranged, and a cover member arranged to face the base member with the rack and the pinion interposed therebetween, wherein the base member and the cover member A game machine D11, wherein displacement of the rack is regulated by the facing surface of the rack, and a connecting portion connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged near the rack.

Here, the rack and the pinion are arranged on the base member, and the base member is covered with the cover member, and the opposing surfaces of the base member and the cover member are arranged in the thickness direction of the rack (i.e., the base member and the cover member). A game machine having a structure that restricts displacement in the opposing direction) is known. In this case, if the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member is unstable, the restriction of displacement in the thickness direction of the rack will be insufficient, adversely affecting the state of meshing with the pinion. However, if the number of connecting portions connecting the base member and the cover member is increased in order to stabilize the distance between the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member, the product cost will increase accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D11, since the connecting portion for connecting the base member and the cover member is arranged near the rack, the base member and the cover are arranged. It is possible to stabilize the gap mainly with respect to the region of the facing surfaces of the member that contributes to the regulation of the displacement of the rack. As a result, it is possible to suppress the number of connecting portions to be provided, reduce the product cost, and sufficiently regulate the displacement of the rack in the thickness direction, thereby stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

A game machine D12 in the gaming machine D11, wherein the rack has an opening formed as an elongated opening, and the connecting part is inserted through the opening of the rack.

According to the game machine D12, the rack is provided with an opening formed in a long hole shape, and the connecting portion is inserted through the opening of the rack, so that the base member and the cover member are connected at a position closest to the rack. can be connected by parts. Therefore, the gap can be stabilized in the region of the facing surfaces of the base member and the cover member that is most suitable for restricting the displacement of the rack. As a result, the number of connecting portions is minimized to reduce product costs, while maximizing the restriction of displacement in the thickness direction of the rack even with the fewest connecting portions to ensure the meshing state with the pinion. can be stabilized to

In the gaming machine D12, the guiding means includes a guided portion formed as an elongated opening in the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a guided portion rotatably and slidably inserted through the guided portion. and a protruding portion protruding from the base member at a position facing the shaft of the pinion, the opening being formed by the guided portion, and the connecting portion being formed by the protruding portion. A game machine D13 characterized by being formed.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12, the guiding means includes a guided portion extending from the rack along the tooth surface of the rack, and a portion rotatably and slidably guided by the guided portion. Since the game machine D2 has the same effect as that of the game machine D2, the game machine D2 has the same effect as the game machine D2. In this case, since the guided portion forms the opening and the protruding portion forms the connecting portion, it is possible to improve the space efficiency and reduce the product cost. That is, since the connecting portion is arranged by utilizing the guided portion (opening portion) formed in the rack, it is not necessary to arrange the connecting portion outside the outer shape of the rack. can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack, and space efficiency can be improved. In addition, the guided portion and the protruding portion constituting the guide means for guiding the displacement of the rack are connected to each other for fixing the base member and the cover member, and the opening for inserting the connecting portion. , the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.

A gaming machine D14 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D12 or D13, displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction is regulated by contacting the connecting portion with the terminal end of the opening.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D12 or D13, the connecting portion abuts on the terminal end of the opening, thereby restricting the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction, thereby improving the space efficiency. It is possible to reduce the product cost. For example, a structure is conceivable in which a stopper wall that abuts on the side surface of the rack is erected from the base member, and the side surface of the rack is brought into contact with the stopper wall to restrict the displacement of the rack in the linear movement direction. In the structure, the space for arranging other members outside the outer shape of the rack is reduced due to the formation of the stopper wall. On the other hand, in the game machine D14, since it is not necessary to arrange the connection part corresponding to the stopper wall outside the outer shape of the rack, other members can be arranged outside the outer shape of the rack. , space efficiency can be improved. In addition to the function of connecting and fixing the base member and the cover member, the connecting portion can also serve as a stopper function for regulating the displacement of the rack in the linear motion direction. The number of points can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine D14, the base member and the cover member are made of a resin material, and the connecting portion is erected from one of the base member and the cover member, and the standing tip side thereof is at the base member or the cover member. A game characterized in that it is fastened to the other by a metal screw, and in the state of being fastened by the screw, the metal screw is buried inside the connecting portion along the erecting direction of the connecting portion. Machine D15.

According to the game machine D15, in addition to the effects of the game machine D14, the upright leading end side of the connecting portion erected from one of the base member and the cover member is fastened to the other of the base member or the cover member with a metal screw. That is, when the base member and the cover member are connected and fixed by the connecting member, the metal screw is embedded inside the connecting portion, so that the rigidity of the connecting portion can be increased. As a result, when the connecting portion is brought into contact with the terminal end of the opening to restrict the displacement of the rack, damage to the connecting portion can be prevented and durability can be improved.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Interposed Member 370 as an Example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A game machine comprising a displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, characterized by comprising an interposition member interposed between the one side member and the other side member. Gaming machine E1.

Here, one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, a displacement member constructed between the one side member and the other side member, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. (For example, see JP-A-2014-14602). According to this game machine, the one side member and the other side member are formed so as to be able to guide the one longitudinal direction side of the displacement member and the other longitudinal direction side of the displacement member, respectively, and the driving force of the driving means is applied. , the displacement member is displaced along the one side member and the other side member.

However, in the amusement machine described above, the overall rigidity of the unit (the structure in which the displacement member is installed between the one-side member and the other-side member) is low and easily damaged, making it difficult to handle as a unit. There was a problem that Therefore, for example, in the process of transporting the unit and the process of attaching the unit to the mating member, it is necessary to handle the unit so as not to apply a large load, resulting in poor workability.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the intervening member interposed between the one side member and the other side member is provided, the entire unit can be made into a frame shape, and its rigidity can be improved. Therefore, handling in the unit state can be facilitated. Therefore, for example, in the transportation process and the mounting process, the permissible value of the load acting on the unit is relaxed, so that workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine E1, a pair of racks respectively connected to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member and disposed so as to be linearly movable to the one side member and the other side member; a pair of pinions which are joined together and rotatably disposed on the one side member and the other side member, respectively, and to which the driving force of the driving means is applied; a pair of rod-shaped bodies fixed to the one side member and the other side member, respectively, wherein the rack is connected to the rod-shaped bodies and the connecting portion is slidable along the rod-shaped bodies. Characterized game machine E2.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the rod-shaped bodies are fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member, respectively, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body. to form a closed connecting loop between the displacement member and the one side member and between the other side member and the intermediate member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are not connected. As for connection, according to the game machine E2, the displacement member, the one side member, and the other side member can be connected (formed a closed connection loop) via the rack and the rod-like body. Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be enhanced. Further, by fixing the rod-shaped body to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

In addition, a rod-shaped body is fixed to the one-side member and the other-side member means that a rod-shaped body formed separately from the one-side member and the other-side member is attached to the one-side member and the other-side member and fixed ( For example, it is intended to include not only the case of fixing by fastening or adhesive fixing, but also the case of integrally forming a rod-shaped body with one side member and the other side member (for example, integrally by resin molding using a molding die). Moreover, it is preferable that the rod-shaped body is formed of a metal material. This is because, when the one-side member and the other-side member are made of a resin material, it is possible to efficiently improve the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member and stabilize the posture of the rack. Further, the driving force of the driving means may be applied to only one of the pair of racks, or may be applied to both of the pair of racks.

The game machine E1 comprises a ball screw mechanism having a nut, a screw shaft, and a plurality of balls interposed between the spiral grooves of the nut and the screw shaft, and the nut is attached to one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. and the screw shaft is disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the screw shaft of the ball screw mechanism is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, so that the displacement member is a ball A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it is displaced along a screw shaft of a screw mechanism.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the displacement member is connected to the one side member and the other side member via the ball screw mechanism, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are interposed. A closed connecting loop can be formed with the installation member. That is, in the conventional product, the connecting loop is divided between the rack to which the displacement member is connected and the pinions disposed on the one side member and the other side member, so that the displacement member and the one side member and the other side member are not connected. As for connection, according to the gaming machine E3, the displacement member, the one-side member, and the other-side member can be connected (formed a closed connection loop) via the ball screw mechanism. Therefore, the rigidity of the unit as a whole can be enhanced. Further, by fixing the screw shaft to the one-side member and the other-side member, the rigidity of the one-side member and the other-side member is improved accordingly. This point also contributes to increasing the rigidity of the unit as a whole.

In addition, the state of the displacement member tends to be unstable because the rack and pinion are subject to large fluctuations in their meshing state. On the other hand, in the ball screw structure, a plurality of balls are interposed between the spiral grooves of the nut and the screw shaft, so that there is very little variation in the meshing state. Therefore, for example, unlike the game machine E2, it is not necessary to separately provide a rod-shaped body. That is, for example, in the game machine E2, the first configuration (rack and pinion) for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, the improvement of the rigidity of the one side member and the other side member, and the stability of the rack posture The two configurations, the second configuration (rod-shaped body) for simplification, are formed by separate members, but according to the game machine E3, these two configurations are formed by one member (ball screw mechanism). can.

In addition, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end side is guided by the other side member, respectively, misalignment is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, It is difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop. In this case, the structure of the gaming machine E3, in which the displacement member is guided by the ball screw mechanism, is particularly effective in suppressing the deviation between the guidance by the one side safety and the guidance by the other side member.

The game machine E2 or E3 is characterized by comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Gaming machine E4.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2 or E3, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is located at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, there is a deviation between the guidance by one side member and the guidance by the other side member (that is, the deviation between the rack on the one side member side and the rack on the other side member side, or the deviation between the rack on the side of the one side member and the rack on the other side member Even if there is a deviation between the nut on one side and the nut on the other side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

In particular, according to the gaming machine E4, rod-shaped bodies or screw shafts are disposed on the one side member and the other side member, and the rack is connected to the rod-shaped body and the nut is connected to the screw shaft via the ball, respectively. Or the posture of the nut can be stabilized. As a result, when a deviation occurs between the guidance by the member on one side of the displacement member and the guidance by the member on the other side, the movable mechanism itself can be easily deformed, and the function of absorbing the deviation by the movable mechanism can be reliably exhibited. be able to.

A game machine E5 in any one of the game machines E1 to E4, wherein the interposed member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state. The relative positions of the side member and the other side member and the interposition member can be adjusted. Therefore, when a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between one side member and the other side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to an attachment target, for example, the one side member and the other side member or the intervening member After one of the installation members is installed, even if the other is displaced from the installation position, the position of the other can be adjusted to the installation position. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the mounting work.

In particular, when a movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position of the displacement member as in the game machine E4, the deformation of the movable mechanism can be used, so that the workability of attaching the unit to the attachment target is improved. can be achieved.

The modes of displacement of the interposed member with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member include, for example, rotation by pivoting, linear or curved sliding displacement by a guide groove, displacement in an arbitrary direction by loose fitting, or Displacement in a direction in which elastic deformation of an elastic body due to elastic support is allowed is exemplified.

In the gaming machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the intervening member are connected at one point, and the connection point is connected in a displaceable state by fastening with a screw. A game machine E6 characterized by.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5, at least one of the one-side member or the other-side member and the intervening member are connected at one point, and the connection point is fastened with a screw. Since they are connected in a displaceable state, relative rotation of the interposed member with respect to the one side member or the other side member can be permitted with the screw as the rotation axis. Therefore, when the unit (the structure in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member that guides the displacement member) is attached to the attachment target, the attachment position relative to the attachment target can be adjusted. The workability of the mounting work can be improved.

Furthermore, after the unit is attached to the object to be attached, the unit can be fixed to the object to be attached so as not to be displaced by the fastening force of the screws. That is, before the unit is attached, the screws are temporarily fixed, and the mounting position can be adjusted by the relative displacement described above. , the unit can be firmly fixed to the mounting object.

In addition, as a structure for fixing the unit so as not to be displaceable with respect to the mounting object, for example, a screw is formed as a tapping screw, and is fastened to the connecting portion between the one side member or the other side member and the intervening member, and the tapping screw circumference is By forming a unit in a relatively rotatable state and fastening the tip of the tapping screw to the mounting object, the whole is fixed so as not to be displaced by the axial force of the tapping screw.

A game machine E7 in the game machine E5 or E6, characterized in that at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member and the intervening member are connected by engagement in a displaceable state.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effects of the game machine E5 or E6, at least one of the one side member and the other side member and the intervening member are connected in a displaceable state by engagement, so that the one side member Alternatively, a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between a one-side member that guides a displacement member and the other-side member) is attached to an attachment target while allowing relative displacement of the intervening member with respect to the other-side member. Since it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate part such as a screw for connecting the two parts while improving workability, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The displaceable engagement includes a form in which the other shaft is rotatably inserted into one hole, a form in which the other shaft is slidably inserted into one groove, and a convex portion in one recess. are slidably fitted.

In any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, and biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, wherein the biasing A gaming machine E8 characterized in that the urging force of means acts on the interposed member so as to maintain a state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one-side member and the other-side member. .

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E5 to E7, an urging means disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in order to apply an urging force to the target member. The biasing force of the biasing means acts on the interposed member so as to maintain the state in which the interposed member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member. The interposed member can be at least temporarily fixed to the other-side member. Therefore, even if the interposition member is displaceable with respect to the one-side member and the other-side member, the unit (the displacement member can be guided) by temporary fixation using the biasing force of the biasing means. It is possible to improve work efficiency when attaching a structure in which an interposing member is interposed between one side member and the other side member) to an attachment target.

In addition, the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the object member but also for fixing the intervening member to the one-side member and the other-side member. Man-hours can be reduced.

As a mode for applying the biasing force of the biasing means to the intervening member, one end of the biasing means is connected to the target member and the other end is connected to the intervening member to apply the biasing force to the intervening member. In the first mode or when target members are arranged on each of the one-side member and the other-side member, one end of the urging means is connected to one target member of both the target members and the other target member is connected to the other target member. A second mode is exemplified in which the other end of the biasing means is connected and the intermediate portion between one end and the other end of the biasing means is brought into contact with the interposing member to apply the biasing force to the interposing member. be.

In the first form, the target member and the urging means may be arranged only on either one of the one side member and the other side member, and the target member and the biasing means may be arranged on each of the one side member and the other side member. An urging means may be provided, and the other ends of both urging means may be connected to the interposed member. In the former case, for example, in a structure in which the target member and the biasing means are arranged only on one side member out of the one side member and the other side member, one end side of the interposed member The other end side of the interposition member is rotatably connected to the other side member by the engagement of the protrusion, and the biasing force of the biasing means in the direction in which the protrusion is inserted into the recess. is applied to the intervening member so that the force is applied. According to this aspect, the intervening member is rotated around the shaft support on the other end side by the applied biasing force, and this rotation can form the concave-convex engagement. Even in the case of only one side member, it is possible to ensure the maintenance of the engagement (the state in which the interposition member is interposed between the one side member and the other side member) only by the urging force.

Also, as the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack engaged with the pinion is linearly moved. , exemplifies a rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member.

In any one of the game machines E5 to E8, when the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, it is connected in a state in which displacement in three-dimensional directions is permitted. Gaming machine E9.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E5 to E8, when the intervening member is connected to at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member in a displaceable state, three-dimensional Since they are connected in a state in which they are allowed to be displaced in any direction, it is possible to widen the adjustment range of the relative position between the one side member and the other side member and the interposing member. Therefore, when a unit (a structure in which an intervening member is interposed between a one-side member that guides a displacement member and the other-side member) is attached to an attachment target, for example, the one-side member, the other-side member, and the intervening member Even if the mounting surfaces of the installation members are not parallel to each other, the posture of each of these members can be adjusted with respect to the mounting surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability of the mounting work.

Any one of the game machines E1 to E9, comprising a base member to which the one side member, the other side member and the intervening member are attached, and at least the one side member and the other side member are displaceable with respect to the base member A gaming machine E10 characterized in that it is attached in a state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E9, at least one side member and the other side member are attached to the base member in a displaceable state, so that the displaceable member can be displaced. can be stabilized. That is, by attaching the one-side member and the other-side member to the base member in a displaceable state instead of rigidly connecting them to the base member, the displacement (that is, looseness or wobble) can be used to move the displaceable member. It is possible to absorb the deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, and as a result, the displacement of the displacement member can be stabilized.

In addition, the object to be attached to the base member in a displaceable state is a case where the intervening member is connected to the one side member and the other side member in a displaceable state, such as game machines E5 to E9. , only the one side member and the other side member may be attached, and in addition, the intervening member may also be attached in a displaceable state. On the other hand, when the intervening member is connected to the one side member and the other side member in a non-displaceable state (that is, rigidly connected), the one side member and the other side member and the intervening member Both are attached to the base member in a displaceable state.

In the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, a biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, and an intermediate portion of the biasing member abutted. A gaming machine E11, wherein the abutment member is disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E10, a target member disposed on at least one of the one-side member and the other-side member, biasing means for applying a biasing force to the target member, and and a contact member that contacts the intermediate portion of the biasing member, and the contact member is disposed on the base member, so that one of the one side member and the other side member (that is, the target member is disposed) object) is displaced (that is, rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the relative position of one of the one side member and the other side member and the abutment member can be changed. . Therefore, by changing the relative position, the contact position of the contact member with respect to the biasing means can be changed, and the biasing means can be in a bent posture or the degree of bending of the biasing means can be changed. It is possible to change the direction of the biasing force applied from the biasing means to the target member. That is, the biasing direction to the target member can be actively controlled only by the mechanical structure according to the state of one of the one-side member and the other-side member (change in posture with respect to the base member).

As the target member, a rack and a pinion are arranged on at least one of the one side member and the other side member, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rack meshed with the pinion is linearly moved. , exemplifies a rack in a structure that displaces a displacement member. Here, when one of the one-side member and the other-side member (on which the rack is arranged) is displaced (rattles or wobbles) with respect to the base member, the posture of the displacement member changes due to the rattle. As a result, the attitude of the rack changes, and the meshing state with the pinion becomes unstable. In this case, according to the gaming machine E11, as described above, the urging direction to the target member (rack) is actively controlled according to the state (change in posture) of one of the one side member and the other side member. Therefore, the biasing direction of the biasing means applied to the rack can be changed in the direction of stabilizing the meshing state with the pinion.

The game machine E2 comprises a second pinion directly or indirectly connected to the pinion and a second rack meshed with the second pinion, and the second rack is driven by the driving means. By rotating the second pinion, the rotation of the pinion accompanying the rotation of the second pinion drives the rack, displacing the displacement member, and the second rack is a crank mechanism. A gaming machine E12 characterized by being driven by the driving means via a.

Here, in the game machine E12, after the linear motion of the second rack is transmitted to the second pinion and the pinion and converted into rotary motion, the rotation is transmitted from the pinion to the rack and converted into linear motion. By adopting the stroke amount of linear motion is secured. In such a two-stage rack structure, if a structure is adopted in which the second rack is driven by the drive means via the third pinion, the second rack can be divided into the tooth flanks for the second pinion and the tooth flanks for the third pinion. , and the lengthwise dimension of the second rack increases accordingly.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the second rack is driven by the driving means via the crank mechanism, so the tooth surface for the third pinion can be eliminated. , the longitudinal dimension of the second rack can be reduced accordingly.

In the game machine E12, the crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has an eccentric pin that protrudes at a position eccentric from the rotation center and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the rotating body that extends from the second rack. A gaming machine E13 characterized by comprising a rack groove through which an eccentric pin is slidably inserted.

According to the game machine E13, in addition to the effects of the game machine E12, by rotating the rotating body by the driving force of the driving means, the eccentric pin positioned eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is moved to the rack groove of the second rack. can be slid (slide displacement) along the , and thereby the second rack can be linearly moved.

The rack groove may be a groove recessed in the second rack, or may be an opening (through hole) drilled in the second rack. Moreover, it is preferable that the extending direction of the rack groove is set in a direction perpendicular to the linear motion direction of the second rack. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of components other than the linear movement direction of the second rack in the force component acting on the rack groove of the second rack from the eccentric pin of the rotating body, and to that extent, the second rack can be moved while minimizing the resistance. This is because it can be moved in a straight line.

In the gaming machine E12, a protruding pin protruding from a surface of the rack facing the one-side member or the other-side member and a protruding pin of the rack extending from the one-side member or the other-side member are slidably inserted. and a guide groove,
The crank mechanism includes a rotating body having an eccentric pin projecting at a position eccentric from the rotation center and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a rotating body having the eccentric pin rotatably inserted into the second rack. and an axial hole formed;
In the guide groove of the one side member or the other side member, the second rack is displaced as the rotating body of the crank mechanism is rotated, and the projecting pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove. Thus, the gaming machine E14 is characterized in that the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion.

According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E12, the eccentric pin located eccentrically from the rotation center of the rotating body is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole of the second rack, so that the driving force of the driving means is increased. When the rotating body is rotated by the rotating body, the protruding pin of the second rack slides along the guide groove extending in the one side member or the other side member as the rotating body rotates. can be displaced along the tooth flank of the second pinion. Therefore, even if the attitude of the rack becomes unstable, it is possible to easily maintain constant meshing between the second rack and the second pinion, thereby stabilizing the transmission of the driving force.

The connection between the second rack and the crank mechanism (rotating body) is performed by rotatably inserting an eccentric pin into the shaft hole. Since it is not necessary to extend the slot-shaped groove for sliding (sliding) the eccentric pin, it is possible to suppress the decrease in rigidity of the second rack accordingly.

In addition, when the second rack is displaced along the tooth surface of the second pinion, when viewed in the axial direction of the second pinion, the linear tooth surface of the second rack is aligned with the arcuate tooth surface of the second pinion. It means an operation in which the second rack is rotated around the axis of the second pinion while maintaining a state of contact with the second rack (a state in which the straight line of the rack tooth flank is tangent to the circular arc of the pinion tooth flank).

Further, the guide groove may be a concave groove formed in the one-side member or the other-side member, or may be an opening (through hole) formed in the one-side member or the other-side member.

A gaming machine E15 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, it comprises detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism.

According to the game machine E15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, since it is provided with detection means for detecting the rotational position of the crank mechanism, based on the detection result, the rack is positioned at one end of the linear motion range. and reaching the other end side, that is, reaching the starting end and the terminal end of the displacement member, respectively.

In this case, in order to detect that the displacement member has reached the starting end and the terminal end, respectively, the detection means detects that the rack has reached one end and the other end of the linear movement range. Although it is necessary to dispose the detection units (sensors) at one end and the other end, there is a problem that the wiring becomes long because these two positions are separated from each other. That is, the increased length not only increases the cost of the members, but also makes it difficult to route the wiring to avoid interference with other members. Higher risk of disconnection in

On the other hand, according to the game machine E15, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines E12 to E14, the structure detects the rotational position (phase) of the crank mechanism by the detection means, so that one end of the crank rotation range and the other are detected. Even if the detectors (sensors) are arranged at the ends, they can be arranged close to each other. Therefore, since the wiring can be shortened, it is possible not only to reduce the member cost, but also to improve the degree of freedom in design and to suppress the occurrence of disconnection.

The crank mechanism includes a rotating body that has a crank pin protruding eccentrically from the center of rotation and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and a recess through which the crank pin of the rotating body is slidably inserted. A structure including a crank groove recessed in the second rack as the groove is exemplified. In this case, the detecting means detects the rotational position (phase) of the rotating body of the crank mechanism by its detecting portion (sensor).

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Upper Arm Body 435 or the Lower Arm Body 436 as an Example>
A performance member, a displacement means for displacing the performance member between a retracted position and a performance position, and a drive means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, wherein the performance member is placed at the performance position in a predetermined posture. In a game machine that can be arranged, the displacement means includes a base member and an arm body rotatably connected to the base member at one end and having the effect member displaceably disposed at the other end. and a regulating means for regulating the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm, wherein the effect member is moved to the retracted position and the effect by rotating the arm with respect to the base member about one end thereof. A game machine F1 characterized by being displaced between positions.

Here, the production member, a displacement means for displacing the production member between the retracted position and the production position, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement means, and the displacement means is a parallel link mechanism. , a game machine is known in which an effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at an effect position (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-28226).

That is, the parallel link mechanism includes a first arm and a second arm that are parallel to each other and have the same length and are interposed between the effect member and the base member. is rotated with respect to the base member while maintaining Therefore, it is possible to displace the production member while maintaining the posture thereof constant, and thus it is possible to arrange the production member in a predetermined posture at the production position.

However, in the structure in which the displacement means utilizes the parallel link mechanism, as in the conventional game machine described above, interference occurs between the first arm and the second arm. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the displacement means includes a base member, an arm body rotatably connected at one end to the base member, and an effect member disposed at the other end so as to be displaceable, and a regulating means for regulating the attitude of the effect member with respect to the arm body, so that when the arm body is rotated about the one end side with respect to the base member, the regulating means regulates the attitude of the effect member. It can be displaced, so that the effect member can be arranged in a predetermined posture at the effect position. In this case, since the arms do not interfere with each other, it is possible to ensure the motion range of the effect member.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means includes a pair of the arm bodies, and one end sides of the pair of arm bodies are rotatably connected to the base member, respectively, and the effect member is the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. The pair of arm bodies each have teeth formed on one end sides thereof, and the one end side is rotatably connected to the base member in a state in which the teeth are engaged with each other. The game machine F2 is characterized in that the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

According to the game machine F2, the displacement means includes a pair of arms, one end of which is rotatably connected to the base member, and the effect member is displaceably disposed on the other end. Then, the pair of arm bodies are rotated about one end side with respect to the base member, so that the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies are brought into contact with each other at the effect position.

In this case, according to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the pair of arm bodies each have teeth formed on one end thereof, and the base member is formed in a state in which the teeth are meshed with each other. Since one end side is rotatably connected to , the rotation of the pair of arm bodies can be synchronized. As a result, the effect members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies can be accurately brought into contact with each other at the effect positions. Further, when one of the pair of arm bodies is rotated, the other is also driven to rotate, so that the pair of arm bodies (performance members) can be operated by one driving means.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the arm body is oriented in the vertical direction at the retracted position.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the arms are oriented in the vertical direction at the retracted position, so that the weight of the production members can be supported by the arms. Accordingly, the driving force of the driving means required for holding the effect member at the retracted position can be suppressed. It should be noted that it is impossible for the conventional product using the parallel link mechanism to have the arm body in the vertical direction at the retracted position in this way (because the second arm interferes with the first arm). This has become possible for the first time with the present invention. As a result, it is possible to reduce the energy consumption of the driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the regulating means includes a slide body slidably disposed on the base member, and the effect member is slidably disposed on the slide body. , the slide body is slidably displaced with respect to the base member and the effect member is slidably displaced with respect to the slide body as the arm body is rotated about its one end side; A game machine F1 characterized in that the posture of the effect member with respect to the body is defined.

According to the game machine F4, in any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the regulating means includes a slide body slidably displaceable on the base member, and the effect member is slidably displaced on the slide body. By rotating the arm body about one end side, the slide body can be slidably displaced with respect to the base member and the effect member can be slidably displaced with respect to the slide body, and the effect member with respect to the arm body. can specify the posture of As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

In the gaming machine F4, the base member includes a guide shaft extending along the direction of sliding displacement of the slide body, and a pair of guide shafts extending parallel to the guide shaft and opposed to each other with a predetermined spacing. An upper end side of the slide body is slidably supported by a guide shaft of the base member, and a lower end side of the slide body is loosely fitted between the pair of opposed wall portions of the base member. A gaming machine F5 characterized by:

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F4, resistance when the slide body is slidably displaced with respect to the base member is suppressed, and the arm body is rotated about its one end side to produce the effect member. can be smoothly displaced.

For example, in a structure in which a pair of guide shafts are provided on the base member and one end and the other end of the slide body are slidably guided on each of the pair of guide shafts, there are two sliding portions, and frictional resistance is reduced. increases. On the other hand, in the game machine F4, since there is only one sliding portion, it is possible to suppress the frictional resistance when the sliding body is slidably displaced. Further, according to the game machine F4, since the slide body is suspended and supported by the guide shaft of the base member, even if the slide body vibrates and the lower end side of the slide body comes into contact with the opposing wall portion of the base member, , the slide body can be self-corrected to the posture along the vertical direction by the action of gravity. That is, the slide body can be returned to a state in which the lower end side thereof is loosely fitted between the pair of opposing walls of the base member. Therefore, also from this point, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance when the slide body is slidably displaced.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the displacement means includes a pair of arm bodies rotatably connected at one end side to the base member, and can displace the effect member to the other end side of the pair of arm bodies. and the regulating means connects the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arm bodies, and at least one of the connection parts with the production members is slidably displaceable. A slide connecting member is provided, and at least one of the connecting portions is slid and displaced as the arm rotates about one end thereof, and the pair of effect members are displaced. , a game machine F6 characterized in that a posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body is defined.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the regulating means connects the production members respectively arranged on the other end sides of the pair of arms and the production members. Since at least one of the connecting portions is provided with a slide connecting member that can be slidably displaced, at least one of the connecting portions is slidably displaced as the arm body is rotated about its one end side. , the pair of production members can be displaced, and the posture of the production members with respect to the arm body can be defined. As a result, the effect member can be arranged at the effect position in a predetermined posture.

In addition, in the game machine F6, two sets (a pair) of an arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the performance members of each set are connected by a slide connecting member. Since the posture of the effect member with respect to the arm body can be regulated by slidably displaceable connection by the (regulating means), it is not necessary to provide a suspension structure (slide body) as in the case of game machine F4 or F5, for example. do not have. That is, since the slide body can be omitted, the weight can be reduced. Therefore, even if the suspension structure is omitted, the rattling of the effect member can be suppressed only by the arm body.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F6, two sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the respective sets are disposed facing each other. At the retracted position, the effect members are spaced apart from each other at a predetermined interval, and the effect member whose one end side the arm body rotates from the retracted position is disposed at the effect position. Then, the effect members bring their contact surfaces into contact with each other. is provided with a positioning recess that extends along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion when the arm body is rotated and receives the positioning protrusion, and the positioning protrusion is formed with an engaging portion. In addition, the gaming machine F7 is characterized in that an engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning recess.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F6, the sets are arranged to face each other, and at the retracted position, the effect members of the sets are separated from each other at a predetermined interval. When the arm body is rotated around one end side, the sets of effect members are displaced toward each other, and in the effect members, the contact surfaces of the sets of effect members are brought into contact with each other. can be made

In this case, one of the mutual contact surfaces of the production members is provided with a positioning projection, and the other contact surface is provided with a positioning projection when the arm body is rotated. Since the positioning recesses that extend along the trajectory of the protrusions and receive the positioning protrusions are recessed, the positioning protrusions and the positioning recesses are engaged with each other at the performance position, and the performance members can be positioned with each other. . That is, since each set of effect members is brought close to each other along the trajectory of circular motion, it is impossible to engage a convex shape with a concave shape and a convex shape of the same size. Since it extends along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion when the arm body is rotated, the positioning protrusion can be received (engaged) in the positioning recess.

On the other hand, the positioning of the effect members by the engagement of the positioning recesses and the positioning protrusions is limited to the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the positioning recesses. That is, in order for the positioning recess to be able to receive the positioning protrusion even on the trajectory of the circular motion of the effect member, the positioning recess is extended along the trajectory of the positioning protrusion. Otherwise, the positioning protrusion cannot be engaged. Therefore, the production members cannot be positioned in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and rattling occurs.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F7, the engaging portion is formed in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion that can be engaged with the engaging portion is formed in the positioning concave portion. The engaging portion and the engaged portion can be engaged with each other at the position, and as a result, the performance members can be positioned with respect to each other even in the extending direction of the positioning recess, and the rattling can be suppressed. .

Here, it is also conceivable to omit the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion and provide only the engaging portion and the engaged portion to position the effect members. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion due to rattling and wobbling of the effect member caused by elastic deformation of the arm body, dimensional tolerance, and the like. On the other hand, in the game machine F7, the positioning concave portion and the positioning convex portion are first engaged to position the effect members, and then the engaging portion and the engaged portion are engaged. It is possible to suppress the influence of rattling and wobbling of the production member described above, and to reliably engage the engaging portion and the engaged portion.

In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which a ball is urged in a protruding direction by a spring, and the engaging portion and the engaged portion are The game machine F8 is characterized in that the other is formed as a spherical recess that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of the game machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spring-type ball plunger mechanism in which the ball is urged in the projecting direction by a spring, Since the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a spherical concave portion that receives and engages the ball of the ball plunger mechanism, the ball can be retracted as the effect members approach each other. As a result, the operation from the reception of the positioning projection in the positioning recess to the engagement between the engaging portion and the engaged portion can be performed smoothly. Disengagement from the joining portion can be smoothly performed in accordance with the movement of the effect member when it is displaced to the retracted position.

It is preferable that the engaging portion as the ball plunger mechanism is provided in the positioning convex portion, and the engaged portion as the concave portion is provided in the positioning concave portion. In this case, by pressing the ball of the ball plunger mechanism against the bottom surface of the positioning recess and retracting the ball, the ball of the ball plunger mechanism moves along the bottom surface of the positioning recess to the recess ( This is because it is possible to reliably form the engagement between the ball (engaging portion) and the recess (engaging portion).

In the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is drawn toward the one magnet by magnetic force. A game machine F9 characterized by being formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, one of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is formed as a magnet, and the other of the engaging portion and the engaged portion is a magnet. Since it is formed as a magnet or an iron member arranged in the direction of the magnetic poles that are attracted by the magnetic force, after the positioning convex portion is received in the positioning concave portion, the magnetic force can attract each other. Even if there is a positional deviation between the engaging portion and the engaged portion, the two can be engaged (magnetically attached) with high accuracy. As a result, it is possible to accurately position the effect members at the effect position.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F9, one side member and the other side member arranged at a predetermined interval, and the one side member and the other side member that are bridged between the one side member and the other side member A displacement member displaced by being guided by one end side and the other end side, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the displacement member. A game machine F17, comprising a body, wherein the rotating body is rotated by a driving force transmitted from the effect member when the effect member is arranged at the effect position.

According to the game machine F17, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F9, one end side of the displacement member can be guided by the one side member, and the other end side of the displacement member can be guided by the other side member. Therefore, the displacement member can be displaced along the one side member and the other side member by the driving force of the driving means. Further, the driving force transmitted from the effect member disposed at the effect position can rotate the rotating body disposed on the displacement member.

In this case, in a structure in which one end side of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end side is separately guided by the other side member, a deviation is likely to occur between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member. , it was difficult to stably displace the displacement member. If there is a large deviation between the guidance by the one side member and the guidance by the other side member, not only will the load on the driving means become excessive, but there is also the danger that the displacement member will stop.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F17, since the rotating body is rotated by the driving force transmitted from the effecting member arranged at the effecting position, the driving means for rotating the rotating body is disposed on the displacement member. can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the weight of the displacement member as a whole, and with such weight reduction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, thereby stabilizing the displacement member. can be displaced by In addition, the size of the rotating body can be increased to the extent that the weight can be reduced.

In order to rotate the rotator provided on the displacement member, the means for transmitting the driving force from the effect member provided at the effect position to the rotator includes, for example, a gear provided on the rotator and the effect member The gears provided on the rotor are engaged with each other by placing the effect member at the effect position, and the driving force is transmitted from the effect member to the rotating body through the gears. ) is arranged, a stator is arranged in the production member, and a structure (so-called DC motor structure) in which driving force is transmitted between the rotor and the stator, or the direction of the magnetic poles in the rotating body alternately arranged magnets (stationary magnets) along the circumferential direction, an electromagnet is arranged in the production member, and a structure (so-called linear motor structure) and the like are exemplified.

<Regarding the concept of the invention using the urging spring 11366 as an example>
a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member a pair of target members displaceably disposed on the base member, the biasing means disposed in a bent posture, and one of the pair of target members A gaming machine G1, wherein one end is directly or indirectly connected to one of the target members of the pair of target members, and the other end is directly or indirectly connected to the other target member of the pair of target members.

Here, a base member, a target member displaceably disposed on the base member, one end directly or indirectly connected to the target member and the other end directly or indirectly connected to the base member a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on a base member, and the pair of target members are each biased by a separate biasing means ( For example, see JP-A-2013-169262). According to this gaming machine, when the target member is driven by the driving means, the driving force of the driving means can be assisted by the biasing force of the biasing means.

However, in the game machine described above, each target member is urged by a separate urging means. However, there was a problem that variations occurred in the thickness.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when a pair of target members are displaceably arranged on the base member, one end and the other end of the urging means are attached to one and the other of the pair of target members. Since they are connected to each other, the urging force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform. That is, when two biasing means are provided, the biasing force applied to the pair of target members varies due to variations in the characteristics of each biasing means (such as dimensional tolerance). By applying an urging force to each of the pair of target members, it is possible to suppress variation in the urging force applied to each target member. As a result, variation in displacement of the pair of target members can be suppressed.

In this case, the pair of target members may be arranged on one base member, or the base member may be divided and the pair of target members may be arranged on separate base members. It may be in the form of

In addition, the game machine G1 includes one side member and the other side member which are arranged at a predetermined interval, and one end side and the other side member which are installed between the one side member and the other side member and which are connected to the one side member and the other side member. It is particularly effective to apply the present invention to a game machine provided with a displacement member whose other end side is guided and displaced, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member. Specifically, it is effective to apply the game machine G1 to a configuration that guides one end side of the displacement member and a configuration that guides the other end side of the displacement member. In such a game machine, it is difficult to stably displace the displacement member due to the tendency of misalignment between the guidance on one end side of the displacement member and the guidance on the other end side of the displacement member. By applying , the biasing force applied to the pair of target members can be made uniform, and the variation in displacement between them can be suppressed, so that the guidance on one end side and the other side of the displacement member can be made uniform. . As a result, the displacement member can be stably displaced by suppressing the occurrence of the deviation.

In the gaming machine G1, a connecting member connected to the base member is provided, one end and the other end of the biasing means are connected to one and the other of the pair of target members, respectively, and an intermediate portion of the biasing means is The urging force of the urging means is applied so that the connection member is pressed against the base member by being brought into contact with the connection member, and the connection between the base member and the connection member is maintained. Gaming machine G2.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the intermediate portion of the urging means having one end and the other end connected to each of the pair of target members is brought into contact with the connecting member, and the connecting member is used as the base. An urging force is applied to the member so as to maintain the connection between the base member and the connecting member, so that the connecting member can be at least temporarily fixed to the base member. Therefore, such temporary fixing can improve the work efficiency when attaching the base member and the connecting member to the attachment target. In addition, since the biasing force of the biasing means can be used not only for biasing the target member but also for fixing the connecting member to the base member, a member (for example, , fastening screws) are not required to be prepared separately, and there is no need to perform fastening work. Therefore, the number of parts and assembly man-hours can be reduced accordingly.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Arm Body 7641 and the Roller Receiving Portion 7311e as an Example>
a one-side member and the other-side member arranged at a predetermined interval; A displacement member to be displaced and a driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member, the displacement member being a rotating body rotatably disposed on the displacement member and a rotational driving force to the rotating body. A game machine H1 comprising: a rotation drive means for providing a displacement regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member.

Here, a game is known in which an effect of rotating a rotating body is performed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-231926). Also, the one side member and the other side member are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween, the long displacement member bridged between the one side member and the other side member, and the driving force is applied to the displacement member. There is known a game machine provided with driving means for driving (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-14602). For example, when the former rotating body is arranged in the latter displacing member, the position at which the rotation of the rotating body performs an effect can be changed by displacing the displacing member.

However, in this case, if one end of the displacement member is guided by the one side member and the other end is guided by the other side member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated, there is a problem that rattling and wobbling of the displacement member are likely to be amplified due to the rotation of the rotating body, resulting in wear and damage of the movable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, since the displacement restricting means for restricting the displacement of the displacement member is provided, it is possible to suppress the rattling and wobbling of the displacement member when rotating the rotating body. . Therefore, even if the rotating body is rotated, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member can be suppressed, and as a result, wear and damage of the movable portion can be suppressed.

Further, even when other members are arranged at positions close to the rotating body at the production position, the displacement restricting means can suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member, so that the rotating body collides with the other member. can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to perform an effect in which the rotating body is rotated while the other member is positioned close to the rotating body.

In addition, four sets of an arm body and a production member displaceably arranged on the other end side of the arm body are arranged, and at the production position, the production members of each group are in contact with each other to form a circle. A form in which an annular shape is formed and the annular shape is arranged so as to surround the rotating body (an annular shape is arranged around the rotating body) may be adopted. According to the gaming machine H1, as described above, it is possible to suppress rattling and wobbling of the displacement member, thereby suppressing collision of the rotating body with the effect member. That is, even in a form in which the annular shape (drawing member) surrounds the rotating body, it is possible to prevent these collisions, so that the two can be brought close to each other and a smaller gap can be formed between the annular shape and the rotating body. Therefore, while making the player recognize the ring shape and the rotating body as one circle as a whole, an effect of rotating only the rotating body can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

A gaming machine H1 comprising a deformable movable mechanism, wherein the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one position between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. H2.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, a movable mechanism formed to be deformable is provided, and the movable mechanism is interposed in at least one place between one end side and the other end side of the displacement member. Therefore, even if a deviation occurs between the guidance by the one-side member and the guidance by the other-side member, the deviation can be absorbed by the movable mechanism and the displacement member can be stably displaced.

On the other hand, when a movable mechanism is interposed in the displacement member, the displacement member is likely to rattle or wobble due to the deformation of the movable mechanism. Therefore, when the rotating body is rotated, the displacement member rattles and wobbles more than when the movable mechanism is not provided, and wear and damage of the movable portion are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H2, the displacement of the displacement member can be regulated by the displacement regulating means. As a result, it is possible to suppress abrasion and breakage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and the production member.

It should be noted that it is impossible to produce an effect by bringing the effect member close to the rotating rotating body as described above because it is necessary to avoid collision with the rotating body. Since the displacement member rattles and wobbles excessively, it has been impossible to rotate the rotating body itself. In contrast, as in the present invention, by adopting a structure in which the displacement of the displacement member is regulated by the displacement regulating means, it becomes possible for the first time to rotate the rotating body even when a movable mechanism is provided. It is a thing.

In the gaming machine H2, the movable mechanism includes a guide groove and a guided portion guided along the guide groove, and the displacement restricting means is configured so that the guided portion of the movable mechanism is aligned with the guide groove. A gaming machine H3 characterized by restricting at least displacement of the displacement member in a direction guided along.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the displacement restricting means restricts at least the displacement of the displacement member in the direction in which the guided portion of the movable mechanism is guided along the guide groove. It is possible to efficiently regulate the factors that cause rattling and wobbling of members. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress rattling and wobble of the displacement member while reducing the force required for the displacement restricting means.

In the game machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformable members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the displacement restricting means is an insertion member formed to be insertable into the gap. A game machine H4, wherein the insertion body is inserted into the gap.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2 or H3, a gap is formed between one and the other of the deformation members divided by the interposition of the movable mechanism, and the deformation member can be inserted into the gap. Since the displacement regulating means has an insertion member which is inserted into the gap and the insertion body is inserted into the gap, the movable mechanism can be restrained so as not to be deformed (that is, the movable mechanism can be fixed). As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from rattling or wobbling when the rotating body is rotated, thereby suppressing wear and damage of the movable portion and collision between the rotating body and other members.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotation base is provided to support the rotary body and is formed concentrically with the rotating body. The game machine H5 is characterized in that the displacement of the displacement member is restricted by being brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement members by contacting the perimeter of the rotation base with the production members of each set or the displacement means when the production members are arranged at the production positions. The displacement can be restricted by contacting the outer periphery of the rotation base at a certain point. That is, since the outer circumference of the rotation base is held at a plurality of locations, it is possible to suppress displacement of the rotation base in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body (that is, rattling or wobbling of the displacement member), and a plurality of effect members. The relative position of the rotating body with respect to can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of the arm body and a performance member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, and the displacement member rotates the rotating body. A rotating base is provided to support the rotary body and is formed concentrically with the rotating body. One of the effect member or displacement means and the rotating base is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnet or iron. A member is provided, and the displacement regulating means is arranged such that when the effecting member is disposed at the effecting position, the magnetic force acting between the effecting member of each set or the displacement means and the rotation base causes the A game machine H6 characterized by regulating the displacement of a displacement member.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H4, at least three sets of an arm body and an effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body are provided, The displacement regulating means regulates the displacement of the displacement members by the magnetic force acting between each group of the production members or the displacement means and the rotation base when the production members are arranged at the production positions. It is possible to regulate the displacement of the rotation base by applying a magnetic force at the location. That is, since magnetic forces are applied to the rotation base from a plurality of directions, it is possible to suppress displacement of the rotation base (that is, looseness and wobble of the displacement member) in any direction in the radial direction of the rotating body, The relative position of the rotating body with respect to the production member can be positioned at a predetermined position.

In the game machines H5 and H6, the contact positions where the performance members or displacement means of each set are brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base or the positions where the magnetic force is applied are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (for example, in the case of three sets, are preferably set at 120° intervals). In this case, there are four sets of the arm body and the effect member displaceably disposed on the other end side of the arm body, and the effect member or the displacement means of each set is brought into contact with the outer circumference of the rotation base. It is preferable that the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force is applied are equally spaced in the circumferential direction (that is, at 90° intervals). Since the rotating base can be constrained from all sides by arranging the contact positions or the positions where the magnetic force acts on each other to face each other (arranged with a phase difference of 180°), the displacement (rattling and wobble) can be prevented in any direction. In addition, when the relative position of the rotating body with respect to the production member of each set is displaced, the rotation with respect to the production member is caused by the contact when the production member of each group is arranged at the production position. This is because the relative position of the body can be corrected (positioned). When the four sets of effect members form an annular shape at the effect position, it is possible to perform centering for positioning the rotating body concentrically with respect to the annular shape, which is particularly effective.

Further, when magnets are arranged on both the effect member or the displacement means and the rotation base, the direction of the magnetic poles of these magnets may be the direction in which the magnetic force acts in the direction of attracting each other, or The magnetic force may be applied in a direction to repel each other.

In the game machine H5 or H6, when the effect members of each set are arranged at the effect position, the contact surfaces of the effect members adjacent to each other are brought into contact with each other, and one of the contact surfaces is brought into contact with each other. is provided with a magnet, and the other contact surface is provided with a magnet or an iron member with a magnetic pole directed in a direction in which the magnet is attracted by the magnetic force, The game machine H7 is characterized in that when the effect member is arranged at the effect position, contact surfaces of the effect member are magnetically attached to each other.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of the game machine H5 or H6, when each set of production members is arranged at the production position, each production member contacts the adjacent production members with their contact surfaces. Since the contact surfaces are magnetically attached to each other by using the magnetic force of the magnet, the effect members can be strongly connected to each other. As a result, when the displacement regulating means (effect member or displacement means) comes into contact with the rotation base or exerts a magnetic force to regulate the displacement of the rotation base, the displacement regulating means (effect member) itself may wobble. The rotation base can be firmly held by suppressing rattling. As a result, it is possible to reliably suppress the displacement of the rotation base member (that is, rattling and wobbling of the displacement member), and to reliably position the rotating body relative to the plurality of effect members at a predetermined position.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Game machine K1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of game machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine K2. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A17, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D15, E1 to E15, F1 to F10, G1 and G2, and H1 to H7, the gaming machine comprises a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a fusion. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game machine that displaces a displacement member by transmitting a driving force of a drive means by a rack and a pinion (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2014-28226 (for example, Fig. 20)). In this case, for example, in a structure that raises and lowers the displacement member, due to the influence of gravity acting on the displacement member, a larger driving force is required when raising the displacement member than when lowering it. Therefore, it is also possible to provide an urging means for applying an urging force along the linear movement direction of the rack, and to assist the driving force of the driving means with the urging force of the urging means.
However, the game machine described above has a problem that the transmission of driving force tends to be unstable.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of stabilizing the transmission of driving force.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of Technical Thought 1 comprises driving means for generating a driving force, and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means. a rack and pinion for transmitting force to the displacement member; Non-parallel to the direction.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the urging means is formed of an elastic body.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, wherein the elastic body is formed of a coil spring or an elongated elastomer and arranged in a bent posture.
<effect>
According to the game machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to stabilize the transmission of the driving force.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, it is possible to stably energize the rack.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, it is possible to easily secure the space necessary for arranging the elastic body.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
210 rear case (base member)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310 Displacement member 311a Protruding pin (guided portion, part of movable mechanism)
311b Stopper surface (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
312 rotation base 313 rotating body (second displacement member)
314a long hole (guide groove, part of movable mechanism)
314b Stopper surface (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
314c Slider holding portion (part of connecting portion)
315c Slider holding portion (part of connecting portion)
315 first rack (rack)
320L One side member 320R, 10320R, 13320R Other side member 331, 10331, 15331, 16331 Rear base (facing member, base member, cover member)
331b rack shaft (part of guide means, part of direct-acting restricting means, projecting portion, second engaging portion)
331c first opening (opening)
331d second opening (opening)
332, 10332 intermediate base (base member, cover member)
341 drive motor (driving means)
351 1st pinion (pinion)
363 crank gear (part of crank mechanism, rotating body)
363a Eccentric pin 364 Second rack (rack, target member)
364a guide groove (part of guide means, guided portion)
364b rack shaft (part of crank mechanism, guide groove)
365a second pinion (pinion)
366, 11366 biasing spring (biasing means)
367 roller (rotating contact member, contact member)
367b flange portion (stop plate member)
370 Interposed member (connection member)
420 rear base (base member, cover member)
422a upper rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
422b lower rack shaft (connecting part, projecting part)
431 drive motor (driving means)
433 rack 433c upper guide groove (opening, guided portion)
433d Lower guide groove (opening, guided portion)
435 upper arm body (arm body)
436 lower arm body (arm body)
440R1, 440R2 Annular segmented body (part of regulation means, third displacement member, effect member)
440L1, 440L2 Annular segmented body (part of regulation means, third displacement member, effect member)
450 posture regulation member (part of regulation means, slide body)
460 slide mechanism (part of base member)
462 guide rod (guide shaft)
480 cover body (cover member, base member)
491 Positioning projection 491a Engaging recess (engaging portion or engaged portion)
492 Positioning concave portion 492a Engaging convex portion (engaged portion or engaging portion)
2610 ball joint (part of the movable mechanism)
2620 biasing spring (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
3630, 5630 Rubber-like elastic body (elastic body, part of movable mechanism)
7311e Roller receiving part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
7641 arm body (part of control means, part of displacement control means)
8641 base (part of restricting means, part of displacement restricting means)
8642 insertion part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
9652a-9652e magnets (part of biasing means)
9651 metal rod (part of biasing means)
10331e slit part (guide means)
10367 Roller (rotational abutment, displacement abutment member, abutment member)
10367b First flange portion (stop plate member)
10367c Second flange portion (stop plate member)
11661 roller (displacement contact member, contact member)
13671 telescopic actuator (contact member driving means)
15331g First regulation part (part of guide means)
15331h Second regulation part (part of guide means)
16681 recess (a part of direct motion restricting means, first engaging portion)
17493a recessed portion (engaging portion or engaged portion)
17495 Ball plunger mechanism 17495a Ball portion (engaged portion or engaging portion)
18453 holding part (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1991 Magnet (part of regulation means, part of displacement regulation means)
1992 Metal plate (part of control means, part of displacement control means)
P Guide rod (rod-shaped body)
S Slider (part of connecting part)

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force of the driving means,
a rack and pinion for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member;
and biasing means for applying a biasing force to the rack,
A gaming machine, wherein the direction of the biasing force applied to the rack from the biasing means is non-parallel to the direction of direct movement of the rack. 2. A game machine according to claim 1, wherein said biasing means is made of an elastic material. 3. A game machine according to claim 2, wherein said elastic body is formed of a coil spring or an elongated elastomer and arranged in a bent posture.

Images